We all know that dehumidifiers are placed in the center of a large room for better functioning, but should we do the same in a bathroom? Not exactly! Bathrooms are tiny, so even placing them in a corner does an excellent job of humidity reduction. Whereas if you place a dehumidifier in the center, it's sure to take some of your valuable bathroom space.
Don't worry, though; our bathroom dehumidifier placement guide will walk you through the process. If you're aiming to use a dehumidifier as an air filter and are ready to incorporate it into your HVAC system, let's uncover important information about their placement.
Bathroom Dehumidifier Placement Guide
The damp air after having a hot shower increases the moisture content of the air in the bathroom, which leads to condensation, a ticking bomb waiting to explode. Persistent condensation leads to mold growth in areas like cracked ceilings, separated wood floors, caulking, etc., which is nothing but a disaster.
Though such problems don't occur in places with adequate ventilation, the same can’t be said about places where this isn’t the case. The relative humidity level of the bathroom shouldn’t exceed 60%; otherwise, it becomes a breeding ground for mold, dust mites, and other unwanted organisms.
Thus, a bathroom dehumidifier is necessary for high-humidity areas like the bathroom, laundry room, basement, or crawl space to maintain air quality and remove excess moisture. Now, people often ask, “can you use a dehumidifier in the bathroom?” If you’re one such person, then know that placing a dehumidifier in the bathroom is a great way to avoid multiple problems caused by low ventilation and condensation.
Now, once you realize the importance of a dehumidifier for the bathroom, next comes the most tricky part - its placement. Ideally, dehumidifiers are placed in the center in high humidity areas to ensure overall moisture reduction and better efficiency. However, that can’t be done in a bathroom as bathrooms are smaller than regular rooms, and bathroom humidity varies from room humidity.
Moreover, with lots of splashing going on, we can’t be careless with their placement, especially with a tank dehumidifier that stores water in a tank. Don’t worry, though! Some of the essential factors mentioned below can help in deciding an ideal location for your bathroom dehumidifier.
Persistence of moisture
Size of the bathroom
Size of the dehumidifier
Moisture sources
An unobstructed area
Where To Place Dehumidifier In Bathroom?
If it’s your first time hearing about a dehumidifier for the bathroom and how it will work or be placed in the bathroom, then rest assured. We’re here to guide you on what, how, and where dehumidifiers should be placed in a bathroom.
1. What?
Now, first things first! Before explaining where dehumidifiers should be placed, let us first highlight the type of dehumidifier you should use. You should choose a dehumidifier depending on the dehumidification needs, the bathroom’s size, and other requirements.
People facing persistent issues with increased humidity levels in the bathroom should consider a dehumidifier with a continuous draining outlet. You can also consider a portable dehumidifier as those work great too.
Also, when it comes to size, we'd suggest buying a small dehumidifier for a bathroom. As a small dehumidifier can be placed on a shelf or a toilet bowl without taking up too much space, you should consider that.
But no matter the dehumidifier type or size, it’s better to get a high-efficiency one with an energy star rating, as the Environmental Protection Agency and Department of Energy recommended.
2. Where?
Once you’ve decided on the kind of dehumidifier for your bathroom, next comes the location where it should be placed. As you know, a dehumidifier is an electronic device that needs to be plugged into an electrical outlet and works to remove excess humidity; it should be placed very carefully.
Accordingly, you should position the dehumidifier in a place in the bathroom which experiences less splashing to avoid electrical hazards. Other than that, dehumidifiers require clearance, so their vents must not be blocked to ensure proper functioning. As such, you shouldn’t place it in the close vicinity of other objects that block the passage, which filters out air.
It would be ideal if you place the dehumidifier away from the wall and not too close. When it comes to plugging, you should set it in an area with a grounded plug and not use an extension cord, as it can lead to electric shock.
Also, you shouldn’t place a dehumidifier close to a window as any gaps in the area will let the outside air in, which can reduce its functioning.
If there’s an area in the bathroom that experiences excessive moisture, you should place the dehumidifier in that place only for better and faster dehumidification. On that note, people often ask, “does a dehumidifier help dry towels in the bathroom?” If you’re one of them, then know that both have their functions.
In areas with persistent moisture buildup, a dehumidifier is ideal as it must run 24/7 to maintain air quality. In such a scenario, a bathroom exhaust fan won’t be suitable. But a dehumidifier tends to be expensive, and people with an exhaust fan don’t usually prefer a dehumidifier. So, in the end, it all depends on personal preference.
3. How?
Once you have decided on an ideal location for your dehumidifier, it’s finally time to make it work. For better performance and energy efficiency, it’s better to set the dehumidifier to a medium or high setting when someone has recently showered.
As the bathroom’s humidity levels are incredibly high after showering, a high or medium setting will soon suck off air moisture. Afterward, change it to a low setting again. Also, if the humidity problem isn’t persistent, running a dehumidifier for 20 minutes after showering is enough to remove moisture.
Where To Place Dehumidifier In Bathroom Final Remarks
Warm air after hot showers is a curse for our bathrooms as it increases the humidity level. Excess humidity causes a list of problems that need to be handled before it escalates further and destroys the wooden floor or tiles.
To tackle these problems, you should get a proper size dehumidifier so it can fit easily anywhere and perform efficiently. No matter what location you decide, always ensure it has an unobstructed airflow, and no objects are placed in its vicinity that block the vents of the dehumidifier.
That’s all about dehumidifier placement in the bathroom. Till then, keep enjoying relaxing showers without worrying about condensation!
Colored pencils are one of the easiest ways to get started with painting. But as you practice and learn to start getting better at it, you'll want to take it to the next level.
And if you want to make your paintings look more sophisticated and elegant, there's no better way than to start blending your colors and experimenting with different shades.
Unfortunately, learning how to blend is easy, to begin with, but is hard to master. It becomes even more problematic with color pencils.
How To Blend Colored Pencils
The Problem With Colored Pencils
If you're working with charcoal or soft pastels, it's pretty easy to get the colors to blend. A simple smudge with a figure is enough to get the ball rolling. The pigment material is powdery, thus it's very malleable and can easily be transferred across the page under or over different shades of colors.
Colored pencils, on the other hand, aren't that powdery and tend to stick to the materials on which they are applied. Thus, we can't just use our fingers or do simple overlapping to blend the colors. We'll have to use a few special tools instead, which are used for the explicit purpose of blending.
But before we teach you how to get started with blending, let's take a look at how the composition of your paints affects the blend-ability.
The Right Materials
First and foremost, you'll need to ensure you're using the right paper for your pencils. Paper made out of wood pulp are usually cheaper, but the fibers in it are really short and unwieldy.
They can quickly get distorted and break off under excess pressure or under the application of too much pigment. As always, it's best to get a high-quality paper, as it's just one less thing to worry about.
Just like the drawing paper, you will get different results with different brands of coloring pencils. The results will also vary depending on the color of the pencils.
Some pencils are a bit powdery and chalky and are therefore not that easy to smudge. Other ones, though have a wax base which makes the color much more malleable and easier to blend together.
When it comes to the color, darker colors might seem to blend more quickly, however, whereas some pigments will be drier or more granular. The most opaque ones work best.
Because blend-ability differs so much from brand to brand and also, within brands, it's hard to pinpoint which ones will work best and which ones won't. However, the techniques we'll tell you about below should suffice for pretty much everything out there.
Color Blending Techniques
Layering Colors
Although this method isn't as effective as the other ones on this list, this is still the most common and easiest way of blending colors - put one layer on top of another. By overlaying light layers of different colors, you can get an excellent gradation going as long as you are using high-quality pencils.
As every artist would know, the bottom layer should never be too heavy, and it should get heavier and heavier as you go from the bottom layers to the top. Also, remember to never use darker colors for the foundation layers. Once dark colors stick to the fivers, it becomes hard to blend. So, always start with your lightest colors.
Using Solvents
Solvents are liquids which melt the color binders in oil and wax-based color pencils. They can be used to remove pencil strokes, flatten the surface of your work, and they let you layer different colors more easily and quickly.
Solvents are to be used sparingly and are applied via paintbrush. They are usually mixed with a little bit of liquid. Here are the most common types of solvents.
Oil-based solvents
Turpenoid or turpentine alternatives are frequently used because they can dissolve the wax in the color pigments very easily. The dissolved pigment can then be worked into the tooth of the paper. Of all the solvents, turpentine makes for the strongest blend and works the best when it comes to eliminating the texture and tooth of the paper.
Just remember that these are toxic and you should practice with extreme care while handling these solvents. Make sure you store it in a sealed container, and you blot out excess solvent from your brush. Keep a few paper towels handy.
Alcohol Based Solvents
If you're looking for a less intense blend, apply rubbing alcohol, which is 70 percent or less in strength. Stronger blends will suck the color right out.
It might take some time, and the blend might not be as smooth as you want it, but there definitely is a lot less room for error while using alcohol-based solvents.
Baby oil
Baby oil is the choice of solvent for plenty of people and has always been a popular choice for blending colored pencils. Baby oil dissolves the binding of the pencils, which allows the pigment to be spread easily over the surface. It is safe, odorless, and can be easily applied with a soft brush.
Using Colorless Solvent Markers
These look like regular markers, but they have no color. You can use them to soften and then blend the paints, making for a watercolor-like effect. They are a lot like using solvents except that they are in the form of a marker.
These markers are usually alcohol based. The tip of the marker is laid out with alcohol, and when you move the tip over the colors, it dissolves the binding and lets you blend your colors. Because the application is so localized, you can have a much more seamless blend of all your different colors.
Using Colorless Blending Pencils
A colorless blender pencil is essentially another wax-based color pencil, however, it is devoid of any pigment. When you use this color pencil, you are putting on applications of wax over all your colors.
Once, there is enough wax on top of your colors, you can start to blend them. These blenders allow you to have more control over the specific areas which need blending. Since you can also sharpen a pencil, you have a lot more precision as well.
Burnishing or shining is a technique used for layering colored pencils, by using your pencils to apply very heavy pressure. Burnishing with a blending pencil lets you even out your colors and decrease excessive saturation, thereby making for a smoother painting. These blenders are particularly useful in mid-tones and highlights.
Using Tortillons Or Paper Smudging
Paper products and paper stumps like tortillons are used mostly in the domain of charcoal paintings, but they work to a fair extent on color pencils as well. And the best part is you don't need to buy any tools separately.
A piece of tissue paper, or paper towel or any paper with a slight amount of grain in its texture will work. You can even use a cotton swab - it doesn't need to be fancy at all.
If you want a bit more precision though, our suggestion would be to use a tortillon (blending stump). They will let you fine-tune your blending and will be a valuable addition to your painting arsenal.
These techniques are most effective when you're blending a very heavy layer of color. Burnishing or putting in as much color as you can will maximize its effect. Just make sure your paper is sturdy enough to hold that much pigment.
A Few Essential Tips
Now that you've got the basic hang of what tools you need and how to start blending your colors, here are a few more suggestions to keep in mind.
- As we already mentioned above, you need to blend colors from light in the bottom layers to darker up top.
-When using a solvent, make sure it dries before you start painting on it again.
- While burnishing, build up the pressure gradually. If the surface of the paper has become too dark, let it dry out for a bit.
- Draw on smooth paper. If the texture is more grainy, it helps in color absorption, but it will be harder to fill in gaps and also smoothen out the different shades.
Final Words
Well, that wraps it up from us today. Remember that different methods affect your painting differently. Hence, it's worth experimenting a bit to figure out which ones are most suited for your particular piece.
It's a bright sunny day, so what's better than sitting outside to draw an exquisite landscape while listening to the birds chirping?
You take your canvas, brush, easel, and your fine grade acrylic paints outside and apply the basic shades. But the moment you start blending the colors, you shockingly find that the paint has already dried.
No wonder there, as several factors determine how acrylic paints behave, and the final finish on the canvas. You can learn how to varnish acrylic painting to get a smoother surface rather than a dried one. It’s also worth noting that acrylic paint can be used on metals and numerous other materials so the base you paint on heavily influences the paint's quick drying properties. If you plan to create custom graphics on your old bike or simply want to beautify your garden gate do note drying times and paint behavior will change. If you didn't know about this earlier, today's guide explains everything on how long do acrylic paints take to dry.
FUN FACT | Did you know starting with oil is much tougher than with acrylic while painting?
If you are keen to know how to start with oil paints, we have an excellent article on oil paints to curb your interest.
So, without further ado, lets begin!
How Long Does It Take For Acrylic Paint To Dry?
Although acrylic paint dries faster than other types of paint, as we mentioned above the drying time depends on several factors, including the brand and composition of the paint. To determine how long it will take for an acrylic painting to be ready, you need to consider the following points:
Brand value
Thickness
Humidity
Air circulation
Temperature
Paint type
Surface material
Painting technique
Usually, fast-drying acrylic paint dries between 20 and 30 minutes, while some brands dry to touch even sooner, within 10-20 minutes. But if you want to let the acrylic painting rest, it would be best to use slow-drying acrylic paint as it remains wet far longer. This proves useful for painters who want to achieve a smooth finish with soft edges.
Professional acrylic painters often add retarders to the color before painting to increase drying time for more flexibility while working. But even more important is the curing time because it affects the finish if the paint doesn't cure well.
Based on the number of layers and their thickness, it could take anywhere between a few days and a couple of weeks for the painting to be ready.
Is Acrylic Paint Drying Time Different For Various Brands?
We mentioned that one of the key factors that impact the drying process of acrylic paints is the type of the brand. To help you, we have narrowed down the top brands and mentioned their drying time.
1. Golden
It has two types of acrylic paint - Golden open acrylics and heavy-body paints. The latter takes 30 minutes to dry to touch, while the Golden artist colors in open acrylics have a lockdown period of over 3 days.
2. Arteza
Arteza is known for its artist-quality and fast-drying acrylic paints that dry between 15 and 60 minutes.
3. Atelier Interactive
This brand uses a unique unlocking formula to ensure that it takes 20 minutes on average for the acrylic paint to dry.
4. Daler-Rowney
It uses Cryla Artists' acrylic fast-drying paints and offers one of the fastest drying times on the market: 5-10 minutes.
5. Grumbacher
If you're new to acrylic paintings, you're better off starting with student-grade paints from this brand that dry within 3-5 days.
6. Utrecht
Another fast-drying acrylic paint brand is Utrecht, but it depends on the thickness of the paint layers. Thin layers will dry within 10-20 minutes, but thick layers will take longer, about an hour to 3 days.
7. Holbein Acrylic
If you're looking for professional-grade heavy body paints, try Holbein Acrylic's products as they dry in 20-30 minutes.
8. Tri-Art
Tri-Art is one of the top brands for fast-drying paints, provided you use a thin layer, which can dry in 5 minutes. But when you need to apply thicker layers, it will take several hours for the painting to dry.
9. Blick Studio
Blick Studio manufactures professional-grade products so that your preferred acrylic paint dries faster in 20-30 minutes. But applying thick layers can increase the drying time by a couple of hours.
10. Sennelier
This brand produces fast-drying paints with thin layers taking 10-20 minutes and thick layers taking 1 hour or several days to dry.
11. Winsor & Newton
Consumers looking for professional acrylic paint will love what Winsor & Newton offers. You can expect the thin layers to dry under 30 minutes, but slightly thicker layers will take 1-2 hours. It also has another variant, the Galeria Acrylic fast-drying paint, which can dry in 10-20 minutes when the layers are thin and 1 hour when you're using heavier shades.
12. Matisse
To make acrylic paint dry faster, it would help if you apply a thin layer of Matisse's products that are set in 10-20 minutes. A thick layer takes longer, roughly around 1 hour to several days.
13. Amsterdam
No, we aren't talking about the popular holiday destination (forgive us for this bad joke). But Amsterdam is a popular brand with fast-drying paints that are set in 10-20 minutes. And if you apply thicker layers, it may take upto several days.
14. Maimeri
Maimeri offers results similar to Amsterdam, with thin layers drying under 20 minutes while thicker films take several days to set completely.
15. Castle Art Supplies
One of the most well-known brands among artists is Castle Art Supplies, and it has fast-drying acrylic paints that require 10-20 minutes to dry. But an extra layer of paint will take between 1 hour and 3 days to set.
16. M Graham Acrylic
These paints don't take more than 30 minutes to dry, which makes them suitable when you're facing a time crunch.
17. Liquitex
Liquitex produces fast-drying paints with thin layers drying in 10-20 minutes and thick layers taking longer, around 1 hour to a few days.
18. Crafts 4 All
Consumers who don't mind fast-drying paints should opt for paint colors from this brand that are set within 10-20 minutes.
From the above list, it's clear that acrylics dry to touch quickly, so your painting should be ready without much hassle. Professional painters even know about certain tricks to increase or decrease the drying time.
Before we delve into this in greater detail, let us discuss an open secret involving retarders. They help prolong the drying process, something Golden has used in its Open Acrylics paint line so that its paints stay wet for at least 24 hours.
On the flip side, you'll have to compromise on the opacity when using retarders because they dilute the pigments in the paint. Most people choose heavy body acrylics for this reason, as they retain their vibrancy despite the presence of retarders.
What's The Difference Between Fully Cured And Drying To Touch
When working with an acrylic gel or paint, you'll often hear the terms curing and drying to touch, so what do they mean? To understand this, you should know how acrylic paints dry, which usually happens when the water-based formula in the paint evaporates to leave behind a thin but solid paint film.
As a rule, acrylic paint dries to touch faster but takes longer to cure. Sometimes paints that dry to touch could still be in the middle of the drying process, so you should be careful to prevent damage. Otherwise, you might accidentally remove the top paint layer.
And due to the presence of retarders in slow-drying acrylics, you might have to wait for a month to varnish or seal the paint. This 30-day period is the curing phase.
If you refer to the drying time of the different brands that we have mentioned, it corresponds to the time it takes for them to dry to touch. It's generally between 10 and 30 minutes, while it takes upto a day for them to fully cure.
There are different parts of acrylic paint that you should know about:
Pigments give the paint color
A polymer binder that guarantees waterproof, glossy, and even finishes
Water combines with the binder to create a thin film
Additional agents for durability
How Do External Elements Affect Acrylic Paint Drying Time?
To break things down further, acrylic paint goes through two drying stages. In the fast-drying stage, the paint has dried to an extent, whereby the soft film on the top is no longer susceptible to dilution by water.
But since it's not fully dried, the paint can succumb to external pressure. Some painters leave the paint to dry completely so that the entire mixture under the thin film dries to an even mass. This ensures that all the water evaporates from the formula and leaves behind the true color of the paint.
Here we have shortlisted the essential factors that impact the drying time of any acrylic gel.
1. Absorbent Surface
Do you know the difference between primed and unprimed canvas? Note that when painters apply gesso primer to a paper, they prime the canvas to increase the absorption properties of the surface. It's natural to find that the first paint layer will dry quickly compared to when you're coloring on existing layers of paint.
But unprimed paper is better at absorbing the paint than a canvas, and it's much like coloring over a paper towel. You'll find that the moisture from the paint will seep into the paper, which will leave you with less time for blending the colors.
There are special papers on the market suited for acrylic painting; however, professional painters add a solid layer of paint, to begin with. This ensures that the paper will absorb the moisture from the first layer, while all subsequent layers will appear more vibrant to deliver a unique finish.
2. Low Humidity
A large part of an acrylic paint's drying time will depend on the moisture content in the air, as high humidity will increase the drying time. This means you can expect your painting to dry faster on a less humid day.
If you live in an arid climate, we recommend painting indoors unless you like the challenge of racing against the clock. It would help to add retarders in such instances or use a wet palette to prevent the paint from drying fast.
When working inside, you'll be able to control the humidity by managing the temperature settings with heaters or air conditioners. While the air conditioning vents may remove humidity from the air, the former often comes with a humidifier to add moisture.
Also, different parts of the house have varying degrees of humidity, such as the basement, which is more humid than other rooms. Depending on your painting technique, you can try changing rooms, but remember that higher humidity may promote mold growth despite allowing a better blending of colors.
Acrylic artists even use a dehumidifier to lower the humidity in these moments.
3. Thickness
It's not rocket science that thicker layers take longer to dry than thin paint layers, and it all comes down to blending. Don't hold back while applying the different paint layers when you want to focus more on blending.
With a thicker coat, the water takes longer to evaporate, and you can choose between both open and heavy body acrylics to achieve a vibrant color gradient. On that note, we should mention that the size of the canvas determines if you can blend the paints in time.
This is because it's challenging to manage the colors on a bigger canvas, and some portions may dry before you know it. Professional painters use a blocking technique and allow the first paint layer to dry fast.
They can then conveniently paint over it by focusing on the finer details and ironing out the errors. So, the first layer should be thinner, and you can start painting the second layer without waiting for the former to dry completely, thanks to the gesso primer.
4. Temperature
When the temperature rises, the water in the paints evaporates quickly, and they dry out faster. That's why you shouldn't be painting outdoors, especially when it's hot, but if you have no other choice, use wet palettes. They keep the paint wet for longer and prevent cracks, and you can choose between large and small palettes depending on your requirements.
5. Application And Acrylic Paint Type
People wondering, "how long does acrylic paint take to dry?" should think about the paint type and their preferred application method. By type, we mean whether it's a thick or thin paint and if it has fast or slow drying mediums.
To apply these paints, you can use a brush, roller, or spray bottle, with the latter delivering an even coat to dry in under 30 minutes. You can apply another coat after an hour when rolling or brushing as they are much heavier techniques. In this case, it will take the paint longer to dry between two coats, and you need to wait for the previous layer to dry completely.
6. Circulation
We suggest working in areas with no draft to prevent acrylic paint from drying quickly. You can paint near an open window or sit near the air conditioning or heater. And if possible, try to keep the canvas away from the air circulated by ceiling fans.
Also, before venturing outdoors, check whether it's a windy day because you'll need to use wind blockers or sit behind an obstruction. We have found painting in the wind particularly tough since the canvas wobbles a lot, but we were able to paint in peace when sitting behind a wall.
In some cases, you may want the paint to dry faster, so use a glazing technique whereby it's possible to add transparent colors to previous paint layers. You can even use a hairdryer to dry the paint faster to add extra layers of glaze.
How Long Does Acrylic Paint Take To Dry On Different Surfaces?
To further help in your painting projects, we have narrowed down the drying time of acrylic paint on various surfaces.
1. Wood
When painting on wood, acrylic paint can dry to the touch within 20-30 minutes, but it takes between 6 and 12 hours for the paint to be fully cured. In humid weather, wood retains moisture longer, which increases the drying time, especially if you use more paint layers.
2. Metal
Metal takes longer to dry than wood, approximately 2 days, but you'll have to sand the surface to achieve a smooth texture before that. You may also need to apply a sealer and primer to waterproof outdoor paints.
3. Canvas
Canvas is the most common painting surface, and acrylic paint can dry to the touch in 10-20 minutes. These are for fast-drying formulas, while slow-drying paints on an unprimed canvas can remain wet for several hours.
4. Cardboard
Another surface that allows acrylic paint to dry quickly is cardboard, and the painting can be ready within a day. When fully dry, the cardboard will be flat, and for that, you should prime the material to seal the paint and prevent the water molecules from warping the surface.
5. Plastic
We have seen that acrylic paint takes 15-20 minutes to dry when you're painting on plastic. You'll have to apply varnish to seal the paint as it's difficult for the paint molecules to adhere to the smooth surface.
6. Fabric
It takes longer to paint on fabric, as acrylics require 3-4 days of drying time. It would be best to wash the fabric and dry it before you start painting so that the fast-drying formulas are set in 24 hours.
7. Glass
You'll have to be patient when painting on glass since the paint will require between 1 and 3 days to dry. Also, make sure to cure the glass and apply a primer for the best results.
How Long Do Acrylic Paints Take To Dry Conclusion
That's all there is to know about using acrylic paint for your painting projects.
Hopefully, now you have a better idea of the drying time to plan accordingly. We have also highlighted how various external factors impact the quality of acrylic paint, so go over this guide whenever you fail to achieve the desired finish.
Maybe you forgot to factor in the temperature or humidity before painting outside or used the humidifier far longer than needed when working indoors. Thankfully, our guide will help you make all the right decisions going forward.
Even thebest concrete crack filler won't be of much help if your technique for applying it is wrong, to begin with.
Concrete is solid, but it can crack for many reasons, and if not repaired soon, the problem could take a turn for the worse. People pay too much attention to crack repair mixes that they forget to polish their technique before getting into the procedure.
Even if the task isn’t as complicated, still, you must know the right steps to get the job done successfully. So, to help you out, we have formulated this brief guide on how to repair cracks in concrete.
Checkout our previous article on ceiling textures to figure out which types of ceiling suits you best. As, ceilings are one of the first things that one can spot when entering your home or apartment.
Without further ado, let’s get started!
Concrete Cracks And Why They Occur?
Even if the concrete is strong enough, it isn't invincible, and over time, cracks, holes, or crevices will start appearing in them. If not repaired, these cracks or holes will expand further due to changing weather or other reasons, making the task complicated and expensive to handle.
Concrete combines cement, water, gravel, stones, etc., to form an impermeable hard mass. However, this hardened cemented mass can crack due to multiple reasons.
So, if you’re wondering, “Why does cement crack?” in the first place, then look at the reasons below.
1. Shrinkage
The most common reason for early concrete cracks is shrinkage. The concrete mix contains a certain amount of water before it has hardened completely. Once it hardens, the mixture shrinks as the water dries up, which makes the concrete crack. As it's rigid, shrinking puts stress on the slab, which it can't handle, resulting in cracking.
Some builders add too much water to the concrete mix during construction, and when the moisture dries up, it creates pressure on the concrete slab. The best way to avoid this is to add optimal water to the mix.
Mostly, these cracks are very narrow, just a hairline, and are barely noticeable, so they don't pose any significant problem. However, they do look unsightly if they're too prominent.
2. Expansion
Concrete slabs expand when the weather is too hot, which causes stress, ultimately leading to cracks. During this expansion process, the concrete slab tries to push against any surface hindering its path. When there's resistance against such expansion, this makes cracks appear in the slab.
But this situation can be easily remedied using compressible material in isolation joints between two concrete slabs.
3. Settling
Another reason for concrete cracking is due to "settling." If there's a tree near the concrete and it's removed for any reason, the area under the slab where tree roots were will lead to cracks.
This happens because as the tree roots decompose after the tree is removed, it leads to a void in the base of the concrete, which makes the whole slab settle.
4. Overloading
Overloading also causes concrete slabs to crack, which is quite apparent as anything that receives an excessive load than it can handle will obviously crack. The same happens with concrete. If the ground beneath the concrete receives too much pressure, the overload will result in cracks.
Now, most people are of the idea that overload pulverizes or crushes the concrete. However, it isn't so. It isn't the concrete but the ground beneath the concrete which can't handle the excessive weight. This mostly happens after the rain or snow as it softens the ground, which makes it susceptible to damage. Regardless, this isn't often, especially in residential units, as they don't usually experience that much weight.
Apart from these reasons, concrete cracks also occur due to premature drying, whereby the slab loses moisture quickly. This leads to the appearance of spider webs like cracks which are commonly known as crazing cracks. Other than this, crusting cracks are prevalent too, which occur during the stamping process.
How To Repair Cracks In Concrete?
Concrete cracks occur more frequently than you think, and repairing them on time is wise. Otherwise, small cracks will transform into bigger ones that pose a problem later.
Small cracks aren't that big a deal as you won't trip or fall due to them, but they aren't striking to look at and taint the house's appeal. So, if you want the patio or walkway to look as fine as the day the house was bought, it's better to repair any holes or crevices in the concrete.
We have mentioned the general process of repairing concrete cracks below. As a side note, you must remember that repairing cracks in a concrete surface differs from fixing cracks in a foundation wall. So, if you’ve been wondering “how to fix a crack in a foundation wall,” then know that the steps differ for that.
Step 1: Choose The Right Repair Product First
The first thing you need to do before starting the concrete crack repair work is to choose the right repair product. If you thought of repairing concrete cracks with concrete, you should know that this isn't how it goes, especially while filling narrow cracks.
Here, a ready-to-use concrete repair mix is ideal as they're easy to apply and don't require much guidance. You can use them on your own as they have easy applicator nozzles or come with caulking guns, making crack filling a piece of cake.
Some of the most commonly used ones are epoxy compounds, mortar mix, and latex patching material. Mortar mixes are perfect for ¼-inch or more significant gaps, while latex patching material, epoxy, and vinyl concrete patching compound are ideal for narrow, small cracks like hairline cracks.
Several brands of crack mixes are available in the market, and you should do thorough research before buying any.
Step 2: Prepare The Area With Concrete Crack
After choosing the suitable patching compound, the next thing you need to do is prepare the cracked area. In this step, you'll require a chisel, a small hammer, and a scrubbing wire brush with which the dislodged concrete surface will be cleaned for the final repair.
Here, you'll need to use a hammer and the masonry chisel first to open the crack further to do away with the loose or crumbling concrete. Try to chip to the base to dislodge the whole crack to ensure nothing is left loose before the final process. Once you're done opening the base of the crack, clean it thoroughly with a wire brush, and then rinse it.
Don't forget to wear protective gear like gloves or a mask as it's a dusty process.
Step 3: Repair The Cracked Area
Lastly, apply your chosen repair mix to the clean crack and let it cure. Remember to follow the instructions mentioned on the repair mix to ensure the process is successful. Once you're done mixing the patching compound, apply it with a putty knife or a mason's trowel and make sure the product penetrates the crack well. Also, level it with the surrounding concrete, so the surface is perfectly even.
Afterward, let the product sit and cure according to the manufacturer's instructions.
How To Repair Narrow Concrete Cracks?
Narrow cracks like the hairline cracks occur when the concrete slab loses moisture, which is quite common. Although they don't pose any risk and are barely noticeable at times, a timely repair should be done so that the crack doesn't widen.
Look at the steps below if you don't know how to patch a narrow crack.
Step 1: Clean the cracked area off any loose or crumbling debris with the help of a wire brush. Then, broom the area and wipe it clean with running water.
Step 2: Fill the cleaned area with a concrete crack filler. These are readily available online and come with a nozzle applicator for easy application. You can also use them with a caulking gun for precision.
Step 3: Once the crack is filled with crack filler, smoothen and even out the application with a putty knife.
Step 4: Let the filler stay and cure as per the manufacturer's instructions.
How To Repair Wide Concrete Cracks?
Wide concrete cracks can signify structural damage to the ground or walls. These cracks usually occur in our driveways and can lead to problems if not repaired on time. Therefore, they need to be filled as soon as possible to ensure they don't widen any further and pose a safety risk.
Wide cracks, i.e., ¼-inch or more, should be filled with an appropriate patching compound to ensure the problem doesn't persist. The patching compound is mixed with water and then applied with a masonry trowel to fill the cracked area.
If you don't know how to fill large concrete cracks, then the process below will help you accomplish that.
Step 1: Use a small hammer and a masonry chisel to undercut the concrete crack. Undercutting the sides of the cracked floor in the shape of an inverted "V" is ideal as the patching compound sets better into the crack that way. It creates a mechanical bond on top of a chemical bond between the concrete and the patching compound.
Step 2: Dislodge any crumbling or loose material and clean the undercutting with the help of a metal brush. Don't forget to rinse the area with running water.
Step 3: Follow the manufacturer's instructions on the patching compound of your choice and mix it well.
Step 4: Afterwards, fill the mixture of patching compounds with the help of a trowel into the crack. Pierce the trowel in the compound and let the compound penetrate the crack. Doing this will ensure the crack is filled up well and there are no air pockets.
Step 5: Level the crack up to the surrounding concrete surface to ensure there are no bumps or lows after the repair process.
Step 6: Let the filling cure as per the time mentioned on the patching material.
Step 7: Paint the surface with appropriate concrete paint after the compound has dried up.
How To Repair Cracks In Concrete Final Remarks
Repairing cracks in the concrete surface is easy if only you know the proper steps that need to be followed.
The concrete crack repair can be easily accomplished using a suitable concrete patching compound after undercutting and cleaning the crumbling or loose concrete. Once the cracked concrete is filled and leveled with the surrounding surface, let it cure and set according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
That was all about the cracked concrete repair process. We hope we were able to help you successfully carry out this job.
Now water could be still or have ripples and waves. You might want to draw a bubbling stream, a ferocious ocean, or a quiet pond by a hut. These paintings will have mixed shades and a horizon on top. Again, others prefer abstract art and want to paint water from up close.
To make it easier for you, we have prepared this guide on how to paint water with watercolor, which will help you understand how to make ripples and waves while dealing with water. Sometimes, paper can make a huge difference, just like painting on yupo paper compared with traditional papers, never the influence of good supplies in the final painting. Also, we will be talking about the different types of reflections and how they are to be painted.
So, without further ado, get your watercolor kits and draw some water, this will be a beginner guide on how to paint with watercolors.
How To Paint Water With Watercolor
Painting ripples is an important criterion while painting water, and in this guide, we will be teaching you the process. Here, you can learn how to paint water at a distance and up close. We believe that no image reference will be needed as the watercolor painting technique for water is not very complicated.
Nonetheless, water can be hard to render by brush, and it is best to know the basic principles while painting it. So, before we begin, let us tell you about the materials needed for the job.
Materials Used
You will require 300 GSM watercolor paper so that it does not tear. Plus, you can take a set of watercolor brushes, a painting palette, a ruler, and masking tape. The colors can be of your choice, and the masking tape will keep the paper in place while you work on it.
In a nutshell, the materials needed are:
Painting set
Paintbrushes
300 GSM or thicker paper
Ruler
Scotch tape
Now, before you proceed, we will ask you to settle in a quiet space with a minimum level of distractions. This will help you relax, which should make it easier to follow the tutorial.
Once you have found a quiet space, please take two cups and fill them with clean water. We suggest two cups so that you can rinse the brushes keeping in mind the various tones that you may need to achieve.
You will also need to attach the paper in place with the help of scotch tape. Just tape the paper to the surface below, and you will be ready to begin.
What Is The Color Of Water?
We all know that water has no color, but most paintings will have water painted in blue. So, before we move on, you should know that the color of water depends on the color of the sky and the surroundings that reflect on the water. If the sky is blue, then the water will be blue, but many advanced painters make the water red, green, and other shades.
While there is no barrier to exploration, we will be explaining the painting process with the color blue. However, you are free to choose any shade you like and then continue with the same process.
The Painting Process
Painting water does not need to be a complicated process if you master the strokes well. It is basically about learning how to move your wrist in the correct way so as to achieve the right strokes. A professional watercolor artist should be able to slightly flick the wrist to make the right horizontal strokes. The way you apply the strokes will determine if the water is far away or nearby.
So, first, we will discuss the process of using watercolor paints to paint water that is far away and then move on to painting water that is close by.
Painting Water At A Distance
You will find it very interesting to learn about how to paint water at a distance. Usually, the water will fade into the horizon, and you will have to distinguish between them. The process involves a few abstract lines and strokes that need to be contextualized in the painting.
Before we begin, let us tell you that the process has been divided into steps to make it easier to understand.
1. Wetting The Paper
You will need blue-tinted water to wet the entire page in the beginning. To get it, dip the brush in blue paint and then put the brush in one of the water cups. It will create a light blue tint, which is perfect for use.
Take the brush and wet the entire page with it evenly. There should be a thin water layer covering the whole page from one corner to another. The water has to be evenly distributed so that the color that is going to be applied on top spreads well.
2. Making Light Strokes
First, we will paint the lighter tones of the water. To do this, you will need to dip the brush in blue color and then rinse it gently so that some of the paint stays on the brush. Then use it to create light marks and paint strokes from left to right. Begin from the bottom of the page and only paint till half the page as you would want to paint the horizon from there.
Now you will need to slightly shake the brush while making the strokes so as to achieve the right effect. Also, keep lifting the brush as you finish making one stroke and then continue accordingly. You will notice that the watercolor is fading as you go upwards. That is exactly how we want it to be.
A word of advice here: do not use a very dark shade of blue or too much color while making the layers. Rinse the brush before applying so that the color fades out to some extent.
The colors will also fade a little more as they dry. Do not panic at all, as that is exactly how it is supposed to work. We will be adding darker shades on top of this to bring out the water texture.
3. Making The Horizon
After the initial layer of watercolor has dried completely, you can move on to defining the horizon. To do this, apply a faded blue stroke along the middle of the page where the last water strokes are visible. Ensure that the color is faded out so that you can get the right texture.
Next, use the same washed blue color to make strokes all throughout the upper half of the page. This is basically the background for the sky, and it needs to be painted in a smooth manner. The seamless gradient will give you a faded look that is needed here.
4. Bringing Out The Ripples
After you let the paint dry completely, there should not be any specific marks that make the horizon visible. The blue should seamlessly fade in, giving you a uniform look. Here, it’s alright if there are some discrepancies. Painting water in the right way takes time and practice to perfect, and you can keep working on it till you’re satisfied with the results.
Moving on, you will need a medium-round brush to paint the darker ripples. However, we will begin with a small and thin pointed brush. This will help in painting small ripples at a distance.
You will have to make side strokes from left to right, which do not have to be smooth. Distort the lines slightly, or try painting distorted horizontal shapes by shaking your wrist while painting.
5. Using Darker Shades
Once the paint is completely dry, you can proceed to make darker ripples using a dark blue shade. To do this, a small brush is required along with dark blue watercolor. You will have to make horizontal strokes with it and move from the bottom of the page to the top.
Here, it is essential to use the darker shades sparingly so that it does not cover the mid-tones. The aim is to create depth by using multiple shades of blue. So, to keep the tonal variations in place, paint with caution and ensure you are scattering the marks more towards the bottom of the page. Then let the color fade as you go upwards to the middle of the page.
Also, while painting, try to make all the strokes in one direction so as to show the flow of water towards one side. For example, you can make the water flow towards the left by painting strokes horizontally from right to left.
Then you can try light stippling as you reach the center of the page near the horizon line. Here, create small stippling marks to make the distance more visible. They do not need to be very detailed and can be small.
Painting Water That Is Near
1. Apply Water To The Sheet
To begin with, spread a thin water layer on the page evenly. It should be distributed all over the page so that the paint spreads well over the surface. Unlike the previous process, here you do not need to add color right in the beginning.
2. Making The Initial Strokes
After the page is wet, you will need to wet the brushes and dip them in blue paint. We need light-colored strokes in the beginning, and it is best to rinse the paintbrush slightly in the water again after the initial wash.
Then start making strokes on the paper from one side to another. Keep lifting the brush after a few strokes so that white spaces remain on the paper. Also, ensure that you leave white spaces in the middle of the page.
While working, remember to squiggle the brush so that you can achieve uneven strokes. Once they are made, let the paper dry completely.
3. Creating Darker Ripples
You will need to make darker shaded ripples on top of the lighter tones. So you can dab the brush in black and then blue to darken the blue shade. Then make jagged strokes from the left to right side of the page. Begin from the bottom and then slowly move upwards.
As you make the strokes, leave spaces in between so that the bottom layer is visible. You can move your strokes in one direction to show the direction of water flow.
Also, as you move upwards, the strokes should be kept thick. You can let them fade as you go upwards. Then go for a slightly lighter blue shade as you move above the middle of the page. There is no horizon here as you are painting water from up close.
4. Adding The Final Ripples
Now mix blue with a dot of black paint, and then use your brush to create darker strokes. These have to be applied very sparingly and have to be concentrated near the bottom of the page. You can then move upwards and from left to right. Also, make sure that the strokes are jagged so as to imitate the reflections on the water.
As you move towards the top of the page, the strokes can be made in a linear manner. You can also fade out the paint as you move toward the top. This will allow you to make the clear water smoother.
After you have covered the entire paper, let the paint dry and fade out. You should be able to see more detail towards the bottom of the page. Then the watercolor should slowly fade out as you move toward the top.
Painting A Rough Sea
Now that you already know how to create waves with strokes, you will just have to leave larger white gaps for painting waves on a rough sea. Large white gaps give the indication of waves breaking quickly.
Also, if you wish to create the image of waves, then it is best to leave white gaps on rocks. That would show the waves splashing against the rocks.
Painting Reflections
Water painting means including reflections of objects around the water body. If there are houses, then you can see their reflection in the water. If the water is still, then you will have to paint the houses, boats, or greenery visible on the sides of the water. However, this is applicable for close-up views.
If the objects or the water bodies are at a distance, then you can see a dark shadow below. In this case, you will not have to dive into details. Just make the shadow darker, and that should do the trick. Also, remember to distort the shape as the reflection will not be like the exact object on top.
Another kind of reflection to know about is on the wet sand. Watercolor paintings with wet sand can act as a mirror, and you might have to paint a shadow of the person or object on the sand. However, when capturing a scene from a distance, there is no need to keep this in mind. Just make a darker shadow in the opposite direction of the light source.
Further, before you paint reflections, remember that the color of the water needs to be taken into consideration, and a darker shade needs to be used. For example, if you are using olive and brown tinges in the water, then use a darker shade of the two colors to show the reflection of the object.
Things To Note
With the above-mentioned watercolor painting techniques, you should be able to use watercolor paint easily. Just remember to use the water in watercolor sparingly so that you do not end up spreading the colors too much.
Adding to the great tips, we will recommend keeping two cups of water along with the dry brush set. You can rinse the brushes in one and use the second one to clean better. The two jars will have different tones, which can help in painting the first layers.
Moreover, remember to always frame the painting by leaving a white border on the sides. This can be done with the help of scotch tape. The tape will also keep the paper in place so that you can work without any inhibitions.
And if you are feeling experimental and want to try out other shades, begin with blue, olive, and turquoise. This will give a muddy look, and you can also indicate vegetation below the water. Many artists use these colors for pond water, rivers in villages, and hillside water bodies.
Paint Water With Watercolor Final Words
Artists make a number of attempts to master their work, and it is only natural for you to take time. So, please do not get disheartened in case you are unable to achieve the right strokes in one go. Just keep practicing the watercolor techniques that you have learned here, and you’ll get better.
With this, we have reached the end of this guide, and it is time to wrap up. Do let us know about any further issues that you may have.
Take care and keep painting!
Most of us want our home to be special right? Some invest time in gardening, others build a pond, a cinema or a game room. Provided you have the space available and want to turn your home into an even more welcoming environment, you have to decide what is the best choice for you. If there's something you have always dreamt about, than you are settled. There are many ideas to choose from yet today we are going to take a closer look at one that can fit any home, doesn't take much space and is appropriate for both bachelors and family men.
The bar. Or, to be more specific, the bar top, which is the essence of any drink serving setup. It's the item around which the entire activity revolves and the one that makes the greatest impression on your guests. Without further ado, lets take a look at a few examples and try to figure out which of these super cool bar top ideas suit your desires and needs.
Super Cool Bar Top Ideas
1. Drinks cooler embedded in kitchen top
No matter what your drink is, this recipient will keep it cool and at an arms reach. The clean cuts in the marble make it look very neat, a very clean and elegant design.
Source Unknown
2. Simple wooden bar top design
A wooden bar top will always look good and it will fit any room and any look, whether it's modern or rustic.
via Oregon Live
3. Symmetric patio bottle tap collection bar top
This one's a gem and definitely an eye-catcher. What else can be collected and turned into such an item?
This might not fit into an elegant living room but I bet there are few beach or backyard bars that can match its appeal. Even though it's pretty small, it definitely makes a great impression and would fit great in any man cave.
Is it a bar? Is it a kitchen top? Could be both in my opinion. Either way, the colors and materials match perfectly. I like the fact that the chairs are made of different fabrics but look great together.
via Ricardo DeAratanha/Los Angeles Times
6. natural wood forms wooden bar top
Taking a roughly shaped wooden slab and fitting it inside has become quite a trend but make sure it fits your place and match the rest of the materials and colors in the room. It would look great fitted with some rugged iron legs but I'm not so sure about the stainless steel kitchen top on the right.
Remember. It's not just the bar that counts, but the interior setup as well. Here, the lights make all the difference, they make the bar much more attractive. I think some contrast might have made everything look even better.
via brewwinefun.com
10. creative use of a penny collection
In any work, the detailing defines the element. You might admire a wood piece for a minute or two but I bet you'll look even closer when you see this amazing bar top.
A bar is all about the drinks right? What better way to decorate it than with engraved wooded pieces that represent each drink you serve. Some come with a great drawing as well.
One very important factor that you need to take into account is where to place the bar top. Do you want it in a separate room or adjacent to another activity?
When searching for ideas for new projects, always try to find the a way to connect them to the purpose they will fulfill. The surfboards are the very essence of surfing, in haunting a legendary haunting rifle or a set of antlers would have a similar relation for example.
Once again, it's all about the detailing. No matter how many times you'll look at it, you'll be delighted and intrigued by the various shapes and colors. This mosaic bar top is definitely the heart of the room.
This one is truly special. Metal is a very hard material to work with and such amazing detailing requires time, dedication and skill. The contrast between the bar top and the parts sustaining it make the whole thing stand out.
Every type of design has certain attributes that give it particularity. When going for an industrial appearance, remember that clean and fresh is not exactly what you're looking for. Instead, try to show the patina, the way time and work has affected the material. Make them look like they were properly used while keeping the composition look good and safe.
via foter.com
22. an old steampunk look is always attractive
In this case, the steampunk look is always related to steam powered machines and technology. Pipes, switches and copper are some of the the main design features that this style employs to create its definitely unique appearance.
While this idea is rather special and appealing, I'm not sure if the chairs match the bar. Make sure that when put together, all the elements and materials relate and bring the best out of each other. In this case I believe that a wooden bar would have been more appropriate.
Choose the theme of the bar wisely as some have more potential than others. You can never run out of ideas ot items when going for such a design. In the design below you can just hang a skull flag at the top and it becomes a pirate bar that even Jack Sparrow would fancy.
If you decide to use an object like an old car as a base for your bar top, you have two options. Keep its aged look or repaint it. Choose either option according to how you designed the rest of the room.
Source Unknown
27. turning an iconic car onto a dream bar
Because the old van occupies so much space, it becomes the center of design, whilst everything else is chosen according to it. Maybe adding a few more automotive inspired wouldn't be such a bad idea, regardless the VW van is the symbol of freedom and therefore it is a great choice for a bar design.
Source Unknown
28. modern techniques meet traditional wood design
If you want wood to last, you have to protect it with a layer of protective finish. There are many ways to do it but you can either go for one that keeps the wood looking natural or adds color or texture. Match the color with your design language and enjoy the result.
A collection of corks is a statement for time well spent with family, friends and good wine, if you don`t have sufficient a restaurant can surely help. Either way, every guest will fall for it, simply pay attention to the way the corks are arranged.
The phosphorescent liquid fills the cracks and gaps in the wood in a way that cannot be reproduced by hand. The pattern is unique, striking and will add a lot of flavor to your home.
via Pinterest
32. composition of aged copper and wood
The rusty look makes it perfect for a house in the countryside or a rustic themed room. The chairs make it very distinct.
33. exclusive bar top design - the license plate collection
You'll love this design especially if you're a car enthusiast. Notice the way the colors balance in this composition, something beautiful brought forward by the particularities of each and every plate.
Some of us usually forget about the effect of lights in certain setups. You can use artificial lighting to make some parts stand out whilst others act only as a background. Also, light has the power of gathering people around it.
via colorcopper.com
35. beautiful natural wood pattern
via woodworkingdevotee.com
36. intriguing copper bar top
No painted metal will look as good as copper. Its natural pattern and appearance make it very special. Use it as a standalone material or combine it with a darker colored metal.
Do you think a cleanly cut base for the bar would've been a better choice? The copper surface on the top creates a really powerful yet delicate contrast here, one that certainly cannot be overlooked.
How do you see the solutions above ? What do you think about this collection of cool bar top ideas? Copper and wood seem extraordinarily beautiful in essence yet they seem rapidly followed by various other mixed solutions like the wine cork bar, the bottle caps or penny counter. What do you think? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below.
Whether you are attempting to engage a classroom or using it for personal study, a whiteboard comes in handy for daily drawings.
If you are in charge of making daily announcements, scheduling class or club meetings, and also happen to love drawing, the whiteboard is the perfect tool. Get creative with your drawings and turn them into a fun regular project that you and everyone else can enjoy.
However, if ideas aren't exactly rushing to you at this moment, don't fret because we have plenty of awesome ideas that you can try out for 49 days straight! Take a peek at some of our favorite things to draw on a whiteboard…
Things To Draw On A Whiteboard
Dragon With Horns
Let your creativity loose with a drawing of a striking dragon right from the depth of your nightmares. This drawing is perfect for when you're practicing character sketches and experimenting with new lines. The option to add colors or small details like green eyes and scaly skin is entirely up to you.
Besides, a sketch like this one gives you the opportunity to bring to life a character that was so far only looming in your imagination!
The next whiteboard drawing idea is an invitation to a kids' haunted house event. And we must say, the illustration is perfect for the theme in question. Halloween marks the return of creepy monsters, and no other creature is as famous as Frankenstein's monster. Besides, this close-up version is easy to draw.
Alternatively, you can try drawing werewolves, vampires, witches with pointy hats, mummies, or even goblins for a spooky October season!
One adorable drawing you can try on your whiteboard is Totoro with a pink umbrella. This is a depiction of Totoro after Satsuki offers him the umbrella, but you could easily draw him with a tiny leaf on his head.
The good thing about this particular depiction is the use of simple lines and curves and a few color variations in some places. But, overall, drawing this one should be easy for beginners.
Mickey Mouse is a Disney character many children grew up watching and loving. His iconic ears, which were also used as a motif on the Disney channel logo, are distinctive and relatively uncomplicated to draw. Thus, copying this image onto a whiteboard should be the easiest thing to do with just one black marker.
And it won't take much time too since the lines are simple and there are very few details.
Hungry Dinosaur
Let's move on to drawing something horrifying and cute at the same time.
Who doesn't love dinosaurs? They are great fun to draw and do not require much skill either. Especially one in a funny cartoon format that would be sure to grab everyone's attention.
Usually, people draw the entire dinosaur body, with long tails included. However, if you want to make things more interesting, try making a dinosaur trying to eat another one!
Godzilla
There is no doubt that cartoon characters you have grown up with are the most fun to draw. One such famous monster we love is Godzilla. Try to recreate him destroying half the city while unaffected by any attempts to stop him.
Of course, you can draw him to be as ferocious in the movies, but you can also add a playful touch by transforming him into a cute character!
Cute Cats
Cats are not known as meme creatures for no reason; they can arrange themselves into various shapes that give you so much to draw. Due to their fluid body movements, they can stretch out like a mat, curve into a fluffy ball, and arch their backs to appear taller. And we haven't even mentioned their facial expressions yet!
However, if drawing cats in their actual silly form is too challenging for you, try going for something like this.
Lilo and Stitch make a great duo, and they can be pretty fun to draw too. You can sketch a scene of their adventures together or a heartfelt interaction of the two like in this interpretation. Drawing Lilo is straightforward; you just need to copy her red dress with white leaves and her long black hair.
Stitch, the alien, can be more challenging to draw because of his exaggerated features.
Remember the time when a grumpy cat became a meme? Yea, this cat continues to hold the internet's unofficial title of the world's grumpiest looking cat. And, of course, with the internet, everything has to become a meme.
Drawing this grumpy cat with a "No" signboard on your classroom whiteboard is a humorous way to reject students' bathroom breaks. It gets the point across, and everyone can have a laugh over it too.
Doctor Who
"Wibbly wobbly, timey wimey… stuff," says Dr. Who when asked to explain the meaning of time. Applause for that because we could not have explained it any better. Drawing Dr. Who with the Daleks makes for a fun idea for updating a daily whiteboard.
Plus, drawing Dr. Who will not take much time if you select a simple version. For example, in this drawing, the characters are used to add interest to the weekly Friday monologue or recitation class.
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles
If you are going to draw something new every day, might as well draw your favorite childhood cartoon characters, right? The teenage mutant ninja turtles are a fun bunch of superheroes that make for cool drawings. Select a group pose with all weapons visible, and the end result will surely look amazing.
Try adding a bit of their personality, like Michelangelo being the clown that he is!
Marvel And DC Unite
You might never actually see Marvel and DC characters in each other's universes, but that shouldn't stop you from drawing them as a team on a whiteboard. Select your classic favorites from each universe and combine them to see the team you come up with.
For example, this drawing has The Hulk and Iron Man from Marvel, with Wolverine from another Marvel universe. To add to the mix, we have the Dark Knight himself, i.e., Batman from DC comics.
Grinch From How The Grinch Stole Christmas
While the rest of us may love Christmas, Dr. Seuss' character, Grinch, seems to hate it! If the winter holidays are just around the corner, you can use this character creatively in your classrooms. The green, diamond-shaped face with a grin is all you need to recreate him.
In this example, the Grinch tells students to stay put, not pout and not take unnecessary bathroom breaks since the semester tests are about to begin.
Futurama
While there are plenty of relatable comic characters and cartoons you can draw on whiteboards, the ones from Futrama are the easiest to recreate. Try using the main characters Fry, Leela, and the robot Bender with the Professor in a captivating drawing about your event.
In this example, the creator has focused on getting the shapes right for each character and used minimum color.
Peanuts
Peanuts are for everyone since anyone can enjoy cute and witty comic strips no matter the age. However, you can personalize the characters to your theme by adding extra elements. In this example, Charlie Brown is shown getting scared of a spooky pumpkin head man.
Along the same vein, it's possible to inject objects and even characters from different comics for the drawing to stand out.
Riley And Robert Freeman From The Boondocks
The comic, The Boondocks, could be the inspiration for your next drawing on the whiteboard. And, there are many exciting scenes you can use to express the thought of the day with students or classmates. To get the appearance right, you need to pay close attention to their clothing and hairstyle.
Of course, Riley's eyebrows are a distinct feature on his face, so make sure you don't miss that. To complete the picture, you can even add Riley's older brother, Huey Freeman, to your drawing.
Ed, Edd And Eddy
Drawing this silly trio can give you many opportunities for adding fun to the class. This Cartoon Network show features three characters, each more ridiculous than the other, and their failing schemes and misadventures. Since it's their favorite snack, you could also draw a jawbreaker.
Here, we have Ed, Edd, and Eddy looking at Jonny's imaginary friend Plank holding a signboard in this drawing.
Nightmare Before Christmas
If you are assigned with whiteboard drawing duty before the Christmas holiday, what would you draw? We know that we'd draw a version of Tim Burton's Nightmare Before Christmas. Not only are the original drawings a work of art, but any recreation close to it is bound to mesmerize audiences.
There are numerous themes to be drawn from this fantasy movie, but the easiest one is drawing Jack Skellington with his hollow eyes and pointy collars.
Avatar- The Last Airbender
Speaking of fantastical, legendary stories with a heroic lead character, the young Avatar Aang is one that comes to mind. As the only survivor of the Air Nomad's nation (the Last Airbender), he has been given many challenges in his journey.
As such, drawing his adventurous on your whiteboard gives a lot to work with. You can also show Katara the Waterbender alongside other main characters, Sokka and Zuko.
Dragon Ball Z
Goku is not one to back down from a fight against injustice and to protect his loved ones. This gives his character various fight scenes with the addition of his ability to fight in Super Saiyan mode. That means you have plenty of ways in which you can draw the main character of Dragon Ball Z.
Additionally, you can draw the majestic Shenron or Dragon God or some of Goku's friends, Bulma or Master Roshi.
Winnie The Pooh
For those of you who love cute cartoons, it is impossible to miss out on Winnie the Pooh or Pooh Bear. Although he is naive and slow to understand a few things, he is an incredible friend to Christopher Robin and Piglet.
In this drawing, we see Pooh with Tigger, his troublemaker of a friend who loves to jump on others!
Elsa And Olaf From Frozen
One of the more popular Disney princess movies of recent times is Frozen, featuring the princess sisters Elsa and Anna. Heiress to the throne of Arendelle and controller of snow and ice alike, Elsa makes for the perfect winter princess for your drawings.
To complete the picture, try adding her sweet and loyal sister Anna with the loveable snowman Olaf that Elsa created with her powers.
Looney Tunes
Take a trip back to memory lane, and you will find that Looney Tunes have been a regular part of your childhood. With its loveable characters and unforgettable music, this cartoon is perfect for recreating on a whiteboard.
Whether it's the cool Bugs Bunny, irritable Daffy Duck, or Porky Pig stuttering "That's all folks!" all of these will make captivating and nostalgic drawings.
Powerpuff Girls And Mojo Jojo
When Professor Utonium tried to create the perfect little girl by adding sugar, spice, and everything nice, he accidentally added Chemical X.
Now, the three have individual personalities and dedicated colors that make them fun to draw. With oval faces, large eyes, and stubby arms and legs with no noses, drawing them is super simple.
Ghostbusters
The Ghostbusters, or The Real Ghostbusters (as they were called in the TV series), is a group of famous paranormal investigators. Adapted from the comics, the group of four, with the assistance of Janine Melnitz and Slimer, run a supernatural ghost hunting business.
Their travels and spooky adventure make for awesome drawings, and you will surely have fun drawing your own version of Slimer. Check how this drawing shows each character in their element.
Grumpy Cat
A little bit of humor in class, clubs, or group meetings never hurts. And, if you have been given the task of making a creative drawing for each session, you cannot go wrong with sketching a grumpy cat.
In this example, the grumpy cat is unamused by the class they are about to attend.
Joker And Harley Quinn
Who said that you could only draw superheroes on your whiteboard? Villains make for compelling drawings, and the crazy combination of Joker and Harley Quinn from DC comics is a truly cool way to draw attention to your message.
The best part about this couple is the many versions and costumes they have. You can choose your favorite version for showcasing this dysfunctional couple.
Homer Simpson With A Donut
Speaking of crazy characters, Homer Simpson is another kind of whimsical cartoon who loves to eat donuts. In fact, it's a trademark of his character that he cannot live without donuts. And, you can draw this quirk in your own way for the whiteboard.
With this example, The O in Monologue is a donut Homer could not resist eating.
Tom And Jerry
The age-old story of a cat chasing a mouse is portrayed in the cartoon show Tom and Jerry. Even though this duo could never get along, their chase and tricks against each other are what made this show awesome for kids.
When it comes to drawing these cartoons, you may have to pay attention to the limb movements because these two are constantly in action. Tom chasing and Jerry outsmarting him makes up most of the action in this much-loved cartoon.
Minions
They're tiny, they're adorable, and they're yellow! We're talking about minions, of course. They mostly look the same, but you can distinguish them based on their eye gear, height, and hair. Drawing them in a straight line over the text is an excellent way to add cuteness to your overall theme.
With a simple color scheme of yellow and blue, you can recreate these potato-shaped minions in no time.
Adventure Time
The fantasy animated show Adventure Time features Finn the human and his best friend Jake the dog. We had fun following them on their missions in the post-apocalyptic Land of Ooo with other friends, but drawing them is just as fun.
Actually, the drawing style is pretty straightforward, although Jake may look strange with his pupil-less eyes. You can also add instructions to the bottom of the whiteboard with Finn and Jake reacting to it.
Beavis And Butt-Head
Next, we have the two main characters called Beavis and Butt-head from the show of the same name. The story of this animated comedy show for adults revolves around two silly teenagers who are immature, lovers of heavy metal, and fail to attract women.
The dialogue Beavis utters, "Are you threatening me?" is used in a creative way for the whiteboard. You can do the same with this quote for your project.
Jessica Rabbit
From the novel "Who Censored Roger Rabbit?" we know of this character Jessica Rabbit. Probably one of the most sensual characters in animation, she's also widely recognized as Roger's wife.
When drawing her, you need to note a few things. She is known to appear from head to toe in red, with even her hair and heels in the same hue. The gloves complete the look, and you can add exaggerated eye makeup to match the original character.
Ryuk From Death Note
For anime fans, we think you should draw the iconic and scary character Shinigami Ryuk. His devilish face and strange body shape make him a unique character to draw, and you can have Light Yagami stand next to him too.
Moreover, adding the Death Note in either of their hands will add a nice touch to the drawing.
Scooby-Doo With Johnny Bravo
Scooby-Doo! Where are you? He's right next to Johnny, bravo in this drawing. You, too, can use your imagination to put together two cartoons from different universes next to each other. The same way we put Marvel and DC heroes in the same team.
What's next, Courage the Cowardly Dog in Dexter's Laboratory? We leave that up to you.
The Legend Of Zelda
Next up, we have splendid ideas for drawing characters from Legend of Zelda. This popular video game series has been an inspiration for many, and it can be your drawing inspiration too. Make your version of Link with his green outfit and sword out on a mission to save Princess Zelda and the kingdom of Hyrule.
You can experiment with other characters and create a scarier version of the massive monster Ganon.
Pinky And The Brain
Yet, another kid's cartoon show you can use is Pinky and the Brain for your whiteboard drawings. These genetically enhanced mice are always trying to take over the world (mostly Brain and ideas), but they end up failing because of Brain's impossible schemes.
Drawing them requires a keen eye to get all their features right, but once you get it, it's a pretty good idea for a whiteboard.
Regular Show
Regular Show follows the lives of Mordecai the blue jay and Rigby the raccoon. Whenever they try to solve a problem, the efforts always backfire, which is what makes for many funny scenes. Select any of these scenes or just the two hanging around to make an interesting drawing of the day.
Invader Zim
While Invader Zim is an alien on a mission to rule the Earth, GIR is his malfunctioning robot disguised as a green dog. Both these cartoons make for interesting drawings, and their art style was also critically acclaimed when it came out.
So, try your hand at one of the characters from this animated TV series.
Spongebob Squarepants
Who lives in a pineapple under the sea? Well, Spongebob Squarepants, of course. Yes, he is a bit dim-witted, but he is the most excited sponge you will ever meet in your life. Drawing him is a piece of cake since he has square edges, and the same goes for his buddy Patrick Star who, as his name suggests, is a starfish.
Monsters Inc
Have you ever heard of monsters having jobs? Yes, James Sullivan and Mike Wazaoski are best friends and professional monsters tasked with the work of scaring children. They probably do an excellent job of it, but they are pretty friendly to fellow monsters, so we get to see two sides of these characters.
Try drawing these two buddies or any other monsters since they all have interesting shapes to them.
The Ren And Stimpy Show
The cat and dog duo of Ren and Stimpy is another cartoon you can recreate for daily drawings on the whiteboard. While Stimpy the cat is good-natured but dimwitted, Ren the Chihuahua is short-tempered and somewhat psychotic.
The contrast in their emotional state is something you can show in the drawings.
Phineas And Ferb
Phineas and his stepbrother Ferb are always finding a new adventure during their summer vacation. Their out-of-control projects, methods to entertain themselves, and other shenanigans are looked down upon by their sister Candace.
Another mysterious character you should draw is Perry the Platypus, who is an undercover spy.
If you are looking for something cool to draw, look no further than DLC characters from Killing Floor. Adam Butler, or Steampunk Firebug, is characterized by his protective gear of a gas mask since he is a pyromaniac on the streets of London.
You can be sure to find fire wherever he goes, which, combined with his cool suit and weapons, are fun for drawing.
Rowing A Boat
Sometimes, you just want to draw something calming and laid back. While there are a plethora of sceneries that you can draw, this sketch of two men on a boat is quick and requires only black markers. You can add or remove certain details based on your preference.
Nightmare Before Christmas Countdown
As a reminder for a Halloween party or any spooky event, you can use this complex design that includes all characters from Nightmare Before Christmas. You can artistically incorporate the members around a circular calendar marking a countdown.
In this example, they have also mentioned the days remaining till Halloween.
Girl Looking Over Shoulder
Drawing human faces will always come in handy, so start practicing this on your whiteboard. For drawing someone looking beyond their shoulders, you need a keen sense of direction and depth. If this is not the case, the face may look asymmetrical, and the direction of the gaze may not be clear.
Either way, using a fine marker should be good enough to reproduce this face and expression.
War Machine
If you like cool superheroes, here's another one for you- War Machine. As you may already know, James Rhodes is close friends with Tony Stark in the Marvel Universe, and he also has a weaponized exosuit. The way his suit makes Tony Ironman when Rhodes dons the suit, he calls himself war machine.
Try this superb illustration the next time you go to the whiteboard.
Mandala Design
The word "Mandala" is said to be a circular figure representing the universe in some Indian cultures. Originating from a Sanskrit word, the Mandala has recently gained popularity as a form of relaxation and self-expression for all age groups.
Since it is intricate with a larger focus on accurate circles and lines, it can take some time to draw. But, it is also one of the easiest things you can draw as a beginner.
A whole lot of ideas for you to pick and choose from and recreate. We hope this guide gives you plenty of creative ideas to draw the next time you take up the task of handling the whiteboard.
Also, it does not have to be a presentation for anyone; you can simply practice drawing on the whiteboard with your favorite characters. Most of these ideas are easy enough for beginners, so go ahead, grab that marker and start drawing!
Summer is in its last superb days, prepared to welcome the lush colorful autumn. Now is the time to enjoy outdoors in a different beautiful manner, around our fire-pits and fireplaces, surrounded by friends and family, enjoying the coziness and warmth of burnt wood in fresh chilly air. A highly rewardful moment to share with your loved ones.
For this special entertaining season and for numerous other occasions we have curated a list of inexpensive outdoor bars to complete your entertaining kit. Most ideas showcased below are simple items realized with natural materials that can be salvaged with ease. Cast a glance and start planing your diy outdoor bar project.
Cool Inexpensive Outdoor Bars
#1 use a wheelbarrow to move around fresh happiness
What do you think about the cheap outdoor bars showcased below? How do you entertain during autumn? We would love to hear your comment in the section below.
There are some plants that are just easy and fun to care for. The Philodendron is one of them.
The word Philodendron comes from the Greek words philo, which means “love,” and dendron, which means “tree.” One of the most common and popular choices for a houseplant, the Philodendron is easy to nurture. These plants can grow to be relatively large, spreading their leaves wide and growing up to three feet.
If you plan on bringing one home, you'll need to know the right way to raise them. Well, in this guide, we will tell you everything you need to know about these beautiful plants. We will also give you some tips on how to care for them.
A plant that lets you know what it needs through the right signals is always easy to maintain. As a plant parent, you just need to know how to read these signals.
So, if you're ready, let's begin!
How To Raise A Philodendron
Types Of Philodendrons
There are two main types of philodendron house plants - Vining philodendrons and non-climbing philodendrons. As the name suggests, the first type of plant requires a supporting structure to climb up on. These plants will grow vertically on any structure they find.
As for the second type of Philodendron, they spread outwards as they grow. Typically, their width can be twice the size of the vining philodendron - thus, they require a lot of space to spread out and grow.
One of the most popular types of this plant is known as the Split Leaf Philodendron. Although this name is often used to describe the Swiss Cheese plant or the Monstera deliciosa, there are other types of Split Leaf as well.
It should be noted that though the Swiss Cheese plant is called a Split Leaf, it is not accurate. However, they are related.
The Lacy Tree Philodendron is another type, which is an upright vine with long, rope-like roots. The leaves of this plant are split into multiple sections. They have half-lobed leaves, which are their main attraction. This kind of Philodendron grows well outdoors in its natural habitat, but it is not a good indoor plant.
This plant species is popular due to its versatility, as it grows well in different conditions if taken care of. The Heartleaf Philodendron can be potted in hanging baskets, grown on green walls, and is essentially a climber plant.
With dark green foliage and heart-shaped leaves, this plant is a popular choice for indoor plant lovers. Due to its uniquely shaped leaves, it is also called the Sweetheart plant.
Although by the looks of the heart-shaped plant, it appears to be loving, this fussy plant does not love too much sunlight. This is something to keep in mind if you are planning on getting one for your home.
The Heartleaf Philodendron is a tough plant that can survive even with little care.
These sturdy climber plants can grow at a tremendous pace, reaching heights of up to 20 feet! The arrow-shaped leaves of this plant sport red or copper undersides and can grow 10 to 16 inches in length.
The plant gets its name from the reddish-purple leaves that it sports when young, slowly turning into shades of green as it ages. The Red-Leaf Philodendron requires medium sunlight to thrive.
Owing to its vibrantly colored leaves, it is a very common and popular type of house plant.
This plant species is relatively new in the market. It is a hybrid of Philodendron that is known for its fast-paced growth spurts. The main attraction of this species is its unique color - red leaves, which turn brown or maroonish as they age.
Once the plant turns into an adult, the leaves open up and turn green. However, there are traces of red along with the green leaves, giving it a unique aesthetic.
Another hybrid plant was created by combining the Philodendron scandens and Epipremnum species. This climbing variant is a popular choice as a tabletop plant due to its size and growth patterns.
The Philodendron 'Brasil' plant has thick, green foliage and grows well in hanging baskets. They look incredibly aesthetic, hanging from windows, patios, and porches. The mixture of light and deep green leaves gives it an attractive and striking appeal.
Also known as 'tree philodendron,' this is a species of plant called Philodendron bipinnatifidum. This plant has a unique appeal with large leaves that resemble fingers. These make for good floor plants and are a popular choice for indoor plants.
Requiring bright, indirect sunlight, the plant has a striking, aesthetic beauty inherent to it. No wonder it is so popular amongst plant lovers. You can choose to place them outside or near your front door, in the bedroom, bathroom floors, or window sills.
As the unique name suggests, this species of Philodendron features bright, orange leaves when it is young. However, as the plant matures, the orange leaves slowly turn green.
The plant's vivid color makes it a popular choice for homes, offices, and other buildings. Moreover, it is a low-maintenance plant and survives for years with little care and maintenance.
How To Care For A Philodendron?
One of the primary reasons why the Philodendron is so immensely popular as an indoor house plant is because of how low maintenance it is. In fact, this plant can quickly adapt to most indoor environments. There are just a few things to keep in mind caring for your Philodendron plant.
The best part about this plant is that it communicates with you in its own language. You just need to understand this special language.
Observe your plant minutely and check the details, like the leaves' color, spaces between them, etc. All these are signs of the plant communicating its needs with you.
Sunlight
This plant has a love-hate relationship with sunlight. While it requires an adequate amount of sunlight to survive, too much may harm the plant. So how do you understand what the right amount of sunlight is for your plant?
Take a look at the leaves. If the leaves are a dark green shade, then the plant can tolerate bright, indirect sunlight. Keep your plant near a window where it receives adequate sunlight throughout the day, but never directly.
If you notice the leaves are a solid green color, you may also place them indoors where they receive bright artificial light. This makes it a perfect plant for your office desk, bedroom, or even bathroom.
However, if you notice the leaves starting to turn yellow, then the plant is receiving too much sunlight - and not liking it. It is best to move the plant to a different location where it gets slightly lesser bright sunlight.
Finally, if you notice your plant becoming leggy or having several inches between its leaves, it may mean the opposite. This is a clear sign that your plant is not receiving adequate sunlight. It's time to move it to a brighter location.
Water
Your Philodendron does not require too much water, unlike other plants. In fact, overwatering can actually harm your plant. Be mindful of how much water you are giving.
When should you water your plant? Notice the top inch (2.5 cm) of the soil. This is the length between your index finger to the first knuckle. An excellent way to test the dryness of the soil is to insert your finger in and check the moisture level. If the soil feels moist, it isn't time for watering yet.
Another thing to keep an eye out for is droopy leaves. This might be a sign of too little water or overwatering. Once you put your plant on a consistent watering schedule, the droopy leaves will fix themselves very soon.
If the plant's leaves turn brown and fall off, it is a clear sign of underwatering, so you know what you need to do.
Temperature
Although this plant isn't too fussy, extreme temperature changes can affect it, just like most other plants. It is best to maintain an ideal temperature and environment for the Philodendron.
This refers to 65 – 78°F during the day and around 60°F at night.
Fertilizer
If you want your Philodendron to grow into a large, healthy plant, adding fertilizer may help. Fertilizers contain all the nutrients that the plant requires, which it may not be receiving otherwise.
Feeding the plant a balanced liquid foliage house plant fertilizer is a good idea. Every month during spring and summer, water the plant along with the fertilizer. Feeding it every six to eight weeks is the ideal option.
Notice your plant's leaves - if they are growing too slowly or not growing large in size, it is a clear sign. Your plant requires more macronutrients, which you can provide with the help of good fertilizers.
You should also notice the new leaves which the plant sprouts. If the leaves are pale instead of brightly colored, your plant needs fertilizers. Calcium and magnesium are two important macronutrients required by the Philodendron to grow.
Pests & Insects
Typically, the Philodendron does not attract pests and insects. That being said, certain pests like aphids and mealybugs might be found lurking around your plant.
Getting rid of them is relatively straightforward. Dip a cotton ball in some alcohol and wipe off the mealybugs with ease. To prevent the plant from attracting other insects, spray it with water and mild insecticidal soap. This can be done once in a while and doesn't require too much effort on your part.
Pruning
Like any other plant, your Philodendron also requires periodic pruning. The longer the vines get, the more water, nutrients, and fertilizer it requires. Caring for super large plants always requires more effort towards caring and maintenance.
If you are looking for a truly low-maintenance experience of raising a Philodendron, consider pruning it every once in a while. Moreover, periodic pruning will help you control any pest-related issues you might be facing.
Dust & Pollution
Even indoor plants can get dusty every once in a while. It is important to wipe away the dust, as it can clog the pores of your beautiful plant, making it difficult for them to breathe properly.
Using a damp cloth, wipe the leaves of the plant every once in a while. You don't need to do this too often - remember, this is a low-maintenance plant after all! That being said, wiping down its leaves every once in a while wipes away any dirt and dust on it, enhancing its visual appeal in your home.
Humidity
The Philodendron plant likes humidity. As such, it thrives in places with high humidity. So if you are bringing this plant pet to a location with high humidity, you don't need to worry.
In case you bring the plant to a place that experiences low humidity, your plant may suffer over time. To prevent this, consider misting the plant every once in a while with a spray bottle filled with water.
Although it will tolerate low humidity levels, misting it periodically will keep it bright, healthy, and happy.
Philodendron vs. Pothos, What Is The Difference?
The reason we mention this point is that these two plant species are confused by most people. Although they are extremely similar in terms of looks, they are two different plants altogether.
The Pothos plant falls under a genus called genus Epipremnum. Its leaves are slightly harder compared to the Philodendron. Furthermore, their stems are finer, compared to the rounded stems that are found in Philodendrons.
Are Philodendrons Poisonous?
In short - yes. These plants are toxic to both humans as well as pets. If you have pets or children at home, it is vital to keep these plants in a place that is away from reach, so they don't eat it accidentally.
Although these plants are a very popular choice for homeowners, it is important to consider their toxicity. In case you have cats at home, you need to keep your plants in a location where the cats cannot get to them.
Remember - cats are naturally curious creatures and are also good climbers. Keeping the plant on a window sill or tabletop might not be enough to keep your curious cats away from eating them.
These plants are known for trailing along with the floors and climbing over the edges of their containers. It is best to prune them to avoid this regularly. They should not be kept at an easy access point - for humans as well as their pets.
What Happens If You Eat A Philodendron Leaf?
Accidents can happen - maybe it happened to you, a child, or even a beloved pet. If anyone happens to ingest a Philodendron leaf by accident, the first symptom they would feel would be a burning sensation in their throat and on their lips.
Eventually, the lips and mouth, even the throat, might start to swell up. This can lead to a blocking of the airways, which can be fatal. It is imperative to take the person or pet to the nearest hospital to get them treated.
Other symptoms may include diarrhea and vomiting.
Keep in mind that it is easier for a child or an adult to vocalize their distress in case they have ingested this leaf. However, when it comes to pets, you need to observe them closely and look for symptoms.
You might notice vomiting and diarrhea in the pet as well. Keep a lookout for other symptoms such as dilated eyes, making crying sounds, or different sounds of distress. If you suspect that your pet has accidentally ingested a Philodendron leaf, take them to the nearest vet at the earliest.
Is The Philodendron Your Ideal Houseplant?
For most people, the answer would be yes. Philodendrons make excellent houseplants mainly due to how low-maintenance and adaptable they are. Moreover, these plants can adapt to various types of lighting and water conditions.
They require minimal care and attention. The fact that these plants communicate their needs and distress with you makes them even easier to care for. Look out for yellow or brown leaves, wilting leaves, dry soil, etc. These are clear signs of the plant requiring some attention and care.
Where Can You Place A Philodendron?
The best places to keep the plant are at your home office desks, bedrooms, office buildings, on the patio or deck, on window sills, and in the bathroom. Since they need bright but indirect sunlight, it is best not to place them outdoors in the garden.
Final Words
If you are considering adopting a new plant pet, the Philodendron can be the ideal option.
As we mentioned, these plants require minimal care and can thrive for several years. Although they survive better in warmer climates, they will grow even in winters. Some minimal amount of care and attention will keep these plants happy and healthy for years.
We hope our comprehensive guide helped you understand a bit more about these beautiful plants. Once you learn to appreciate their own unique language, you will find these plants becoming your best indoor buddies.
Stepping into a hot sauna after a long tiring day sounds like an excellent treat to the body, the steam allows the muscles to relax as the body continues to detoxify from the toxic nutrients.
For hundreds of years, saunas have been used for its host of benefits and to top it all it helps you grab a good night sleep. What more?
Well, with an increase of blood flow in the body, your metabolism, the immune system, and skin also drastically starts to improve. But, you should remember that too much of anything is not good. So, don’t stay in the sauna for several hours and ensure to re-hydrate yourself after every sauna session.
Now, we understand that it can be tiresome to search for the right barrel sauna kit, but it’s nothing compared to the blissful experience of an excellent sauna session.
And to make things a little easier, we’ve reviewed some of the best barrel sauna kits that are available to help you make a better decision.
It is constructed by using Finnish Pine from Finland of Grade-A level quality. If you are looking out for a sauna that is built to last you for years to come, then this sauna will be a perfect pick for you. It provides excellent durability, insulation, and heat retention as the pinewood selected for making this product is around 1-⅜ inches thick.
No products found.
The sauna is around 6-feet in length and 6-feet in depth, which makes it more comfortable for four individuals. For protecting your privacy, there is a tempered glass door that has also been tinted. And there are wooden backrests that help to provide you with better relaxation.
This sauna kit includes a bitumen shingle roof, hydrometer/ thermometer, cup holders, 6KW heater, lava rocks, sand timer, light rocks, robe hook, sand timer, among a few others. The benefit of using a sauna are numerous- it helps in the reduction of fatigue, better blood circulation, nourishes, and cleanse your skin and prevents any heart diseases.
A barrel sauna also consumes around 23% of less heat than the regular size of cabin style sauna. The circular design ensures that there is even distribution of height rather than the heat settling on the top.
It has two weather-resistant supports that will be protecting the wood underneath the barrel from moisture or the growth of molds and mildew. You can also order separately for a canvas cover to wrap the barrel sauna during harsh weather conditions.
This model by Almost Heaven Sauna is made in the USA, and it is easy to assemble this sauna kit. You need two people to get this piece arranged. It is spacious enough for four people to sit comfortably. It takes about half an hour for the temperature to reach 150 Fahrenheit, and within an hour it will be steamy and around 190-195 Fahrenheit.
The kit comes along with sauna stones and a 4.5KW heater. You can sprinkle some water on the sauna stones to get a burst of steam. To add humidity to the dry sauna, you can repeat this a few times throughout your sauna session. You need to take cooling breaks in between the steaming sessions to keep yourself hydrated.
Moreover, you also have the option to choose from rustic cedar, rustic fir, or clear cedar. They are all smooth, natural woods that are solid and insulating for an outside sauna. The tempered glass door and the quality stainless steel bands help to enhance the look of this sauna. You can put a clear coating on the redwood finish to flaunt the natural look of the wood.
It is one of the most preferred barrel sauna kits as the seats are long enough for you to stretch out your legs fully and relax. The front wall section has been set back in this sauna, which makes it appear more prominent, while the functional porch gives this piece an attractive look.
The porch that has been created outside the sauna is a visually appealing and functional area. You can use this sitting area to keep your drinks or towels, or you can use it as a relaxing space for cooling off during your sauna sessions. To give a soft glow to your sauna, an LED light bar is also provided with this set.
Also, there is polymer support that helps to keep the undercarriage off the ground and by protecting the entire unit. It has been handcrafted to allow the wood to expand and contract according to the changing weather conditions, therefore, to form a tight seal. The Audra model is known for its efficiency and for ensuring an even distribution of heat.
The RDX 4-6 Persons Hemlock Wooden Barrel Sauna can be used for indoor and outdoor purposes, and it can comfortably fit around four individuals. It has been constructed with 1-⅜ inches thick Canadian Western Hemlock. This traditional sauna room can reach a stable and higher temperature without causing any radiation effects on your body like the infrared ones.
4 person indoor outdoor wet-dry sauna. Traditonal suana room...
Made of Canadian Western Hemlock1-3/8″ thick; partially...
You also have two 70 inches of support cradles that helps to keep the barrel sauna away from the ground. It has a tinted and tempered glass door with self-closing hinges, for your privacy.
The kit also includes a Harvia sauna heater of 4.5W, sauna bucket, thermometer, anti-explosive lamp, sand timer and a box of sauna stones. You’ll also get this product with a partial assembly that is already completed, which makes it easy for you to set-up by following the instruction manual.
It is CE certified and has built-in vent holes, from preventing the sauna from getting too hot. Moreover, there are stainless steel hinges, fasteners, hinges, sturdy frame along with back/front walls that give this piece an appealing look.
This pleasing barrel shape is functional and stylish at the same time while providing you with room for eight individuals. It also comes with a front porch canopy, and it maximizes the space by placing opposing benches which run across the full chamber.
No products found.
If you want to stretch out, there is enough room for six people inside the barrel and two people outside. You can also cool down in the outside area and rest against the wall while enjoying the fresh air. The sauna is fit to be placed in the indoors and outdoors, like the front porch or the back deck. For retaining the heat in your sauna room, there are self-closing hinges, and for privacy, you have a tempered and tinted glass door.
The door is tinted to provide you with a relaxing, quiet environment, and it has been tempered to make the sauna remain undaunted by the temperature changes. You can use the bucket and ladle to sprinkle water over the hot stones to increase the humidity and for maximum relaxation and health benefits.
The two polymer support cradles are weather-resistant, and it helps to provide a solid foundation to the barrel and preserves the wood. It is effortless to assemble this entire product, and it will take you just a few hours to complete the set-up. The stainless steel parts ensure that it will not harm your sauna or rust, along with an electrical 9.0KW heater.
Also, to comply with the safety guidelines, this barrel can heat for around 60 minutes at a stretch. But, if you want to heat the sauna for longer then 60 minutes, then you can just reset the timer. And for better protection of your barrel, you can buy a bitumen roofing separately for protecting your sauna from rain and UV damage.
This is an exceptionally designed model by Allwood, and it will be a great addition to your outdoor space or garden. It is around 90 inches in length, and the frame is also made of 1-⅝ inches of slow grown Nordic Spruce. There is enough space for six adults, and it also comes with two sets of fire starters.
Frame material 1-5/8" slow grown Nordic Spruce - WE DO NOT...
There is a canopy for ensuring that the sauna is protected from the different weather elements. Moreover, the sauna takes about an hour to heat up to 195 Fahrenheit, while the cylinder shape provides an uninterrupted and natural flow of air with an even distribution of heat.
It also has 70- inch of support cradles that elevates the structure away from the ground, and a chimney that is made of stainless steel. You can rely on this product for its quality, which can withstand years of use.
If you’re looking for an excellent sauna experience, then Allwood Barrel Sauna #300-WHP Wood Heater will meet your needs with ease. Also, the Nordic Spruce construction, fastener mechanism, and the stainless steel fittings will ensure that the quality of this product is maintained. The barrel is quite spacious, so you will be comfortable to use it even when the temperature is high.
Best Barrel Sauna Kits Buyer’s Guide
1. What style barrel sauna?
The barrel sauna has its own set of variations with few stylization options- standard or canopy, and 6-feet or 7-feet diameter.
The standard barrel design provides you with more interior space than the canopy design. In the canopy barrel, the front round section is moved by either 1-feet or 2-feet for creating an exterior sitting area. It gives the sauna an inviting and appealing look.
2. What size?
Are you looking for something small and portable? Or are you looking for something large enough to host several people? You have to be sure about the size that each brand is offering.
Most of the indoor sauna models are 77 inches long on the inside and 80 inches long on the outside, so there’s adequate headroom. The smallest barrel sauna is for two adults, while the largest one is for six adults.
3. What type of lumber?
The different barrel sauna kits are available in one of the four types of lumber:
Hemlock Fir
Clear Red Cedar
Rustic Red Cedar
Nordic Spruce
The Nordic Spruce and the Red Cedar are the best if you’re placing your sauna in the outdoors due to their natural resistance to the weather elements.
4. What type of heater?
It is crucial to consider the type of heater when selecting a barrel sauna, and it also depends on where you’re going to place the barrel. There are gas, infrared, electric, and wood-fired heaters. You should weigh out the pros and cons for each, and then pick the one that is suitable for your needs.
The most economical option for you is the gas heater, even though they might require some additional installation. However, the small electrical heaters will use a 120V outlet power source, and the larger ones will require 240V. Also, you will need a hardwire breaker and the help of an electrician to install the electric heater correctly.
Final words
If you take into account the size, location, cost, and energy that you need for heating up, then selecting the right barrel sauna kit will be a simple task. A barrel sauna has less cost of operation when compared to a sauna room, as it heats up quickly and it’s also energy efficient.
Keep going down the path that will help to bring you closer to a great sauna experience every day.
Simple, swift and extraordinary creative DIYs for tweens and teens follow, we have curated images for a gallery that speaks about the little things, about small actions that can impart wisdom in the creative process of creating, small little crafts that can gather smiles, joy, laughter through simple means.
In the followings rows one will find do it yourself projects that use mundane items such as bottle caps, mason jars or recycled paper to create playful garlands, bookmarks or colorful recycled paper bracelets. These small crafts can be pursued at the weekly family craft session or at the birthday party where the whole gathering can go through a " colorful recycled paper bracelet workshop " and leave the scene with a phenomenal memory tied around their wrist, something beautiful achieved physically tied to a lesson on sustainability and recycling.
Cast a glance and surge inspiration !
Inspiring DIYs for Tweens and Teens to Pursue
1. Start joy with origami dresses
A rather simple origami project that can transform a Mother Day card, a simple and swift, meaningful gift.
A party craft that is definitely worth pursuing as the homemade lip gloss is a tad healthier than what one purchases in retail. The experience of crafting with children is priceless, unforgettable for you and the little ones alike.
Bottle cap accessories may sound odd at first yet one simply cannot question the clean, colorful and vivid result above. Use them to create fridge magnets, small portraits, accessories for various toys, infinite options.
Sensible, airy, ethereal texture go a long way, use discreet palette colors to empower, emphasize the beautiful fragility and the results will be mesmerizing.
15. Use duct/washi tape to personalize school gear
Avoid spending a ludicrous amounts on rare items or exclusive items, simply personalize your own. The back to school craft session ought to be in everyone`s calendar.
Save the planet energy and reuse or recycle your plastic bottles, spread the message around you and be the change that you would like to see in the world.
A craft that you simply have to realize, the colorful bowl can serve you well for years and years, carying your snacks, wearing color, something that teens will definitely love to have around and possibly craft.
The simple technique opens up a wide array of possibilities that mainly revolve around the creation of wall art. The process might test your patience yet the result is extraordinary graphic, surge inspiration and create your own diy string wall art.
The process is rather simple yet the result is extraordinary, the end result can emphasize any mundane item as the new clear dome superbly accentuates shape and color.
A simple change can go a long way and nothing speaks more about identity than crafting unique items. Use simple means to shape big changes, unforgettable memories will be forged.
In your next party you can encourage the creation of paper pinwheels in the craft session, this can bring up the subject of eolian energy, wind power and alternative power options, a sweet craft can rapidly become a teachable moment. Using a different color or pattern for each pinwheel would be interested, it would shape unique results.
Color in wild patterns and stencils of various kinds can greatly raise the little one`s interest. Invite them outside to enjoy color and be by their side at all times.
How extraordinary powerful would be for a girl to be able to affirm that she crafted her own colorful epic purpose ? Simply imagine how impactful can be your next craft session and you`ll want to start gathering the materials required as soon as possible.
Something sweet and colorful simply cannot pass unnoticed at your next teen party, make sure there is plenty and enjoy happiness and laughter around the little ones.
30. Use toys to create epic wall jewelry organizers
Old toys can become so much more, choose a vivid color and craft epic organizers and coat hooks, a new vibrant, positive atmosphere will call your house, home.
Salvage old fabrics and put them to extraordinary use ! Simply wrap regular items in fabric using mod podge, certain patterns can definitely occur along the line !
via organized31.com
32. Button hearts on a canvas
Express your love through a simple craft, put your buttons to good use.
Few projects in the world of do-it-yourself can be as useful as a stress-ball, give this amazing gift indirectly to your friends in your next craft session !
It might sound odd yet a cool bookmark can definitely encourage a teen into picking up reading, choose a simple, cool fantasy book and gift it away with the right, personalized bookmark and you have a recipe for success.
42. Colorful diy folded paper bracelets and crowns
The folded bracelet may be unpractical and easily perishable reason for which it can be overlooked yet the paper crown realized from re-purposed, salvaged paper simply cannot !
What do you think ? How often do you craft with teens, with loved ones ? We would love to hear your opinion on these DIYs for Tweens in the comment section below or over social media !
A painting project can seem exciting until you take a look at your clothes and see multiple stains on them.
Artists are no strangers to paint staining their house floors, clothes, and mostly their paint brushes. However, when using acrylic paint, getting the stains out of the surfaces might not be easy. You need to take some precautions and, more importantly, know the techniques that you can implement to remove stubborn acrylic stains.
Getting rid of wet acrylic is pretty simple, but it’s not easy to remove dried acrylic paint. In this guide, we will tell you how acrylic paint works, how to best remove them, and what materials can be used for the job.
Washing off acrylic paints is a hassle; thus most high quality body paints don’t use acrylics, although there is a concept of acrylic body paints. Check out our article on types of face and body paints to know more before you apply acrylic as face paint for your upcoming dress up party.
So, without any further delay, let’s dive right in!
Does Acrylic Paint Stay Permanently On Clothes?
The answer is both a yes and a no. If you are working on wet acrylic paint which has not dried up or been exposed to heat, removing them from clothes would not be much of a problem. However, things are very different when you are handling dried acrylic paint.
After the cloth is washed and dried, the difficulty of removing the acrylic paint will multiply. If you have used this paint before, you would know that it is water-resistant but not waterproof, unless you apply a special sealant on it. So, if you are planning to wear an untreated t-shirt in the rain, we would refrain you from doing this.
To make acrylic paint permanent, it is best that you apply a proper material to seal paint and then treat it with heat.
Acrylic paint is made up of pigments that are put in an acrylic polymer emulsion. This paint is plastic and completely water soluble while still wet. The color does not become plastic-like and resistant to water until it gets dried up completely.
Do Acrylic Paint Wash Off Clothes?
With proper treatment, you can get acrylic paint washed off clothes. For this, you might need quick solutions like isopropyl alcohol and hairspray. As we have mentioned before, this paint is water-soluble till it dries, so if you catch it before the color dries off, it can be rinsed off completely.
You will have to do the needful with the wet paint and work timely in case you want to get it removed. To get rid of the color, you’ll need to wash acrylic paint before it dries and hardens up. The acrylic paint stain is not likely going to come off easily with a regular wash. With a simple wash, the color may fade slightly, but in order to remove the paint completely, you would need to apply the special treatment.
We will talk about some of the ways in the second half of the guide!
Can Acrylic Paint Be Removed From Skin?
Before we get to answering this question, let us first clarify that it is best to try and avoid getting acrylic paint on your skin. Acrylic paint might have an adverse impact on your skin, especially in sensitive areas like the face.
One major problem that people come across when trying to remove acrylic paint from their faces is that they cannot use any harsh chemicals. So, if you were thinking of using a nail polish remover to remove the color from your skin, throw that idea out of the window.
If the acrylic paint dries up, peeling it from your skin might be a painful experience. So, try removing it while it is still wet.
Can Acrylic Paints Be Removed From Wood?
In case you have used acrylic paint on wood, you would know that it tends to stick very well to the surface and deliver a nice finish. However, at times there might be excess paint in the corners that you need to remove. For this, you would not have to do a lot as the process is pretty simple.
Just like the fabric medium, it is pretty simple to remove acrylic paint from wood, provided the colors are still dry. But even dried acrylic paint can be removed from wood quite conveniently. However, you will need a few other types of equipment for this, namely soap and water.
If you want to do a complete removal, you will require a few other accessories like rubbing alcohol, sandpaper, and other solutions that remove acrylic paint from wood.
These supplies will help remove acrylic paint from the wooden surface without causing any damage to it.
How To Remove Acrylic Paint From Clothes?
We get a lot of queries from readers about how to remove acrylic paint from most surfaces. However, we have noticed that most people face trouble when removing paint from clothes.
So, to help you, we are here with a few possible techniques that can help you get rid of paint from fabrics with ease. Let’s take a look!
1. Pretreatment
As we have mentioned before, to remove color from the fabric, it is best that you act on it while the paint is still wet. The other thing to do is to pretreat an acrylic fabric paint stain before applying any of the removal techniques that we are soon going to discuss.
Before the stain dries up and hardens, use a clean cloth or a paper towel to blot as much color as possible. If you see stubborn bits of paint stuck in the fabric, we recommend you use a toothbrush or a paintbrush to remove the color. Acrylic paint (waterproof) can be a blessing or a problem, so suggest that you start acting on it before the paint dries up completely.
Having said that, you may be stuck in a situation where you might have to work on dry acrylic paint. In that case, we suggest that you make use of accessories like a blunt knife, spoons, or stiff brushes to scrape off the plastic-like dried paint. The more paint you can scrape off, the easier it will be to get rid of the stains.
Before you start undoing earlier acrylic paint projects using chemicals to get rid of the color, make sure to not skip the pretreatment step!
2. Acrylic Paint Washable With Dish Soap
When acrylic colors are wet, they are water-soluble and can be easily washed off with dish soap. If you are working in your own art studio, first arrange all the essential accessories before starting with the work.
To begin with, you need to mix an equal amount of water and dish soap in a container. Proceed by soaking a clean cloth in the mix and wring it out to ensure there’s no extra water in it.
Once this is done, dab the stained area with the wet cloth. Make sure to not rub it, as that might cause the paint to spread to the other parts of the fabric.
After that, put the fabric in cool water and wash it properly. Keep repeating the process until the stain is no longer present.
Pro tip: Try avoiding the washing machine as that might cause the stain to spread further.
This method is the easiest and the cheapest of all the solutions to remove paint stains. Having said that, it works best when the paint is still wet and has not dried up completely.
3. Using Hairspray
Most of the over-the-counter hairsprays that you use contain a number of polymers along with hydrocarbons and alcohol. So, they are great for removing stubborn paint from a number of surfaces, especially fabrics.
However, before you start with the process, we recommend that you try the spray on an inconspicuous area of the cloth. Not all fabrics can handle this chemical, so check it out first before applying it to a larger area.
Begin by putting the fabric in a sink and spraying properly over the stained area till it is soaked. If done correctly, the hairspray should make the paint soft, and you should be able to peel it off with ease. Once done, immerse the garment in cold water. If you see that there are remaining flakes of paint, try scraping them off with your fingernails.
Keep repeating the hairspray and rinse cycle until most of the acrylic paint is out of the fabric. Finally, put the cloth in a washing machine and give it a good rub to ensure that there are no remaining bits of color left on the surface.
4. Nail Polish Removers To The Rescue
If you check the chemical composition of nail polish removers, you will see that they mostly contain acetone, which is one of the main components in paint thinners as well. So, you can understand that this solution would do a great job when it comes to removing paint stains.
Refrain working with bare hands and wear a pair of work gloves if you have sensitive skin. Also, before you begin working, alway check to see how the chemical is reacting to the fabric. Not every fabric can handle the strong chemicals present in a nail polish remover.
For example, if you are planning to remove stains from surfaces like spandex, nail polish removers might cause lasting damage to it.
To begin, take a clean cloth and soak it in a nail polish remover. After that, you need to press the soaked cloth on the stained surface and keep it for five minutes. If you see that parts of the stains have become loose or flaky, that means that the remover has worked well.
Remember that when fabrics are exposed to acetone for a long time, they might get damaged. So, act quickly and use a blunt knife or a spoon to remove as much paint as possible. Do this efficiently, and do not let the acetone sit on the fabric for too long.
If you see that there is more paint left on the surface, keep repeating the process until all of it is gone. And for the final step, wash the fabric in warm water using regular detergent. That should get all the stain out from the cloth!
As we have mentioned earlier, nail polish remover might damage the weave of the fabric that you are using it on. So, we recommend that you use a fabric softener once you are done with all the steps. That should help undo some of the damage and help the fabric last for a longer time.
5. Murphy’s Oil Soap
If you have lived with grandparents, you would be no stranger to the smell of Murphy’s oil soap, which is used for the wooden floors. This works great as an acrylic paint wash and works perfectly with oil paints too. If you are a frequent user of acrylic paints, it is best that you keep this cleaner handy.
When the paint is still a bit wet, use this cleaner to get rid of the paint from the wood.
Just remember that you might have to work a bit hard for removing dry paint from a wooden surface. For example, if you are working on a paint-stained brush, you can soak it in a solution that contains equal parts soap and water. You have to keep the paintbrush in the solution overnight, and next morning you’ll just need to rinse the color off the brush.
To make the most of the cleaner, try and follow the pretreatment step to get rid of the excess colors before you begin with the process. After that, put the stained cloth under a running tap to wash away as much of the excess paint as possible. Once you are done with the first step, soak a clean piece of cloth with Murphy’s oil soap and dab the stained area with it.
While you are at it, make sure that to not rub it too hard that the paint further settles into the fabric. After you are done rinsing the cloth with the cleaner, rinse the garment with clean water and check if the stain has been removed.
Once the garment is totally dry, check for paint flakes. You can pick with your nails or use a tweezer to remove them. Flakes are easier to remove when they are dry. However, be careful while you are at it, and handle it with care to ensure that the fabric is not damaged.
Will A Wash Help Remove Acrylic Paint Off Clothes?
If you pretreat the stained fabric well, there’s a good chance that the wet colors will easily come out of the material. However, if the paint has completely dried, a simple wash won’t be enough to get the stains out.
For removing stubborn stains, follow the steps that we have mentioned in this guide. And once you are done, do not forget to put your clothes in the washing machine for a final wash.
A word of advice, if you put paint-stained clothes in the washing machine, do not put any other garments in the mix. If you do that, there is a good chance that the stain will damage the other pieces of the garment as well.
How To Prevent Acrylic Colors From Staining Objects?
When you are working with acrylic paint, a little splatter here and there is inevitable. But there are a few tips that you can follow to avoid a significant amount of paint stains. Let’s take a look.
If your children are playing with acrylic colors on the study floors, we recommend that you spread newspapers all over. This will protect the floors from getting damaged.
On the other hand, if you are starting an art project, wear old clothes and not new ones that might get stained. One or two splatters of paint won’t make too much of a difference if they are old and worn-out.
Do Acrylic Paints Wash Off Final Words
With that, it’s a wrap!
We have tried to cover all about the possibility of removing acrylic paint from clothes and other surfaces. All the methods that we have listed down are helpful and will enable you to easily remove paint stains from different surfaces. Removing dry acrylic paint can seem like a challenging task, but it is not an impossible feat!
After a finished project, there are a lot of stains that artists have to deal with. Hopefully, using these methods, you have been able to deal with stubborn stains. Also, pay close attention to the preventive measures that we have mentioned.
If you liked reading this guide and want to see more of such reads, we suggest that you keep a watch on this space. Until next time, take care!
Working with watery acrylic colors can leave you frustrated most of the time.
Painting with extreme care to not create smudges and to master those edges is quite overwhelming and time-taking. That is why artists need to thicken their paints.
By itself, acrylic paint is like peanut butter without jelly; it tastes good but it’s so much better with the jelly.
The point is, acrylic paints can, no doubt, deliver great results. But when you add a medium, it not only allows you to thicken the paint, but you can also modify the texture - making it look more realistic, adjust the glow, and other augmentations.
Today we’re going to talk about thickening acrylic paints for easy molding and enhanced effects. We’re gonna give you a step-by-step guide on how to thicken acrylic paint correctly so you get utmost satisfaction with your work.
Without further delay, let's begin with the guide right away!
How to Thicken Acrylic Paint
What do you need?
What you will require to make your acrylic paints thicker is a medium, of course. Water can be used if required. Extra components will be required if you plan to create textured paintings (we will discuss about them below). And that’s it! It is that simple.
Generally, mediums should be in the following forms: gel or paste.
A medium can either be home-made or available in local art stores/online. Either way, we shall see which one meets your requirements.
Homemade Acrylic Paint Medium
A home-made medium is relatively much cheaper. This method is highly preferable if you’re a beginner and just want to see how thickened paints are like.
Yes, homemade mediums are easier and quicker to get, especially when the ingredients are those which you use every day in your home.
However, everything has its limitations. And, if you wish to create a piece that will last, this method is not advisable. This is because cornstarch (which is edible) can slowly decay, and that is not good for the painting’s shelf-life.
Moreover, if you have to add water to the mixture, it will turn into a crumbly paste with tiny lumps which will give you a tough time sliding brush strokes. Some places might get uneven distribution of colors.
However, if you wish to give this method a try, check out how to do it!
How to make a DIY acrylic paint thickening medium?
With Cornstarch
This is the most common technique to create home-made mediums. Not a lot of effort is required to make your own medium. All you need is cornstarch and water.
Start by creating a paste. For that, you need to mix 2 cups of water and 3 tablespoons of cornstarch. When you’re done with the concoction, move on to boiling it on low heat.
Keep stirring until the mixture becomes thick enough to form a paste. When that is also done, wait for it to cool down and that’s it! Your home-made acrylic paint thickener is ready to use!
Tip:When mixing the paste with paint, make sure you add the paste little-by-little until you get the right consistency for the paint.
With Joint Compound or Talcum Powder
Other home-made options you can try are joint compound and talcum powder.
A joint compound is a material used to seal and fill joints. It is mostly used in hardware stores. This is also another affordable way to thicken acrylic paints. Although longevity is not ensured, it produces a great finish and it dries off very quickly.
All you need to do is thoroughly mix a little amount of the joint compound with the paint and watch for the desired consistency. It easily blends in with acrylic paints.
With talcum powder, you can do the same. Just add water to create a paste and when the thickness is right, you have to mix it with the acrylic paint.
As always, keep a check on the consistency of the mixture so that there will be no mess up after, and you’ll achieve the results you’re looking for.
The finishing you get from talcum powder is somehow semi-matte because the powder will slightly dim the luminosity of the paint. The results you get from talcum powder can also be a little bit crumbly.
Ready-made Acrylic Paint Thickening Medium
A ready-made medium, on the other hand, is specifically made to serve the purpose of thickening acrylic paints.
It is comparably pricier than homemade mediums but the quality of both the paints and paintings is outstanding.
Unlike homemade pastes, ready-made mediums are easy to use. The level of smoothness you achieve in the end is exceptional.
If you have to add water to the solution, it will not result in crumbly lumps. You can keep the mixture in an airtight container for quite a while and you’ll get the same results when you continue the work. Moreover, there is no struggle with brush strokes like you get with powdery homemade mediums.
If we are going to talk about aging, ready-made mediums can really do magic to your paintings. Of course, all artists want their paintings to last and age well. Not to be biased but ready-made mediums do more justice to that than homemade mediums can ever will since, as we mentioned, they are made for this purpose.
Ready-made acrylic paint mediums are available in regular forms - Modeling Paste and Gel.
Paste Acrylic Paint Mediums
One way you can opt to thicken paint is by using a modeling paste. Modeling pastes are available online or at any local art store.
What you need to know if you’re just starting off, is that pastes can either be white or contain a substance that enhances/brightens the colors. The white-colored medium does not lighten the original color; it will dry off while providing the expected color.
What modeling pastes give you are realistic or 3D effects by mixing only a little amount of it with the acrylic colors.
However, modeling pastes come in white unblendable color. This can change and lighten the original color you want to see. It can also be a little difficult to concoct if there is no putty knife.
Apart from that, a modeling paste allows you to have power over the outcome of the painting. When it has dried off, you can mold it, shape it, craft it, and paint on it whichever way you want.
The paste acrylic paint medium enhances the beauty of the painting - be it in luster, matte, or watercolor effects.
However, what you can do to get textured effects with paste thickeners is to try mixing it with stucco, sand and even sawdust (it works great for me, personally). But it also depends on which type of surface you paint it on.
You can paint on something smooth like a board or a canvas and you will get great results. Keep in mind that the consistency of the mixture also has a great impact on your painting.
For surfaces that are already textured, you won’t need a lot of additional elements, especially when you get the right textured surface.
Gel Acrylic Paint Mediums
Gel thickeners come in a wine-red color. That does not affect the original color of the paint, however. These are the most simple-to-use and time-saving mediums you can get. Gel mediums also help with rendering transparency effects without reducing the quality of the paints. Besides transparency, there are other abilities by gel mediums that we will discuss in the following.
Gel thickeners offer painters with a range of choices but the most popular ones are Gloss, Semi-Gloss, Matte, and Textured. We shall briefly explore what purpose each type of gel serves.
Gloss Gel. Gloss gel thickeners add more vibrancy to the acrylic colors. It produces highlighted features with light strokes of a brush, making the colors a bit more see-through.
Semi-Gloss Gel. To achieve a semi-gloss finishing thickener, you will need to mix gloss gel and matte gel together. What it does is remove the excess gloss and matte effects, leaving your colors more balanced with a semi-matte/semi-gloss effect.
Matte Gel. Matte gel thickeners will convert the glaring effect that acrylic paints produce and give the painting a much smoother surface and a non-glare appearance.
Textured Gel. Textured gel is quite different from the rest. It has its own characteristic where it acts like refined sand and ceramic to produce textured effects in your paintings. You can also try mixing ground elements for testing different other textures. It is water-based and that makes painting tools easy to clean up afterward. The best thing about a textured gel medium is that it lets you shape the texture when it’s drying up.
How to use gel medium?
For using gel thickeners, you will need to mix a little amount of the gel with paint.
To achieve a smooth concoction, make sure you mix it thoroughly while constantly adding a little-by-little amount of the gel into the paint. If you feel that the combination’s thickness is right, you can stop adding the medium.
How to use textured gels?
Using textured gels is no less different from using other gel mediums. You have to add a small quantity of the gel to your paint and stop till you have reached the right thickness.
The only difference is that when you want to create other different textures for the painting, you can use more additional compounds.
Just make sure that the amount of compound you mix does not impact the brush strokes too much. Other than that, it’s ideal for creating beautiful, unique textures.
Why Should Artists Use Acrylic Paint Mediums?
Sometimes, paintings do not turn out as expected because of the color’s consistency.
Acrylic paint alone is too runny for steady work. It can get really stressing when you have to adjust every stroke. However, when you mix it with a medium, it unveils the original idea and the essence of the painting.
They also dry pretty quick; leaving no chance for the artist to easily blend other colors. But with a medium, it provides the painting with the ability to dry slowly and properly.
If you compare a painting that allows the artist to spend more time on colors, you will see that it is much more detailed than that which dries off faster. Because with the latter, you have to rush your blending before it completely dries off.
In other words, you have complete control over the outcome of the painting to match your desires. You can produce a tonne of effects using a medium.
These are a few reasons why the medium is a need for all creative artists.
Thickening mediums acrylic can help you achieve different types of finishing - be it matte, gloss, semi-matte, patterns and textures, and more. Most seasoned artists prefer to work with different mediums for different paintings to make each painting unique.
There will be times when you wish to create effects such as impasto and high textures. Gel mediums are a must when it comes to creating these. For instance, the impasto effect is not possible to achieve with acrylic paint alone. But when you add a thickener, the surface holds the paint better. Hence, creating the desired effect.
Something to keep in mind
Homemade mediums are, obviously, much cheaper and faster to get. They are also great for temporary paintings or drawings that serve temporary events and occasions.
Since they are inventive mediums, they can be used with any type of paint. There is no specification, whatsoever. Homemade mediums are mostly ideal for beginners and experimenters.
But if you’re planning to buy a medium, make sure you read the labels before buying and check if it is meant for acrylic paints or other types of paints. There are different mediums meant for different paints. This way, you can be sure your painting will be a masterpiece!
Last words
So we have come to the end of this article. We hope our article has helped you gain much more insights on how to thicken acrylic paints and which option suits your needs better.
BTU is a unit of heat commonly used in the US and UK to measure the cooling capacity of ACs. The rest of the world prefers using kW for the same, which is a unit of power by definition. Converting BTU to kW with the calculator provided here can help determine the different energy specifications of an AC.
Convert BTU To kW Calculator
When it comes to heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems, an air conditioner machine is the best means to control indoor air quality.
On that note, the heating and cooling capacity of such air conditioners is measured in units like BTU or kilowatts. Sometimes they are used interchangeably, which can become problematic for regular people to understand.
That is why I have included a handy BTU to kW calculator in this brief guide for your convenience. If you are curious about how these two units are related and what they imply, then keep reading!
What Do BTU And kW Mean?
Simply put, both of these units are used to measure the air conditioner capacity, as I have already mentioned before. To explain it a bit more technically, I’ll need to delve into the basic science of heating and cooling systems.
BTU stands for British thermal units, and it is used for the measurement of heat. By definition, it is the quantity of heat energy necessary to increase the temperature of a pound (mass) of water by one degree Fahrenheit. It is mostly used as a basic unit of measurement in the United States and the United Kingdom.
On the other hand, a kilowatt is a unit of power (physics), and it is used to measure the amount of energy consumed by an appliance in a given time. In the case of HVAC systems, the kilowatt can be used to indirectly measure the amount of heat given out by the machine.
Do not be confused by these two statements, for they both imply the same thing. The higher the energy consumption of an appliance, the more heat it will generate, and vice versa.
Kilowatt is the more widely used unit in other parts of Europe and the rest of the world. Here, I should mention that a kilowatt is actually a large unit that is derived from a watt. This is the standard recommended unit of power according to the International System of Units (otherwise known as the SI system). In this regard, one kilowatt is equal to 1,000 watts.
What Is The Relation Between BTU And kW?
Technically speaking, the BTU is not exactly the same as kW, as you can already tell from the above discussion. The BTU is a unit that is used to measure energy, while the kW is a unit of power. Keeping that in mind, the actual equivalent unit to kW is BTU/hr, which is the heating or cooling provided by a split or window air conditioner in an hour.
On a similar note, the unit that is equivalent to BTU is a kilowatt-hour or kWh, which measures the total energy consumption of your air conditioning equipment. The metric equivalent of BTU is the joule, which is the SI unit of energy.
Converting The Units
Now that you know the distinction between these units, it is time to address the relationship between them, which will help with the conversion. Both the units of BTU and BTU/hr are smaller compared to their respective counterparts.
In that context, one British thermal unit is roughly equivalent to 0.00029307107 kWh. Thus, if you wish to convert BTU to kW, you need to multiply the AC’s BTU rating by the above number. And if you want to convert from kW to BTU, you need to divide the kW rating by the above figure.
Likewise, if you are looking for the BTU/hr to kW conversion, you can do it in one simple step. Simply divide the BTU/hr rating of the AC by 3412.14, and you will get the corresponding kW rating. Conversely, by multiplying the kW figure of your AC by the above number, you will get the BTU/hr rating of your AC.
Or, you can use an online conversion calculator to avoid the hassle of manual calculations. In fact, you can use these calculators to convert different aspects of your AC. For instance, if you use a watt to amps calculator, you can determine the electrical current used by your AC.
Similarly, with a suitable calculator to convert between the COP and EER numbers, you can determine the performance of your system in terms of electricity consumption. This can be particularly helpful in calculating monthly energy spending. You can even determine how many BTUs you need for a room using a BTU calculator.
Tip
Most manufacturers today provide a BTU to kW chart (and other relevant conversion charts) to help with this aspect. So, you should always consult them before making the purchase.
Final Words
That brings me to the end of this brief guide. You will find the information to be helpful if you are doing some energy calculations for your AC or are simply curious.
It is always a wise idea to determine these aspects before you purchase the air conditioner. That way, you will have good control over your usage habits and reduce your monthly electricity bills. Or you could impart the knowledge to others and help them out with their purchase.
Anyway, now it is time for me to say goodbye. See you around, folks!
Perhaps, you’ve got a dehumidifier for your bedroomto keep the space free from mold, bacteria, and allergens that trigger allergies.
Such allergens can cause chest pain, wheezing, sneezing, eye irritation, and even worse– aspergillosis. As such, dehumidifiers are a blessing for overly humid spaces– be it the living room, basement, or bathroom.
Now, many homeowners buy dehumidifiers but cannot determine the best place to keep them. Well, since dehumidifiers regulate humidity levels by removing excessive moisture from the space, they should be placed close to damp locations or areas with high humidity levels.
Instead of moving your dehumidifier from one corner to another, read our guide to know where you should place it in your bedroom. Let’s dive into the deets!
Dehumidifier Placement Guide
Excess humidity in any space provides a hospitable environment for mold and mildew to thrive. Later, molds release spores in the air, which triggers allergic reactions, such as skin rash, runny nose, and shortness of breath.
Irrespective of whether you suffer from allergies, having a dehumidifier in your home is a must. Besides eliminating mold and mildew, these devices keep your space clean, promoting a healthy and hygienic environment.
Where To Put Dehumidifier In Bedroom?
Finding the right size dehumidifier isn’t as challenging as deciding the right spot to place it to enhance its functionality. Assuming that your bedroom has a leaky ceiling or damp walls, the humidity level of the space is higher than in the other rooms of your home.
In that case, you must place the device in the center of the room where there is proper air circulation to work efficiently. A dehumidifier draws damp air from your bedroom and releases it back by converting it into dry and fresh air to ensure adequate ventilation.
As dehumidifiers contain a tank to store water, you should never keep them close to the TV, bedroom refrigerators, or other electronic appliances. Though they are less likely to leak, you must still avoid placing them near electronics to avoid damaging them.
When placing your dehumidifier, keep in mind that you’ll have to empty the tank from time to time. So, keep the device in such a space that the tank can be easily detached for cleaning.
If that seems too much of a task, some dehumidifiers can be connected with a hose to empty the water tank, so you might as well go for those models. You can either connect the hose to the laundry room or the bathroom to drain the tank regularly.
Things To Consider While Choosing The Best Place For Your Bedroom Dehumidifier
There are three factors that every homeowner should consider while figuring out the right spot for placing their dehumidifier. They are as follows:
1. Source Of Moisture
Every homeowner must place a dehumidifier at the spot closest to the moisture source. This way, the machine can eliminate moisture from the room quickly before it infiltrates other spaces.
2. Room Size
No doubt, the room size is important in the decision-making process, but you should also consider it when deciding on the right spot to place the dehumidifier.
In large bedrooms, a dehumidifier must be placed in the center to ensure maximum coverage. When it comes to small bedrooms, you can place the device wherever you want because there isn’t much space to cover.
3. Uncluttered Space
Aside from the room size, dehumidifiers should be placed in uncluttered spaces only then will they function properly. If you place them too close to the wall, furniture, or other objects, the exhaust vents get blocked, affecting their efficiency.
Make sure the space is uncluttered so that they can suck in the damp air and eliminate excess humidity, making the space clean and hygienic.
Other Rooms Where You Can Put Your Dehumidifier For Eliminating Excess Moisture
A dehumidifier is a versatile device that can be used in basements, laundry rooms, and other spaces to remove excess moisture from the air. Before you place it in other rooms, use a hygrometer to know the relative humidity level of all the spaces. Whichever room has the most moisture, keep your device in that room first to remove excess humidity.
1. Bathroom
Unwinding yourself by taking a long shower sounds like a perfect way to call it a day. But did you know that steamy hot showers raise humidity levels in the bathroom and provide the perfect environment for mold and mildew to grow?
What’s worse is that warm air damages the bathroom cabinets and vanities, causing the paint to peel.
So, if you have humidity problems in the bathroom, consider using a dehumidifier to get rid of excess moisture. As your bedroom dehumidifier is a portable device, you can take it to the bathroom and set it up to trap moist air while regulating room humidity levels.
After taking a bath, simply run the dehumidifier for about 20 minutes to eliminate excess moisture from the space. If your bedroom device is large, we suggest getting a small bathroom dehumidifier to sit on the shelf or vanity.
2. Basement
There’s no denying that basements contain washers and water heaters. And, since they lack proper ventilation, humidity builds up quickly, allowing allergens, mold, and mildew to thrive in the space.
Besides triggering allergic reactions, they damage the appliances kept in the space. To maintain humidity levels, all you need to do is place a dehumidifier and let it do the job.
Many basements have plumbing lines installed for washing machines, which makes it easy to drain water. For large basements, you’ll have to go for a unit that will dehumidify the entire space without issues.
However, most people prefer using an air conditioner in the basement because it lowers the temperature while reducing humidity. Now, the question is– what is better for a basement: air conditioner or dehumidifier? Of course, a dehumidifier is a better option because air conditioners won’t eliminate mold or pesky allergens from the space. Moreover, the former reduces humidity levels while keeping utility bills low.
3. Living Rooms
If mold spores on the living room walls are ruining your beautiful home, it’s about time to use a dehumidifier in the space. As living rooms are large, you must place your dehumidifier near the source of humidity.
That is to say, the front door is the best space to place your dehumidifier because the humid air sneaks in from it.
Your bedroom dehumidifier may not work as efficiently in the living room as it does in small rooms. Hence, a whole house dehumidifier with an HVAC system is better for large spaces.
4. Crawl Spaces
Believe it or not, crawl spaces are the most humid place in any home. This usually happens during the summer when the warm outside air sneaks into the cool spaces, leading to condensation.
Unlike warm air, cool air cannot hold moisture, so humidity levels rise in such spaces.
Besides, inadequate insulation and leaky pipes contribute to high humidity levels in crawled spaces. So, a compact and portable dehumidifier will come in handy for reducing humidity levels.
Where To Put Dehumidifier In Bedroom Final Words
Now that you know the answer to the question– “should I have a dehumidifier in my bedroom?” Are you ready to spend money on the best one? However, the functionality of a dehumidifier depends upon the position you place it in.
In case you’re unable to choose the right spot, simply place the device against the damp wall or the source of moisture– be it a window, door, or any other space. Also, make sure the space isn’t cluttered, or it will hamper the productivity of the unit.
That’s all there is to it. Hopefully, you’ll choose the best spot to place your dehumidifier in your bedroom and enjoy undisturbed slumber.
Toodles!
Are you fascinated by resin coasters, pendants, trays, and cake stands?
Honestly, when we saw one on the internet, we were fascinated too. With different resin pigments to choose from, the creative opportunities are limitless. Moreover, you can even sell such stunning pieces online and make a few bucks.
However, working with epoxy resin isn’t child’s play. Those who use it daily to create eye-catching art pieces know how challenging it is. Along with all the necessary supplies, you must also get your hands on epoxy mold release agents.
In case you don’t know what epoxy mold release agents are, then this guide is just for you! When used properly, epoxy mold release agents will easily let you unmold cured resin pieces without any difficulty. Rest assured, both your castings and molds will be safe.
In this guide, we’ll share with you everything about epoxy mold release agents. So, let’s not procrastinate anymore and dive straight into the deets.
Mold Release Guide + Epoxy Release Agents
Why Are Release Agents Necessary While Working With Epoxy Resin?
Well, you know that mold release agents are necessary if you’re working with epoxy resin. For the novices who aren’t aware of release agents, then let us introduce it to you. Basically, release agents are chemicals that prevent materials and objects from adhering to other resin pieces.
Simply having the correct resin, hardener, and a few silicone molds isn’t enough, particularly when you’re curating art pieces to sell online. So, you’ll have to get your hands on epoxy release agents. Whether you have to unmold resin coasters or pendants, having mold release agents will let you unmold anything smoothly and easily.
However, as a rule of thumb, always remember to grease silicone molds before pouring the resin into the molds. That’s because greasing prevents the hardened resin from sticking to the molds. Note that this isn’t just applicable for smaller castings. You’ll have to use this on every surface where you’ll be using epoxy resin.
Moreover, if you make casting molds, you will have to use epoxy release agents on them too. That’s because it is important to coat the negative mold before you begin. Also, remember to go for epoxy compatible release agents.
Generally speaking, if you do not use release agents, know that all your efforts will go in vain. So, whether you’re making molds out of glass fiber mats or epoxy resin, make sure you use release agents.
With molds being completely covered by release agents, you can rest assured that the resin will not come in contact with the molds. Moreover, epoxy resin release agents are compatible with polyurethane and polyester resins too.
Which Surfaces Don’t Go Along Well With Epoxy Release Agents?
However, you must keep in mind that epoxy mold release agents don’t get along well with wood because they are porous. So, when you’re handling wooden surfaces, make sure you seal them up properly. Or, the release agent will get completely absorbed into the wood.
Along with wood, plaster and foam also don’t respond well to epoxy release agents. Therefore avoid using them on such surfaces.
Epoxy Release Agents That You Can Consider Today
Now that you know the basics, it’s time to dive into the intricacies. The market is saturated with tons of options. However, you need not worry because we’ll be discussing each of the agents in detail. So, move on and take a look.
Mold Release Wax
While searching for epoxy release agents, we came across mold release wax. As the name suggests, it comes in the form of wax. It is a chemical agent that prevents the bonding of casting material with the mold.
Generally, it is like liquid wax and comes in a container. This makes application an easy task. Simply open the container, pour the wax onto the cloth and use it to grease silicone molds. Truly speaking, we love the fact that this wax is highly versatile. And so, you can use it on any surface you want to.
Note that the cured resin might appear to be dull after applying mold release wax onto your molds and surfaces. In such situations, use a lint-free cloth to revive the shine of your cured objects and surfaces.
Uses Of Mold Release Wax
Mold release wax is compatible with a variety of surfaces. Once you’ve got your hands on it, the possibilities are endless. However, they are best suited for flat and large surfaces. That’s because such surfaces are easy to grease.
Although you can grease small surfaces and molds, we recommend sticking to large surfaces. That’s because it will be challenging and time-consuming to apply grease on small surfaces. Moreover, there are chances of missing corners or small angles.
Also, when you’re greasing a mold that has been used thousands of times, remember to clean the mold completely. To do this, use some steel wool and warm water. It will clean up all the wax residue from the mold, preparing it for the next application.
How To Use Mold Release Wax
Using mold release wax onto the molds isn’t challenging at all. Rather, it is quite an easy task. So first off, shake the container well before you use it. Since it has been sitting on the shelf for quite a long time, it is necessary to shake it properly. This will recombine the wax with solvents, thereby allowing easy applications.
Next, take out a small amount of wax with a spatula and apply it to the surface with a lint-free cloth. After you’ve applied it thoroughly, wait for a few minutes before polishing the release wax with a clean rag.
Note that if you’re greasing a new mold, you will have to apply a second coat to it. Also, there should be a gap of 12 hours between the two coats. Thus, apply the first layer and leave it overnight. However, one coat is sufficient for old molds.
Also, for those who want to give a polished look to their wax, here’s a pro tip - use a PVA release lacquer on the wax.
This mold release wax is perfect for those looking for a top-notch quality product without burning a hole in their pockets. Formulated with hydrocarbon and microcrystalline waxes, this is a multipurpose product option for all of your epoxy resin projects.
Standout Features:
1.5 lb metal can
Blend of hydrocarbon and microcrystalline waxes
Why Did We Like It?
There are many things we love about this mold release wax. However, what we really like about it is its affordable price tag, making it a convenient option for those on a budget.
Speaking of functionality, this mold release wax works great on large surfaces. Also, you may use it to seal uneven wood molds. So, it is a highly versatile product.
Additionally, we love the design of this mold release wax. Coming in a 1.5 lb metal tin, you can tuck it safely anywhere in your cabinet. And you need not worry about the container getting damaged.
Moving on, this wax comes in a 680 ml container which is decent enough, in our opinion. So, feel free to use this on silicone molds, river tables, fiberglass, countertops, and other surfaces.
Lastly, it is easy to use. Simply clean and prep the mold or surface and apply a thin coat of this wax with a clean, dry cloth. Also, make sure you rub the fabric in every direction.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Undoubtedly, this is one of the best mold release wax that we’ve come across. However, our only gripe is that it doesn’t come with a wax applicator pad. That said, we recommend you either buy one or simply use a good quality rag for greasing your molds. Other than that, this product works incredibly well.
Pros
Affordable
Versatile applications
Easy to use
Nice packaging
Cons
No applicator pad
Mold Release Spray
Those looking for a more convenient option than wax must definitely try their hands at release spray. Unlike mold release wax, it is perfectly suited for small and detailed applications. That’s because the spray reaches such teenie-weenie spaces easily. So, if you’re a jewelry designer or coaster maker who sells his creations online, then this spray is best for your molds.
With a superb combination of aerosol and wax, release spray does a decent job of adding a protective layer to your mold. However, aerosol evaporates after some time, while the wax remains.
Uses Of Mold Release Spray
Mold release sprays are best suited for molds with small and challenging edges. For instance, it would be perfect for flower pot molds, jewelry molds, and crystal shards molds. The spray tip ensures an even distribution of the release agents into the molds. So, rest assured even the challenging nooks and crannies will be covered with mold release spray.
If you’re looking for ways to take your cured epoxy objects to the next level, simply polish them to achieve a uniform and even surface. However, this depends upon the preference of the users.
How To Use Mold Release Spray
First off, you will have to remove all dirt, grease, oil residue, and other impurities from the mold. Generally, cleaning the mold is important no matter which release agent you will be using. That’s because impurities will hinder release agents, thereby preventing them from adhering to surfaces.
Also, once cured, these impurities will damage both the mold and the casting. So, after cleaning the molds, shake the can of the release spray properly. Next, with a distance of 20 cm to 30 cm, spray over the surface of the mold. Spray only a thin layer, and remember to do this carefully.
Moreover, you must take care to cover every part of the mold. When you’ve completely sprayed the release agent all over the mold, wait for a few minutes. If you wish to polish the surface of the mold, then do so. Use a lint-free cloth, and you’re done. However, polishing is optional.
Note that if you’re using a new mold, it’s important you treat the mold with release spray at least three times. Also, you must leave the molds overnight after each spraying session.
Looking for a good epoxy release spray to prolong the life of your expensive molds? Check out this silicone mold release spray. Suitable for a wide variety of applications, this mold release spray is a fast-drying one. So, get one for your DIY epoxy resin projects and make coasters, crystals, flowers, and anything you want.
Standout Features:
Meets FDA-regulation
Excellent lubrication
Why Did We Like It?
The most striking thing about this spray has to be its versatility. From blow molding to injection molding, this spray is highly functional. Plus, it is compatible with both hot and cold molds.
With its 3.5 silicone content, this mold release spray adheres perfectly to your molds. Also, it is a fast-drying one. So, you won’t have to wait long to apply a second coat. Plus, it is non-staining and non-corrosive. Thus, when it comes to this epoxy release spray, your molds are in safe hands.
Additionally, it prevents sticking, thereby improving the lifespan of your expensive silicone molds. Also, it enhances the finish of the surface. You will also appreciate the fact that this product is low in odor. Therefore, you can use it indoors.
This release spray also meets FDA Regulations. This means it is safe for contact with foods. Last but not least, this spray is easy to use. Hold it at a distance of 10 to 12 cm, and spray a thin coat over the surface of the mold.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This epoxy release spray works amazingly on silicone molds, and that’s why it is a popular pick among DIYers and enthusiasts. That said, this spray comes with an expensive price tag. So, if you’re on a budget, this might not be an ideal pick for your projects. Apart from that, it performs incredibly well.
Pros
Highly functional
Compatible with both hot and cold molds
Non-staining and non-corrosive
Easy applications
Cons
Expensive
PVA Release Lacquer
Featuring polyvinyl alcohol, PVA release lacquer and serves as a great mold release coating. Moreover, it is highly functional since it can be used both as a release agent and can also be used for better demolding of cured resins pieces.
By spraying this release lacquer onto the surface, you can create a thin and even film on the surface of the mold. Those looking for agents that will help them unmold their resin castings effortlessly must definitely get PVA-release lacquer.
Uses Of PVA Release Lacquer
Mostly, when people use this PVA release lacquer for epoxy resin, they use it in conjunction with release wax. After greasing the silicone molds with a release wax, release lacquer is applied. Later it is topped with epoxy resin.
The PVA release lacquer also helps you to unmold your artistic creations easily and effortlessly. Moreover, release lacquer does not require polishing, thanks to its glossy surface.
Along with silicone molds, PVA-release lacquer can also be used on treated and porous surfaces. So, if you’ve got wood, plaster, or even melamine resin press plates, then feel free to use it on them too.
How To Use PVA Release Lacquer
When it comes to applying PVA release lacquer, you are free to do it any way you want. Spray gun, foam, brush, or sponge - use anything you want. As a rule of thumb, first, apply lengthwise and then crosswise. Repeat this pattern.
However, do not add any other paint in between. Also, make sure to apply the coats as thin as possible. And needless to say, coating the surface evenly is necessary. After you’re done coating the molds, keep the mold aside for at least ten minutes.
Additionally, you can remove the residue of release lacquer from the mold using a sponge and lukewarm water.
If you are a weekend warrior who loves crafting DIY jewelry or revamp kitchen countertops, then this product is perfect for you. Moreover, this PVA release agent is highly versatile and can be used in all your DIY projects. Plus, this water-based formula will not shrink. So, grab one and become a pro in DIY projects.
Standout Features:
Water-based formula
16-ounce bottle
Why Did We Like It?
Available in a 16-ounce bottle, this PVA mold release agent makes demolding an easy task. With its easy removal and release, you can rest assured that your creations and molds won’t get damaged. Also, this saves a lot of energy and time, which you can, in turn, invest in creating other art pieces.
Additionally, its hassle-free applications ensure you don’t face any issues while working. You can use a sponge, brush, roll, and even spray to use it on molds and other surfaces. Plus, it doesn’t leave any stain, thanks to its non-staining properties.
Moving on, if you love DIYs, then this is a must-have as it is highly functional and can come in handy in all of your DIY projects. Thus, the creative opportunities are endless. Moreover, with just a single coat, you can get smooth-looking, bump-free, and flawless objects.
With this water-based formula, cleanup is an easy task. Simply use water and scrub using dish soap. Overall, this PVA release agent is perfect for all your DIY projects.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This PVA release agent is one of the best that we came across on the market. However, our only gripe is that it leaves a green residue on your objects. That being said, we strongly recommend you avoid using it for transparent or crystal clear creations.
Pros
Unmolds creations excellently
Hassle-free applications
Non-staining
Versatile applications
Cons
Leaves a green residue
Alternatives Of Commercial Mold Release Agents
Epoxy mold release agents work like a charm for unmolding curated resin pieces. However, if you are on a budget, then don’t worry! We have a few alternatives that you can consider for your epoxy resin projects. So, let’s dig right in!
Our first and foremost alternative is sitting right at your dressing table. Yes, petroleum jelly! It works perfectly with molds that do not have challenging corners. Moreover, the best way to apply petroleum jelly is through hands. So, take some amount of petroleum jelly on your fingers and grease the mold properly.
However, make sure you apply a thin layer and coat the mold evenly. Also, avoid using this for intricate or small molds. That’s because its thick viscosity will tamper with your final product.
Cooking sprays were invented to prevent vegetables, rice, and other foodstuffs from sticking to the pan. But, you can use it to prevent curated resin from adhering to the mold. All you need to do is get non-stick cooking spray from the local store and use it as an epoxy mold release agent.
Moreover, they are non-toxic, and so they are safe to use. Also, after demolding resin pieces, make sure you wipe the cooking spray from the mold and resin piece.
Did you know you can use regular cooking oil as an alternative to commercial release agents? If not, then it’s time you try using it. Simply use a paper towel and grease the mold properly. And your surface is ready.
Also, mineral oils are a great alternative to commercial release agents. However, make sure you apply both oils in moderation. Alternatively, use a paper towel to wipe off excess oil from the mold.
Another inexpensive alternative to mold release agents is talcum powder. So, if you’re working on silicone molds with even surfaces, then talcum powder will work perfectly. However, it isn’t an ideal option for molds with finer details. That’s because it will not coat the molds properly. So, it’s best to avoid using it on those molds where details will be lost.
Tips And Tricks For Easy Demolding Of Resin Casting
Size And Design
First and foremost, the size and the design of your mold are important. That’s because it will determine how to unmold your cured piece. For those who use finely detailed molds, we recommend you use a release spray for effortless unmolding.
Alternatively, for those who create resin pieces using two-dimensional molds, epoxy release wax would be the best bet.
Use Demolding Wedges
If demolding resin casting seems too much of a task, use demolding wedges. They are similar to plastic wedges, and you can buy them from any local store or even shop them online. While working with a two-part mold, they’ll come in handy. So, if you frequently work with epoxy resin, we suggest you get them.
Loosen The Edges Of The Casting
Demolding resin casting would become easy if you loosen the edges of the casting first. Besides, unmolding simple resin pieces such as coasters and trays is pretty easy. Simply flip over the mold, and your resin pieces will pop out.
Blow Compressed Air
Even after making several attempts to unmold resin casting, then we’ve got another solution for you. Try blowing compressed air between the mold and resin casting. Alternatively, you can also try using a rubber mallet. Gently tap it on the mold to loosen the casting.
Mold Release Guide Frequently Asked Questions
Q1. Which Mold Release Agent Would Be Perfect For Silicone Coaster Molds?
We suggest you go for mold release spray while working with silicone coaster molds. It is pretty easy to use. Simply spray the mold thoroughly at a distance of 12 cm. However, you can also use release wax if you want to.
Q2. Can I Use Mold Release Spray Directly On Porous Surfaces?
No, you cannot use mold release agents directly onto the porous surfaces. You will have to treat the surface first and then use release spray. Or all your efforts will prove to be futile. However, you can go for a PVA release agent because it works well on both treated and porous surfaces.
Q3. Are Mold Release Agents A Necessity?
If you ask us, we’ll strongly recommend you use mold release agents while working with epoxy resin. They are great for demolding resin casting and also prolong the life of your silicone molds. Therefore, mold release agents are important for all your epoxy resin projects.
Summing It Up
Regardless of whether you are a weekend warrior or a full-time professional, epoxy release agents are a must-have in your DIY craft kit. That said, we suggest you consider your needs and get one soon.
Now, we have come to the end of our informative guide. We hope you enjoyed reading this guide as much as we enjoyed making it for you. Hopefully, you’ll be able to pick the right epoxy mold release agent for your DIY tasks.
It’s time for us to sign off! Let us know your favorite mold release agent in the comments below, and we’ll be back with more informative guides soon.
Simply put, abstract art strays far from the notion of representing real-world objects in art form. It uses colors, shapes, gestural marks and forms in a bizarre and quirky way to achieve its effects.
Sometimes, abstract art can be based on real-life objects, living beings, and landscape. However, unlike traditional art forms, abstract art distorts the concept of reality. It represents these things in a simplified and schematic way. One such example of this art form is Van Gogh's style which was termed post-impressionism.
Abstract art can also stray from reality or real life objects entirely. It can be represented by geometrical shapes, known as geometric abstraction. It might even be represented through lyrical abstraction.
In this article, we will dive into the bottomless abyss that is abstract art and explore it in great detail. So read along to find out everything you need to know about abstract art.
Abstract Art 101
Abstract Art - A History Lesson
Abstract Art In Prehistoric Times
Although the popularity of abstract art did not pick up until the 19th century, the earliest examples can be traced back to Tang Dynasty painter named Wang Mo. Unfortunately, none of his paintings have survived to this day.
However, the legacy of his unique splashed-ink painting style was carried forward by a Song Dynasty painter named Liang Kai (1140 - 1210). The "Immortal in Splashed Ink " seen below is one of his most popular paintings.
Liang Kai was not the only famous Song Dynasty painter. In fact, during the late stages of the Song Dynasty, a painter named Yu Jian created beautiful splashed ink landscapes which inspired many Japanese Zen painters. One of his most famous works, the "Mountain Market in Clearing Mist" is shown below.
Abstract art as we have come to know it today was shaped by three art movements, namely Romanticism, Impressionism, and Expressionism. In the 19th century, artists experienced freedom which never existed during the Renaissance period due to the patronage from the church. Moreover, during this time, private patronage from the public increased substantially, and this ensured that the artists could earn a livelihood from their paintings.
The "Nocturne in Black and Gold: The Falling Rocket" (1872) by James McNeill Whistler is one of the finest examples of abstract art from the 19th century. Rather than putting emphasis on the depiction of objects, this painting focused on visual sensation.
While abstract art in the 19th century revolved around Romanticism, Impressionism, and Expressionism, the art form saw a shift towards Post Impressionism during the 20th century. The art in this period was characterized by the expressive use of color coupled with free and boundless imagination.
The abstract works of Van Gogh, Cézanne, Gauguin, and Seurat dominated the art landscape of 20th century and eventually paved the way for the development of modern art. Van Gogh's most famous artwork, "The Starry Night", is one of the finest examples of abstract art to emerge in this era.
Types Of Abstract Art
Curvilinear Abstract Art
The curvilinear style is characterized by smooth flowing curved lines which are used to form abstract patterns like swirls, circles, and spirals. Sometimes these curving lines are used to represent human facial features as well. In this form of abstract art, you will not find any right angles or straight lines.
The curvilinear abstract art can be observed in Celtic Art as well as the art style predominantly found in the Gulf of Papua region in southeastern Papua New Guinea. Here is an example of a curvilinear abstract art mask from the Orokolo Village of Papua New Guinea.
The color-related or light-related abstract art can be observed in the works of Oscar Claude Monet and Joseph Mallord William Turner. This type of abstract art is characterized by a swirl of pigment in every painting which eventually makes the pigment indistinguishable.
In his lifetime, Monet produced many watercolor paintings which displayed this technique. One such example from his most famous series of paintings, "Water Lilies", is shown below.
As its name suggests, geometric abstraction is a form of abstract art which uses geometric forms and shapes like squares, triangles, rectangles, and circles. As art styles became more and more boundless in the 20th century, geometric abstraction gradually gained in popularity.
Unlike art from the Renaissance period which was underpinned by the logic of perspective in an attempt to make objects as real and lifelike as possible, geometric abstraction is quite the opposite because of its two-dimensional approach. Moreover, this art form strays far from representing real-life objects.
Theo van Doesburg's "Composition VII (the three graces)" is one of the most famous examples of geometric abstraction in the 20th century.
Gestural abstract art refers to a particular process of making art. Here, the subject of the painting is not important; rather it is the way it gets painted. While most art forms have a premeditated approach to applying paint, gestural abstract art depends on intuition.
In other words, the artist's honesty, intuition, and deep personal emotions are expressed through this art form. Jackson Pollock's Number 5 is a great example of a gestural abstract painting.
As geometric abstraction gained popularity in the 20th century, it slowly paved the way for minimalist abstract art. As its name suggests, minimalist abstract art or minimal art uses geometric shapes, mostly squares and rectangles in an overly simplified manner. Unlike geometric abstraction which is solely based on a two-dimensional approach, minimalist abstract art can also be three-dimensional in nature.
Moreover, it is not just confined to geometric shapes; it is rather based on simplicity. Ever since its inception, minimalist art has only gained in popularity, and it is one of the most popular art forms, if not the most popular, in the contemporary world.
By now, you must have realized that the world of abstract art is limitless. Therefore, our article can only provide so much information about it. However, we believe we have put together the basics of abstract art which will serve as the foundation of your knowledge on this topic. If you would like to learn more about this incredible art form, then we suggest you follow some of the links mentioned in this article.
In offices world-wide the cork is present for your pins, they help you remember that things that matter for your and whether they`re family photos or important tasks for the day ahead they`re role is indisputable. The simple cork board can be purchased online inexpensively yet their look is quite bland and uninspiring and while that functions in modern minimalist settings in creative environments they`re not everything that they can be. A beautiful gallery follows to present the product of insane creativity, diy cork board projects for your office started from scratch or from a simple plane board that have achieved the "extraordinary" status.
The difficulty level of most crafts involved is easy yet the results are highly rewardful, cast a glance bellow and surge inspiration.
A simple frame can integrate the new item in your interior design seamlessly while the chevron pattern adds dynamicity. The craft can also be considered a graphic piece of wall art.
via cuteandpaste.co.uk
2. Use a special fabric on a plane board
Choose a color pallet and a pattern that fits your interior needs, something inspiring that makes you check the new beautiful board every now and then, it can greatly increase motivation.
via masteringdiy.com
3. Burlap texture and black thumbtacks
An insanely simple craft that brings a traditional rustic vibe to a cork board. The black thumbtacks bring rhythm and a slight, elegant contrast.
If you have the opportunity to re-use an old frame, use it creatively. It can hold your new ideas and your beautiful memories at your grasp in the office for years to come.
The most delicate and high end interior designs can receive the cork board in a more elegant, sumptuous look. These can be re-built with any texture in the world thus making them ready for any setting. Above the right fabric overwritten with a geometric pattern has sculpted something really magnificent, awe-inspiring.
In a simple frame of your choosing the wine corks you`ve collected off every celebration and festive cooking session can be carefully arranged to shape an extraordinary cork board. Use color accents here and there and transform the whole craft into something truly positive. The colors used can integrate your new office toy into the setting as a complementary item or as a contrast.
The contrast through detailing can be used to your advantage. The frame makes the board a more special, particular item for your office, arrange your memories and things to do in style.
Recycling old frames is a great responsibility and in the craft above corks and the gradient pattern contained make it great justice creating a slight contrast with the bright yellow frame. A really splendid display for your to-do`s.
A really accessible method of achieving a dynamic, simple look on a bland cork board. Use tape to create the pattern needed and simply use spray paint, interesting gradient can also be obtained in these patterns.
You surely know by now what you`re next traveling destination should be. With a simple cork board and the right dimensions you can map everything down with pins, pictures and landmarks.
Exquisite look with a simple simple craft, highly rewardful.
Source Unknown
20. Double a thin cork sheet with foam board
The most inexpensive solution to nestle in epic frames with custom sizes is a simple cork sheet and one foam board; both can be cut to any size with a simple cutter.
via thistlewoodfarms.com
21. Textiles and imposing frames
The physical feed of things to do can be hidden in plane sight as wall art.
Cork cutting boards painted using a single color palette can be recognized as a graphic ensemble that your blank walls will surely appreciate as wall art; needless to say that they can still function as a bulletin board in your home.
A sufficient cork board can offer you the chance to get organized in a graphic and practical manner, pin your tasks everyday for a month, pin pictures that inspire you, pin things that you look up to.
Source Unknown
25. Inspire a state of well being
A small wall art piece crafted with corks in a narrow, tall area can be filled with the wine-inspired wall art above, the simple craft can also present your to-do tasks for today or the menu in the kitchen .
via Pinterest
26. Heart it in cork
Shape a heart with wine corks and enjoy the graphic shape they bring forward.
via countrylove.co.za
27. Frame and pattern in contrast
Elegant and powerful in appearance, the right frame emphasizes the right pattern with a slight contrast.
via newhousenewhomenewlife.stfi.re
28. Geometric modular composition
The same shape used to form a colorful layout that can be changed as you like and need. Here color emphasizes the geometricity and adds depth.
The DIY Cork Board Projects above are nothing if not creative, inspiring, they can make your home office great justice, enhancing it with a positive, joyful yet highly practical look. What do you think? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below !
Everything that is uncommon to human kind, everything that we cannot easily do fascinates us; we attempt swim, ski, fly, levitate and sky-dive; we search the incredible in everything. One of the most common dreams is the fly; we`ve encountered this dream in Sunday morning cartoon and Discovery`s jet pack documentaries; we all think we`re ready to fly but we simply don`t have the means yet and while that might be true we have found a way to build an experience on that dream, one that makes us fly in a way without endangering ourselves but on the contrary : empowering and calm us, exactly what flight ought to feel like.
Cool hanging beds that you could replicate with do it yourself projects are subject of conversation today; these can levitate in your backyard, patio, living room or bedroom to conjure an extraordinary experience truly.
An old trampoline and simple hardware accessories can shape your next DIY hanging bed in 3-4 hours only to reward you with a tool of relaxation for years to come. Numerous alternatives can be found online for this magnificent craft; one could replace the trampoline with branches, reclaimed pallet wood or old boats; the options are limitless yet in the following article you will find 17 smart hanging bed design ideas curated with great care; they`re easy to replicate, extraordinary graphic and insanely comfortable.
Cast a glance and find peace and relaxation in a simple shape floating above the ground.
DIY Hanging Bed Tutorials and Ideas Follow
An old furniture piece and simple chain embellished with rope represent key elements in the magnificent color above; simply choose the color that fits your needs and bring a comfy mattress to swing away your problems.
Imposing elegant black and white hanging bed design with sculptural iron chains of great resilience, built to withstand the challenges raised by the outdoors.
An ethereal ambiance can be obtained with any wood, sufficient light, stark white and world`s most plush and comfortable textures. The serenity above can bring only calm.
via weloveboho.com
To salvage a boat and use it to shape a hanging bed might be a dream anchored in one`s passion to sail. The craft is extraordinary graphic and practical regardless; if you encounter the opportunity, embrace it.
via Jessica Helgerson Interior Design
The process is extraordinarily simple and can last a lifetime, enjoy the process, you`re shaping memories !
The rustic here brings small accents that anchor a contemporary modern interior beautiful in reality. The neutral tones used paired with elegant sculpted details bring a touch of sophistication.
A full size bed on the porch might be the best piece of furniture that you could nestle in your household. Summer evenings and nights spent in there can be memorable.
by Vintage Porch Swings LLC
A suspended bed on the porch of your forest cabin might be the ultimate relaxation tool.
Hanging beds bring a great array of options in terms of design, options that respect simple principles that can easily be reinterpreted to one`s needs. Use the hanging bed to save space and emphasize the feeling of space in a room without sacrificing on color, design and experience.
To dream of flying while slowly flying in mid air in your circular suspended round bed might be an experience for your bucket list.
Hanging bunk beds are definitely an option for the enthusiast crafter, a practical and inexpensive solution for small spaces.
via Visbeen Associates, Inc
Wooden pallets tailored to match your mattress along a rope, a pillow and the textile of choice can aid you create the floating reading nook that you actually need outdoors.
If the ocean`s blue is not sufficient blue textiles and a cold drink can build up on that peaceful atmosphere thus helping you swing your problems away.
Source Unknown
Transformed from an old baby crib the swing bed above simply stuns one with the immense possibilities.
Earthy tones have been used to shape a sober elegant atmosphere filled with naturalness; the bed`s cable have been chosen wisely to create the illusion of suspension.
Nothing simpler and nothing greater, a cozy experience to enjoy your attic space fully.
Source Unknown
In this room with small beds for children naturalness defines a rustic setting built by wooden walls, plaid flooring and ropes that suspend the beds.
Source Unknown
How do you see these diy hanging bed tutorials and ideas? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below !
That’s because of the versatility it offers. Watercolor painting flows on the surface of the paper, and you can manipulate any want according to your artistic taste.
You can choose to layer up colors and create a hyper-realistic painting, or you can make broad, loose strokes and create a minimalist one. Watercolor is all about controlled complexity.
But the reason watercolor is so popular is that it is an excellent medium for beginners and professionals alike. Beginners love the variety of options offered by watercolor painting, especially the fact that they can create a simple painting very easily and then gradually move up to more complicated ones as they grow more confident.
Professionals love the fluidity of the paint and how they can create wavy, abstract pieces where all the colors and pigments blend together in a marvelous mixture.
Here are a few handy tips for everyone to make your life just a little easier.
When it comes to buying colors, you would definitely need a high-quality coloring set. Cheaper brands have colors which don’t mix well and might get really watery when you put in the water. So make sure you go with a reputed brand for your first set of colors.
Watercolor tubes offer more intensity in color; however, color cakes are much more portable, and you can buy a whole set of color cakes all at once.
Next, you have to get brushes. There is a huge variety of brushes available, but you don’t need to worry about all of them. Natural brushes have better quality fibers but are really expensive. For a beginner, high-quality synthetic brushes will do just fine.
You only need a pair of large flat brushes for washing and layering and a few round brushes of different sizes for adding details. For your round brushes, we would suggest getting a No. 12, a No. 10 and a No. 6 round. A couple of flat 1-inch brushes would do just fine for layering.
You can’t just start water-coloring on any type of paper. The paper has to be rough, and the paper has to be thick. Cold press papers are the most popular, and they are rough yet smooth enough to let the colors flow freely. Rough paper is even better and is excellent for absorbing color quickly. However, they are more expensive than cold press papers.
A common metric associated with Watercolor paper is the weight. The heavier the weight is, the thicker the paper will be. Make sure you get papers with the rating 140 lb or above. If you get a thin paper, it will not hold up to the huge amounts of water you’ll need to use on the paper. This will cause buckling and cause the paper to warp in the middle creating small puddles of color. 300 lb is the heaviest and the easiest to work with.
Stretching refers to the process of safeguarding your watercolor papers from warping. It ensures the paper stays taught and even while you paint on it and also improves the absorbency of the paper.
If you get a very heavy watercolor paper, you won’t need to stretch it. You can also buy papers in blocks instead of pads or sheets. These watercolor blocks are pre-stretched, and you don’t need to worry about them warping.
Lighter papers do need to be stretched though. Just dip the papers in a bath of water and let the paper get wet as evenly as possible. After that, just stretch it out and stick it on a hardboard like plywood. Use tape at the edges of the paper to adhere it to the plyboard or your material of choice. Paint with the paper still attached to the board.
Make Light Pencil Sketches or Make an Underpainting
Plenty of beginning artists like to use a graphite pencil to sketch out the composition and shapes of the painting before they start with the color. When you do this, the graphite will show through in the final painting.
While you may not have a problem with this, some people prefer to have the graphite not shown at all. So instead of graphite, you can make an underpainting of faint color like blue or purple and then put on additional layers on top as you progress with your painting.
For your painting purposes, we would suggest HB pencils. Softer pencils like 2B or 4B can produce very dark lines, whereas harder ones like 2H and 4H might create grooves on the top of your paper and it’ll be hard to apply paint over that later on.
Limit Your Color Choices
It might be tempting to use all the colors on your palette to make as colorful a picture as possible. However, when painting a picture, one must always keep in mind color theory and all its implications. Your goal is to make a picture which is aesthetically soothing and full of harmony.
When choosing your colors wisely, they should fulfill one of these three purposes - the colors complement each other or the colors are analogous to each other, or they simplify the colors that are instantly visible to the naked eye. Watercolor is meant to be soothing, not jarring.
Be Mindful When Mixing Paint
When it comes to mixing paint, beginners tend to only use a small amount of the two colors while mixing. Hence when they are making broad strokes on their brush, they run out of the mixed color. As a result, they have to go back and remix the same two colors. This becomes frustrating after a while. If you mix large amounts of paint initially, you won’t have this problem.
You can even become overzealous and mix too many colors at the same time. This will only result in a brown, muddy gloop. Remember you can always add more layers on top of the paint once it has dried. This is known as ‘wet-on-dry’ where you put on a wet layer over an already dried layer, or you can even add another color to an already wet surface by simply touching your brush to the wet spot. This is known as ‘wet-on-wet.’ It is a fairly advanced technique and requires quite a bit of practice.
Paint always looks lighter once it has dried. Thus keep another piece of paper near you, so you can test your colors out on that surface before you apply them to the painting.
Watercolor painting is always about painting from light to dark shades of colors, where the greatest white is the color of the paper itself. Thus it’s best to plan out which areas should remain blank beforehand.
Once you know which spaces to keep white, you can carefully avoid it while painting, or you can use masking fluid. Masking fluid is generally latex-based and can protect areas on your sheet from receiving watercolor applications. Since preserving the white on the paper can be of such vital importance, masking fluid can be one of the most important tools in your watercolor arsenal.
Masking fluid can easily be applied by a brush and removed by rubbing with your fingers when it has dried out. Use an old brush for applying masking fluid though, as it has an unfortunate tendency of ruining brushes.
Let The Light Bring Out The Different Layers
It’s always advised to paint lighter layers at the bottom, and then they can be made more and more intense by applying multiple washes of paint over the lighter layers once they have dried out. Using this technique allows light to pass through all the layers and create a glazing effect. When light passes through your colors, the colors underneath remain visible even through the top-most coats of paint. This transmission of light and reflection of the paper makes for very complex and detailed color schemes.
Remember to use a light touch for every one of your layers. You should also aim to strike an optimal balance between transparency and opacity. For more intensity and less transparency, use less water on all your layers. For maximum transparency, use a lot of water. The kind of painting you want depends totally on you and what you like best.
Use the Full Spectrum of Darks and Lights
The shade of a color, as in how dark or light it is is exceptionally malleable in watercolor paintings and is one of the prime reasons why watercolors are so popular. The shade of color totally determines how we measure form and texture in two-dimensional work. Using different shades creates an impression of depth and also increases contrast in the paintings.
A painter should always aspire to include the complete spectrum of shades in a painting. This means that you should use darker colors just as much as lighter colors. It would be even better if you could use multiple shades of the same color itself.
Plenty of watercolor artists are scared of including darker colors as they might bleed into the rest of the painting or they might overbear all the other colors in the painting. However, to create a picture with depth, it’s always preferable to err on the side of darker shades. Ensure that your subject or scene always has both the lightest and the darkest shades of colors.
This is probably the most critical piece of advice for any watercolor artist. Watercolors by their very nature will have colors that flow and make interesting shapes. Beginners might try to fight against this natural flow, but instead of fighting, you should learn to embrace it.
This feature of watercolor painting lets you paint your subject without drawing every single line on the subject's body. You can use a few lines and shapes to simply imply the subject. After all, a painting isn’t an exact reproduction of reality but is used to convey a feeling. Let the colors flow and do their own thing. Watercolors work best when it has more fluidity in the painting and less of total control.
Don’t worry if you make mistakes. There is plenty you can do to erase a mistake. In the very least, you can try to blot off the paint with a damp tissue or a sponge. If it’s not working, you can add some water and then try to blot off a larger surrounding area along with the spot where you made your mistake.
If that doesn’t work, you can change the whole painting dramatically by applying a new, darker layer of paint on top covering your mistake. If all else fails, simply wash it over a running tap.
Know When To Stop Painting
While the hardest thing to do is begin your painting, the second hardest thing definitely has to be knowing when to stop. We often get so caught in trying to create the perfect painting, that the creative juices just won’t stop flowing. It’s so fun that you don’t want to stop. But if you keep on working, the end result will look very different from what you planned originally, and it might seem overworked and full of excessive detail.
Like we have already said before, a painting has to imply rather than show. Everything doesn’t always have to be totally spelled out. A good way to know when to stop is this - if you catch yourself thinking, “what more can I do with this painting,” then it’s probably time to call it a night. At that point, any details you add on will not help enhance the essence of your painting, and you should put down the brush.
Watercolor painting is something that requires practice. Even if you have an innate artistic talent, you still need a lot of practice to figure out the nitty-gritty of watercolor painting. Because with practice, comes confidence, and with confidence, comes greatness.
Well, that’s it from us today! Thanks for reading and all the best on your journey.
The best hot tubs scream luxury, right? If you own (or are planning to own) one, you must be wondering how much chlorine is appropriate.
Well, you’re not the only one. It turns out, many owners of hot tubs are unaware of how much chlorine is required. We all associate swimming pools and hot tubs with chlorine, but have you ever wondered how much of it is safe?
In this guide, we will tell you everything you need to know about hot tubs and chlorine. As you might already know, chlorine is a chemical disinfectant. So indeed, you can’t overuse it, as it could affect your skin, hair, eyes, and is potentially harmful.
When used correctly, chlorine can be one of the most effective (and safe) solutions for water bodies. So, are you curious to find out more about this powerful waterborne pathogen killer?
Without further ado, let’s get straight to the deets!
How Much Chlorine Is Appropriate For A Hot Tub?
Have you ever thought about what a hot tub represents? Isn’t it essentially just a giant bowl of warm water, dead skin flakes, soap, lotion, dirt, hair products, and you? We wouldn’t be surprised if you never wanted to use your hot tub again!
Yes, essentially, the hot tub is a warm soup of all your grooming products and dead skin. That is why you need to use disinfectants like chlorine to clean and sanitize it. Let’s talk about this in detail.
Why Do You Need Chlorine For Your Hot Tub?
A hot tub can quickly become a cesspool of germs, bacteria, and other waterborne pathogens. This can be especially dangerous if more than one person uses the hot tub. Any water body that you use on a regular or even semi-regular basis needs to be kept clean at all times, hot tub maintenance is realized with hot tub chemicals, designed specifically for this use case.
Chlorine is a chemical that is made of hydrogen, sodium hydroxide, and ordinary table salt. It is used in swimming pools, jacuzzis, hot tubs, and other water bodies to sanitize and keep it bacteria and germ-free.
One of the most important things to keep in mind when using chlorine is to use the correct quantity and not mix it with other chemicals. When this is taken care of, chlorine can be one of the most effective and safe disinfectants.
So, how much chlorine do you need to put in your hot tub at home?
Daily Use Hot Tub
If you use the hot tub on a daily basis, you need to maintain chlorine levels of 3-5mg/l. That being said, this number could vary depending on certain factors, like your bathing habits, the frequency with which you use the hot tub, and how many others use it regularly.
How Often Do You Add Chlorine To A Hot Tub?
Again, this depends on several factors. However, on average, you should add chlorine to the hot tub about once a week at least. You may need to add it more frequently depending on usage and your bathing habits.
Chlorine that you add to the water in a hot tub is typically known as free chlorine. But, when the same chlorine interacts with the bacteria, germs, oils, and other grooming products in the tub, it is called combined chlorine.
To clean this ‘dirty’ or ‘used’ water, you need to engage in a process known as ‘shocking the water.’ This is done by adding a slightly higher concentration of chlorine to the hot tub water.
To be safe, you can add small amounts of chlorine to the water in between shock treatments. This keeps the water safe, clean, and healthy.
How Often Should You Shock The Hot Tub?
Now that you know what it means to ‘shock’ the hot tub, you might be wondering how often this is required. Here are a few instances when the tub needs to be shocked:
If it has been unused for a while
If it has been heavily used recently
If the water has an odor
If the water looks cloudy
Ideally, we recommended shocking the hot tub about once a week if it is used moderately.
What Should You Do If You Add Too Much Chlorine?
To err is human! Maybe you added just a little too much chlorine to the hot tub, and now you’re wondering how to fix it. Well, it’s relatively simple; here is what you need to do:
Use A Chlorine Neutralizer
If you need to use the hot tub right away, consider adding a chlorine neutralizer. As the name suggests, it will neutralize the chlorine level in the hot tub, allowing you (or anyone else) to use it without worrying about any side effects.
Keep in mind that too much chlorine can be potentially harmful to the skin, eyes, and hair. Moreover, it is hazardous if ingested.
Add More Spa Water
This one sounds obvious, but it works. If you think you’ve added too much chlorine in the hot tub, add more spa water to neutralize it. You can drain some water from the hot tub first, adding more water once at least half the original quantity is drained.
Let It Reduce Naturally
Check the chlorine levels in the hot tub first. If you observe that the levels are higher than 3 ppm, but you don’t plan on using the hot tub anytime soon, do nothing. The chlorine levels will stabilize naturally within a few days.
Of course, if you plan on using the hot tub before that, it is best to opt for any of the other methods mentioned above.
How Should You Maintain A Hot Tub?
Contrary to popular belief, it doesn’t take much to maintain a hot tub. Of course, you need to be consistent with whatever cleaning schedule you use.
We recommended testing (and adjusting) the spa water balance at least 2 times (and a maximum of 4 times) a week. This is especially important if you regularly use the hot tub. Since bacteria and other contaminants thrive in moist, warm environments, the hot tub provides them with an ideal environment to thrive.
It is also essential to clean the spa filter every 1 to 2 months. At the end of 2 years, replace the spa filter with a new one.
Even if you use chlorine regularly to clean and maintain the hot tub, you need to drain the water completely every once in a while. Doing this at least once in 3 months is good enough. If you are a heavy user, you will need to crank up the cleaning and refilling schedule to once a month.
FAQs
How Much Chlorine Do You Need To Shock A 500 Gallon Hot Tub?
For every 500 gallons of water, you need to add 4 tablespoons (or 2 ounces) of chlorine. However, we advise waiting for the chlorine levels to come down to 3 to 5 ppm before using the hot tub.
Can You Use Bleach Instead Of Chlorine?
It is best to avoid using bleach instead of chlorine or bromine for the hot tub. However, you may use diluted bleach once in a while to shock the hot tub or clean the empty shell of the tub. If you use bleach, make sure to clean it thoroughly before using the hot tub again.
How Do You Chlorinate A Hot Tub?
Use about 2 tablespoons of chlorine (every two days) to clean and maintain the hot tub water. Ensure that the chlorine levels stay between 1.5 to 3 ppm. If the levels are higher, wait for it to go down before using the hot tub. The high levels of chlorine are prone to irritating skin, hair, and eyes.
If you use bromine instead of chlorine in the hot tub, ensure the test strips read between 3 to 5 ppm.
How Long Should You Wait Before Using The Hot Tub?
This depends on what kind of cleaner you use. If you use a non-chlorine shock, you can wait about 10 minutes before using the hot tub. However, if you use chlorine or bromine to shock the hot tub, you need to wait at least 24 hours.
It is recommended that you test the chlorine levels before using the hot tub, just to be safe. Ensure that it has stabilized to 3-5 ppm before using the hot tub again.
Conclusion
It doesn’t take too much effort to maintain a hot tub. With a consistent cleaning schedule, you can enjoy the perks of having a hot tub in your home without much hassle.
When it comes to using chlorine, you will need to consider your usage (and size) of the hot tub. Even if you over-chlorinate it, don’t worry. The tips we mentioned above will help you fix this issue effortlessly.
Are you considering getting a hot tub for your home? Well, now you know all about chlorinating it safely.
The Tenergy Non-Rechargeable Lithium Batteries are our top pick from this list of best CR123A batteries because of their high capacity and superior performance in any environment. However, they aren't rechargeable and must be replaced after a while.
The wireless Arlo security cameras can be an excellent choice to amp up home security and ensure your family's safety. But you need the best CR123A batteries for these cameras.
While a new Arlo camera comes with batteries, you'll need to purchase replacement batteries if you want the camera to run for a long time. So, it's essential for you to know about the top replacement batteries for your Arlo camera.
Tenergy's lithium batteries are engineered and produced to...
This Tenergy non-rechargeable CR123A lithium battery is available in a pack of 16, each having a power of 1600 mAH for high-performance delivery. The batteries are designed to offer optimum performance in continuous low-drain and high-pulse power applications for high-tech smart devices, including your Arlo wire-free camera.
Furthermore, these Tenergy lithium batteries can offer power availability even under extreme weather conditions during the scorching summer and freezing winter months, making them perfect for outdoor usage. In fact, they can easily operate at temperatures ranging between -4℉ to 40℉.
These C123A batteries have a low self-discharge rate and come with a long shelf life of ten years. Additionally, they are UL-certified and have built-in PTC protections against short circuits, overheating, and sudden power surges. Not just security systems, you can also use these batteries for your flashlights, cameras, and personal care devices.
These Enegitech lithium batteries have a high capacity of 1600 mAh and easily adapt to advanced circuit boards to provide stable and strong energy. They last three to five times longer than any standard non-rechargeable alkaline batteries.
Moreover, they are UL-certified and come with PTC protections, making them resistant to pressure, temperature, and power surges. Thus, these batteries can protect your devices from overheating and short circuits while offering better performance than ordinary batteries.
These CR123A non-rechargeable batteries also have a super-low self-discharge rate of less than 1% a year, so they have a shelf life of more than ten years. Most importantly, these lithium batteries work well with a wide range of appliances, including the Arlo wire-free cameras, camcorders, smoke detectors, night vision goggles, and light meters, to name a few.
Powerful Rechargeable Batteries: These 800mAh 3.7V 123A...
1.5-Hours Fast Charge Technology - FARSAIL cr123A Batteries...
These Farsail rechargeable lithium-ion batteries are reliable and long-lasting, with built-in fault and heat protection mechanisms. They are specially designed for Arlo cameras and deliver excellent performance even under extreme temperatures.
Furthermore, the charger's integrated fail-safe circuit security prevents the batteries from overheating and overcharging. It continuously detects overcharging, short circuits, over-current, reverse current, and over-voltage.
These rechargeable batteries work quite well with long-drain devices since you can easily recharge in about 1.5 hours. The battery charger has a compact design and can charge four Farsail batteries at a time.
You also get a USB charging cable with the battery charger, so you can charge these batteries wherever and whenever you want. The charger comes with an LCD display to make it easier for you to track the charging status of the batteries.
Upgraded Compatible For Arlo Security Cameras - Second...
Unique Design Camera Batteries and Charger- Special and...
These smart rechargeable CR123A batteries from EBL are designed to work perfectly with Arlo security cameras. The charger has a highly professional design for charging four cells or batteries in one pack, making recharging these batteries much more convenient.
Each battery cell has a capacity of 750 mAh, while the whole battery comes with a high capacity of up to 3000 mAh. One pack of these long-lasting rechargeable batteries can last as long as six months without charging. Moreover, the supercell lattice technology of these camera batteries makes it easier to contain high power and offer constant voltage even under heavy load discharge.
You can also recharge the batteries up to 3000 times when they are partially or fully drained. However, you can't charge batteries from other brands with this charger because it may lead to fire hazards or charger failures.
These rechargeable batteries come with optimization techniques for maximum energy utilization to boost performance and last 21.8% longer than most other CR123A batteries. The batteries also have strengthened loops to reduce self-discharge.
Also, the charger has a charging time of around two hours and features a LED indicator light, so you can easily monitor the charging process. The built-in mischarging-safety technology allows it to detect sudden current surges and automatically cut off power to avoid overheating and electrical problems.
Furthermore, the batteries and the charger come with over-charge, over-current, over-voltage, and short circuit protections, alongside FCC, ROHS, CE, and UL certifications to ensure safety. The batteries also have a high capacity of 800 mAh, making them a good investment.
The Jesspow rechargeable lithium-ion batteries are yet another high-quality CR123A battery designed for Arlo wire-free cameras and come with integrated heat and fault protection technologies. They offer reliable and stable performance in different environments, making them excellent for outdoor fixtures.
The power of one piece of this 3.7V, 750 mAh rechargeable battery is equivalent to 300 pieces of 3V 1500 mAh non-rechargeable variants. Thanks to their high capacity, these are one of the best CR123A batteries for alarm systems, cameras, medical equipment, video game consoles, calculators, home appliances, and other battery-powered smart devices.
The charger's fail-safe circuitry also prevents overheating and over-charging, protecting the batteries and the charger from short circuits and sudden power surges. The charger is made of durable and premium-quality materials and has a built-in USB cable.
It can charge eight batteries at a time, making it easier for you to use them whenever you want. Although these rechargeable batteries and the charge set can be costly, they can be a much better investment than constantly purchasing non-rechargeable batteries in the long run.
The Dulex CR123A rechargeable batteries come with a smart charger featuring a 1.5-hour fast charging technology and a LED indicator light. When the batteries are recharging, you can see the red light, but once fully charged, the light automatically turns green. You can charge four batteries simultaneously and monitor each of their charges individually.
Furthermore, the versatile charging option allows micro input, so you can charge the batteries whenever and wherever you want. The 800 mAh high capacity allows the batteries to offer a long run time for your Arlo security camera and last 30% longer than ordinary batteries. Their superior performance in extreme weather conditions also ensures that they can be used for your Arlo camera for a long time.
On top of this, these batteries are compatible with any electronic home appliances, starting from video game consoles to calculators. They are also backed by a one-year warranty, so the manufacturer will replace them or offer a full refund if you're not satisfied.
These Tomshele 800 mAh 3.7V rechargeable batteries come with an 8-slot charger allowing you to charge eight batteries together. You don't have to worry about your batteries running out of charging slots anymore. The charger has an LED indicator to help you monitor the charging process of the individual batteries.
Each battery goes through UL, CE, FCC, and RoHS testing to ensure its safety. Their power loop technology and fail-safe circuitry protect them against overheating and over-charging. Moreover, the security technology continuously detects and prevents short circuits, power surges, and reverse current flow.
Since these batteries are specially designed for Arlo wire-free cameras, they are perfect for outdoor usage and offer superior performance in any environment. They offer excellent run time, so you don't need to worry about changing old batteries or buying new batteries anytime soon.
[EFFICIENT AND DURABLE] - ours CR123A lithium battery made...
The Jessy rechargeable lithium-ion batteries are compatible with Arlo security cameras and are much more eco-friendly because they prevent the waste of non-rechargeable alkaline or lithium batteries. These one-time replacement batteries can also help you save a lot on frequent battery purchases.
Not to mention, one Jessy 750 mAh rechargeable battery generates a power equivalent to 300 pieces of 1500 mAh non-rechargeable batteries. Even though they are designed specifically for Arlo cameras, these batteries also work well with many home appliances, such as flashlights, calculators, and video game consoles. Plus, if you're looking for a CR123A battery for smoke detectors, this can be a great choice.
On the downside, unlike other rechargeable CR123A batteries, these Jessy batteries do not include a charger in the box, so you have to buy the charger separately.
These Dulex 123A rechargeable lithium batteries are designed to last 30% longer than other batteries and offer reliable performance in harsh temperatures ranging between -4℉ to 45℉. The fast charging technology of the charger also allows you to get the batteries fully recharged within two hours once they drain out of power.
Additionally, the charger can charge eight batteries together, so you always have batteries whenever you need them without purchasing new ones frequently. The charger's safety certifications also protect it and the batteries from overheating, over-current, reverse flow, short circuits, and overcharging.
The batteries are also suitable for multiple applications and offer a long run time without any unexpected interruption. However, remember to fully charge the batteries before their first-time use; otherwise, they might run out of power.
The Rapthor rechargeable lithium batteries have a high capacity of 750 mAh, and you can recharge them up to 550 times when they are running on low power. You can recharge the batteries when they are fully or partially discharged and save a lot on buying replacement batteries from time to time.
Moreover, the fast charging time of two hours makes these batteries perfect for offering long-lasting power to frequently use equipment, such as Arlo cameras, smoke detectors, and flashlights. These premium batteries also come with over-charge, over-current, and over-discharge protections.
But on the downside, you won't get the Rapthor battery charger with the pack and have to buy it separately to recharge the batteries.
CR123A Batteries For Arlo Cameras Buying Guide
1. Rechargeable Vs Non-Rechargeable
You can choose rechargeable or non-rechargeable batteries based on your requirements and available budget. Non-rechargeable batteries are cheaper, but since you have to change them frequently for often-used equipment, they might not be the best investment in the long run. Under such circumstances, non-rechargeable batteries are the better option because they initially cost more, but it's a one-time investment because you can recharge them.
2. Run Time
Always consider the run time of the CR123A batteries before purchasing them. The longer the run time, the more convenient it is to use them for Arlo cameras. You don't need to worry about recharging or replacing the batteries frequently if they have a long run time and high capacity.
3. Safety And Protection
You don't want your newly bought batteries or battery chargers to get damaged because of over-current, short circuits, overcharging, or overheating. Hence, always check the safety certifications and protection mechanisms of the CR123A batteries before purchasing them.
CR123A Batteries For Arlo Cameras Verdict
If you want to view a constant stream of all the recorded security footage on the Arlo camera, you need to ensure that the camera runs round-the-clock. That's why you need powerful CR123A batteries, which can deliver stable performance.
If you're feeling a bit reluctant about choosing your best pick, we suggest you try out the Tenergy Premium Non-Rechargeable Lithium Batteries because they can deliver superb performance in any weather condition. These batteries have a high capacity of 1600 mAh and are available in a pack of 16 that'll last for a long time. Also, they are much cheaper than any rechargeable CR123A variants.
You can also go through other products on our list before making any final purchase decision. Take some time, dig around a bit, and find your top pick.
If you thought that cardboard can be used just to make boxes and pack your things when you are moving you are totally wrong. There are some pretty Clever DIY Ways To Use Cardboard In Your Home Decor that won't cost you much money and still will look very modern. More and more home owners decide to use cardboard to make some interesting and unique crafts that are both aesthetically pleasant to the eye and functional.
It doesn't matter whether you are looking just for decorative items or some that will have a functional purpose, you are going to find them both. We have DIY projects that will meet many different tastes, so scroll down and see what matches yours!
You are going to fall in love with these shelves with unique shape that can't be found in the stores, so you may want to skip retail options this time and make some of these yourself. I totally love the sheep shelf, and the triangle one doesn't look bad either!
This bathroom organizer will cost you a lot of money if you go to the store to buy it. It's time to do some saving, and make a matching one by using cardboard. No one would be able to tell the difference, believe me!
There are some big furniture pieces that can be made out of cardboard, so if you are feeling like going big, here are two awesome ideas. You can choose between this lovely side table or the great commode.
With Christmas being on our doors we are more and more engaged in decorating our homes in the jolly spirit. Well, cardboard is here to inspire you to make some stunning decorations that will make your home more beautiful for the holidays.
Which is the DIY project that caught your eyes the most and how did you like these clever ways to use cardboard in your home decor ?
We would love to hear from you in the comment section below !
Tired of your kids and pets ruining your couch?
Trust us; this problem is more common than you think. Leather couches, be it real or faux leather, are very prone to damage. Any sharp object or minor movements can easily lead to cuts and scratches on the couch. And handling is not as tough as you might think.
If you see cuts and holes developing on a leather couch, there are a number of things that you can do. Using a patch or tape is the most common solution. However, we suggest that you give leather tapes a try as well. Check out our article on top grade leather glues that are the finest leather patching tools found on the internet.
Before we get into more of these solutions, we will take you through the different types of damage that your leather couch might encounter. And in the second half of the guide, we will tell you about all the best possible solutions that you can implement to repair leather couches.
After discussing in our previous article if acrylic paint can be used on metal, today we are going to change course towards the comfiest place in the house: the couch. The place where we Netflix and chill might need refurbishment every now and then and hence let's discuss how to repair a leather couch that might need a quick revamp.
So, without further ado, let’s dive right into how to repair leather couches!
Common Types Of Leather Couch Tears
Leather couches and other leather furniture often experience different types of tears and damage, and all have a distinct repair process. A damaged leather couch will require solutions depending on what the problem is.
In this section, we will take you through the most common types of tears that might appear on your leather sofa or couch.
1. Minor Scratches/ Tears On Leather Couches
With everyday use, it is common for a leather sofa to develop minor scratches and tears. The small tears may appear in various shapes and sizes. These are primarily surface-level damages that will not require too much work to fix.
2. Cuts In Leather Furniture
Cuts on leather upholstery occur very commonly and might happen because of a range of reasons. Mostly, these cuts appear as clean incisions and have a depth of an inch or so. They might happen because of sharp objects or might even appear when you try to move a leather couch.
3. Rough Patches
When you use a leather couch for a long time, you will most likely notice worn-out edges or rough patches on it. However, when you find these worn-out edges, don’t think that you need to immediately replace the couch. There are methods that you can implement to fix the issue.
4. Holes And Punctures
For people who have pets in the house, this is a very common problem. Cats and dogs have a particular affinity for jumping on the couches, and their nails often create punctures on the surface of the couch.
Over the years, the tiny punctures tend to turn into big holes. These are mostly circular in shape and should be attended to on time. Otherwise, they will just keep increasing in size.
How To Repair Leather Couch
Now that you know about some of the most common types of tears that your leather couch might encounter, let's quickly take a look at how to fix them. There are quite a few methods that one can implement. However, today, we will take you through the most efficient and time-saving solutions that you can put to use.
1. Using Tape To Fix Leather Sofa
Would you like to find a quick solution to the tear that has appeared on your faux leather sofa? A leather tape works wonders on cuts, tears, punctures, and scratches. Be it real leather or a faux valiant, leather tapes are a fantastic way to fix a tear in no time.
But before you get started with the process, get your hands on the right tools. You won’t need too many things - a measuring tape, a clean cloth, and rubbing alcohol is all that’s required. Start by measuring the area that needs to be repaired with the tape and keep a note of the measurement.
Once you are done doing that, proceed to clean the area with rubbing alcohol using a piece of soft microfiber cloth. We strongly recommend that you use this fabric to ensure that no debris or lint is left behind after you are done cleaning the area.
Before you apply the leather tape, remain cautious and check if there is any lint or fiber left on the surface. If there’s any, the chances are that the tape won’t stick well.
After you are done cleaning, leave it to dry for a while, while you cut out the tape with the right measurements. Pro tip: Round the corners of the tape to prevent it from coming off or poking you after application.
Once the area is dry, go ahead and apply the leather tape to the damaged area. Smoothen it out till the tape adhesive sticks well to the surface of the leather couch.
2. Using Leather Glue
Leather glue mostly comes as a part of the leather repair kit that you can use to fix tears and scratches on leather couches. Adhesives are super strong and are a great tool that you can put to use when fixing tears on a leather couch.
For the leather adhesive to function, you will first need to find a patch of the same color as that of the couch. Once you find a suitable patch, you will need to put it under the cut and then apply pressure.
While you are at it, take care to not get any adhesive on yourself, as removing it will become pretty challenging. To prevent such problems, we recommend you wear plastic hand gloves or use wax paper.
Once you are done applying the glue to one side of the cut, proceed to apply it on the other side as well. And while you are at it, push the fabric as close to the other end of the cut. To get the best results, we recommend that you make sure there are no creases or wrinkles left on the patch or on your leather couch.
3. Make The Most Of Leather Fillers
Before you can proceed with using leather fillers, it is important that you first clean the surface of the couch properly. For that, combine warm water and white vinegar together into a concoction and clean the leather with it.
You can consider using a leather filler after using leather adhesive on a cut or a scratch that has developed on your couch. Once you have applied the adhesive very close to the cut and given it the proper time to dry up, apply the leather filler in thin layers.
There’s no need to be adept with the technical know-how; just follow some steps. Get a suitable applicator and put the leather filler meticulously on the scratch or cut. And make sure that your leather paint kit matches the exact color of your couch. Otherwise, the filler would stick out like a sore thumb. Once the adhesive and filler dry up, it is time for you to apply the paint.
In order to achieve the perfect look, we suggest that you not use a brush; instead, use a sponge to paint the area. Implementing this method will surely help you in repairing your couch.
How To Repair Leather Couch Final Words
With that, we have now reached the end of this guide!
We hope you had a great time reading, and now you are better equipped to repair a leather couch. You may now ask your friends to visit and spend a great evening watching TV on your recently repaired couch.
It is always a great idea to try to restore an existing couch before deciding to purchase a new one. Even if the task seems daunting in the beginning, with the right tools and a grasp of the technical know-how of repairing leather surfaces, you will be able to get the work done in no time.
Be it cracks, cuts, or scrapes, we have told you how to protect your leather couch in all situations. That said, if you liked reading this guide, do not forget to keep a watch on this space.
Until next time, fare thee well!
Colored pencils are one of the craft supplies that we have all used and fallen in love with. But do you know what goes into making those beautiful colored pencils?
Why is it that the price and quality of colored pencils vary significantly across different brands? If you take a closer look, you will know that they are not as simple as they look. All manufacturers neither employ the same process nor use the same ingredients.
We have broken down all the information in the form of three basic questions that you may have. Read on to find the answers to these questions and know what colored pencils are made of.
What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!?
What Are The Ingredients?
If you think a colored pencil needs only lead and wood, think again. You may be surprised to know that the process of making colored pencils is quite intricate and requires four ingredients – wood, binders, pigments, and extenders. Let’s take a closer look at each of these ingredients.
Wood – Wood used to be an integral component of colored pencils until a few years ago. With the advent of lacquered or woodless pencils, more companies are letting go of this ingredient. Traditionally, the wooden barrel was vital for holding the lead core of the pencil.
Some artist-grade colored pencils use premium wood for casings, like aromatic cedar.
Binders – If you are a professional artist or expert, you know binders play a crucial role in a lot of art and craft supplies like pastels, crayons, and colored pencils. A binder is used to hold the pigment together, facilitating an even pigment distribution throughout the pencil’s core.
Binders are also called resins and act as a glue for the pigment. There are various types of binders including paraffin wax, gum arabic, and other oily compounds. The type and amount of binder used in a colored pencil significantly affect the final result you get on paper.
Pigments – Pigment is the most crucial indicator of the quality of a colored pencil. Artists always try to get supplies that have high pigment concentration or purity, as it corresponds to a better lightfastness rating and more vibrant colors. As such, top-notch brands offer products with high pigment concentration at premium prices.
The types of pigments used in a colored pencil also define how bright or dull the outcome will be on paper. Most of the reputed brands include a color chart with their products, which shows the lightfastness rating as well as the number and type of pigments used in each colored pencil.
If only one pigment type is used in a particular pencil, it is “pure pigment.” If more than one pigment type is used, the result will be relatively duller. If your artwork will be displayed in an exhibition and not just stored in your studio, you should be concerned with the lightfastness rating of the colored pencils you use.
As a general rule of thumb, artists should go for colored pencils with a minimum lightfastness rating of III or II, whereas students and hobbyists may opt for lightfastness rating of IV and V too (ASTM ratings).
Extenders – Extenders complement binders by ensuring that the colored pencil lead is sturdy. The amount of extenders used in the production process determines whether the lead feels buttery and soft or rigid.
Some companies increase the proportion of extenders used to cut down production costs. These colored pencils have reduced amounts of pigments and binders and hence, are not artist-grade.
What Are The Types Of Colored Pencils?
Now that we have addressed the ingredients needed to make a colored pencil, it is time to take about the different types of colored pencils available in the market. Colored pencils can be broadly classified into two types – oil-based and wax-based pencils. Let’s take a look at each of these types:
Oil-based leads – Oil-based color pencils are not very common. There are only a few brands that sell colored pencils having oil-based leads, like LYRA Polycolor and Faber-Castell Polychromos. Oil-based lead is known for providing more vivid colors with a more elegant and smoother overall finish.
Relative to traditional wax-based leads, oil-based leads result in a brighter finish. A minor drawback of oil-based pencils is that you may need various solvents like turpentine or odorless mineral spirit to dissolve it. Common solvents like xylene or baby oil do not dissolve oil-based pencils and may ruin your paint surface.
Wax-based leads – Wax-based leads are the most commonly used in colored pencils. They are known for being extra smooth and straightforward to work with. Artists go for wax-based leads when they have significant layering or blending work.
One of the most significant benefits of using a colored pencil with a wax-based lead is that you can use readily available solvents like xylene or baby oil to effectively dissolve the pigment onto the paint surface. Xylene has proven to be better than baby oil for providing clean blends.
A drawback of using wax-based pencils is the possibility of wax blooms. After a few days, the wax may start to oxidize which can be troublesome. We recommend using a fixative to seal your artwork and preserve it. In case you do not have a fixative in your studio, use a dry, clean cloth to wipe the artwork.
Can You Make DIY Colored Pencils?
DIY-crafters can make a lot of cool stuff in the comfort of their homes. If you are into DIY projects, you may be wondering if you can make colored pencils at home. Unfortunately, it is one of the limited products that you cannot make at home. Unlike oil and acrylic painting supplies, the ingredients for making colored pencils are not readily available.
The production process of colored pencils requires specialized tools and ingredients. No matter how good you are at DIY endeavors, you cannot mix the pigment with extenders and binders or insert them into molds at home.
Final Words
Irrespective of whether you are an art student, hobbyist, teacher, professional artist, or expert, knowing the composition of colored pencils will help you achieve your goals. It will also help to choose the ideal colored pencils for your needs without exceeding your budget.
Colored pencils may appear to be simple, but their production process is more complicated than you would have imagined.
We wanted to try out grills from Broil King to see if they could be included in our ‘meat smoking for beginners’ recommendations. This is why we chose the Broil King Regal S 420 and S 490 models; both of these models turned out to be high-quality products that meet our criteria. The Broil King belongs to the Onward Manufacturing brand and all their grills are manufactured in North America.
Similar to Napoleon Grills, the gas grills from Broil King come across as great contenders for the Weber gas grills. When we were looking into meat smoking for beginners, we were evaluating in terms of both performance and quality. This is why we are going to do a Weber vs. Broil King comparison. Here we will compare the S 490 and S 420 with their Weber equivalents in terms of meat smoking for beginners.
Patented stainless steel Dual-Tube burners with 2 ribbons of...
Flav-R-Wave heat plates that protect the burners, provide...
The S 420 Regal from Broil King features a high-end, stainless-steel construction. It does not have a rotisserie burner or even a side burner. If we have to compare this product with a model from the Weber series, then that model has to be the Weber Genesis II S 310.
Both of these products are ideal meat smoking for beginners picks as they have great flame tamers, grates, and steel bodies. More importantly, both of these products feature equivalent types of primary grilling areas.
The Primary Differences
Heating Capacity
Weber’s Genesis II S 310 has 3 burners that have a 12,500 BTU/hour capacity which makes their combined heating capacities stand at close to 37,500 BTU/hour. Regal’s S 420, on the other hand, has 4 burners that have a 12,500 BTU/hour capacity and combined heat that stands at a higher 50,000 BTU/hour.
The combined heating capacity of 37,500 BTUs in Weber’s Genesis can be used to heat about 513 inches of the grate. The grilling space has a heating power of 73 BTU/hour for each square inch. The Regal, as you would have guessed, is at a clear advantage due to its combined grilling power.
The Regal throws in 50,000 BTUs of heat for its 500 square inches of grate. This translates to a heating power of about 100 BTUs/hour for every square inch—which is again ideal for meat smoking for beginners. The Regal doesn’t just stop there though. This product is at a clear advantage – simply because of its sheer grilling power. When the Regal 420 is pitted against the Genesis, you will find the BTUs for every square inch is quite consistent in the former brand.
Price
The Regal has been set at a more premium price than the Genesis but what you will be getting for the extra money needs to be considered. In terms of meat smoking for beginners, you will be getting an extra burner along with a grate that is thicker. The Regal also has 9mm stainless steel rods while the Genesis has the same but with a 7mm thickness.
Warranty
Weber offers a warranty of 10 years on its products whereas the Broil King’s products have warranties that vary around 5 to 10 years. Even though this is the case, you shouldn’t worry too much. Users of both these products have found that the 9mm stainless steel rods of the Broil King can easily outlast the 7mm rods of the same material in the Genesis.
Styling
In our own opinion, the Genesis looks much more stylish and presentable as opposed to the Broil King but both have really unique aesthetics. That being said, it is important to point out that Genesis features a foldable left side that will give you much more space on the deck.
As you may have noticed, the battle between both these grills is quite like a coin toss. With the extra burner and more combined heating capacity in the Broil King, we know it will be a better pick for searing steak. The Genesis, on the other hand, is more aesthetically pleasing and can be bought at a better price.
Make the perfect steak - With patented Stainless Steel...
Durable cooking grids - Solid rod 9mm Stainless Steel...
This product from Broil King also happens to be a 4 burner with a gas grill made of stainless steel with rotisserie and side burners. Once you are familiarized with the product, you’ll find that the bones of both – the S 420 and S 490 are quite the same. The 490 is only different because it has upgraded rotisserie burners and side burners along with featuring a dedicated rotisserie burner.
If we were to compare this product with the Weber Series, then we had to set up a head to head with the Genesis II LX 340. This product from the Weber Series has slightly bumped up specifications in terms of heating capacities of side burners and primary burners. The combined heating capacities now stand at 43,500 BTU/hour.
Unlike the previous battle of products that are ideal meat smoking for beginners, this new match-up had a clear winner. The Broil King S 490 had a cheaper price than the Genesis II LX 340 and outclassed due to the following specifications:
Primary Differences
Better grate thickness as the Broil King has 9mm stainless steel rods as opposed to the Genesis II LX 340’s 7mm.
The S 490 had a larger heating ability standing at 100 BTUs/hour for every square inch as opposed to the 84 BTUs of the Genesis II LX 340.
The Broil King also has a dedicated rotisserie burner along with a rotisserie assembly.
The Genesis II LX 340 does have some features that may not be available in the Broil King S 490 but they aren’t really needed if we are looking from the meat smoking for beginners perspective. These features include the lighted control knobs and the LED fuel gauge along with some others which are quite unnecessary.
Final Verdict On Broil King vs Weber
In our comparison for both the products, we were quite impressed with both the models of the Broil King. The manufacturing quality of these products is quite solid and both have that extra ‘oomph’ required to trump their Weber counterparts. If you are out looking for grills in the market and find a great price for the Broil King Regal, then you don’t have anything more to consider!
Everything has got its advantages and disadvantages. And the perfect example of this is an oil painting.
But then again, you probably have experienced those moments when you're trying to add another layer of oil paints on top of the other. Only to find that they blend together instead. Or that time when you wanted to give the piece a finishing touch but you couldn't because it wasn’t dry yet.
Yes, those moments can be pretty bothersome, especially when you need the art right away.
So if you are looking for ways to make those paints dry within a day, then take notes of certain creative techniques we have for you.
Oil paints take days, weeks or sometimes even months to completely dry.
But when using drying mediums, it can accelerate the drying time at a much faster rate.
But using just any drying medium won't do.
There are drying mediums that are safe while there are some that can cause serious harm to your health.
Make sure that the medium you get is safety and non-toxic. Besides that, a good drying medium does not require you to use a lot of it, but only a certain amount will do.
And another suggestion is to find a bottle of the medium that works best for your painting because there are a lot of varieties out there.
An example of a suitable and most preferred medium is Liquin.
Use Thin Layers
Here is a simple, yet very effective technique to quicken the drying process.
Some artists like to work using thick brush strokes. While this is perfect for other purposes, it will not speed up the drying process any time soon.
Therefore, the solution is to work with light brush strokes and thin layers.
If you keep adding layer after layer, you'll see that the drying time will improve immediately.
Work Environment
The place where you're located has a significant effect on the painting's drying process.
And that is because of the temperature.
Essentially, hot climate quickens the drying time while a humid climate slows it down.
Of course, nobody has control over such things. But once you know the climate type of the place you stay, you can move on with modified and artificial temperature to control the drying time of the art.
Paint on a Flat Surface
When painting on a rough surface, you will notice that in some areas, it takes a very long time to dry.
However, if you use a flat surface, it gives you the ability to distribute the colors evenly. And this allows the oil to harden faster. Moreover, a flat surface is so much better when it comes to painting in layers.
There are many painting styles and preferences, no doubt. But if you want the oil painting to dry off quickly for some reason, we suggest considering a flat surface.
You might be wondering why we're suggesting the use of acrylic for a painting that should solely rely on oil paints. Hear us out.
Acrylic paints are water based colors. That means they have to go through the process of evaporation to dry off completely.
And since oil paints are not water based, they dry off when they get in contact with air/oxygen. This process is known as oxidation. It hardens the oil colors until they dry.
And this takes a much longer time for these paints to dry.
So that leads us to the topic of coating the background with acrylic paint first.
Once you try this simple method, you will then see a big difference in the drying process.
The acrylic paint will dry off, leaving the surface hard and absorbent. Hence, it will speed up the oil paints' drying time.
Types of Paints
Finally, there are the kinds of oil paints you will be using.
Some oil paints contain properties that make them dry quicker.
Earth shades are such examples. Most of these shades usually contain iron oxides which boost the drying speed.
So, look for colors that contain iron oxides for earth tones while for other pigments, they must have either cobalt or lead.
And if you are in a hurry or you require the painting to be ready as soon as possible, look for such colors.
To ease your search, we listed these specific colors that dry faster than other shades because of the components mixed in them:
Another essential thing to consider is the quality of the paints.
Look for a set of colors that are of high quality. However, note that a high price does not necessarily represent high quality. So any paint/tube that contains the above properties will be enough.
We know there are other methods creative artists use to make the paint dry quicker, like microwaving the painting, blow drying, and the like.
While this works well with other types of paints, it is not very ideal for oil paints because it might change the original shades and also damage the painting.
Therefore, we suggest you stick with the techniques provided above. They ensure safety to your artwork, and they are also easy to execute.
Conclusion
So with that, we have come to the end of today's article.
Before we leave you to it, we want to remind you about the need for knowing the things you'll be working on better because that will ensure excellent results.
Are you planning your future home but can't determine the type of carpeting to use?
There are so many options to choose from, and it's natural to feel a bit overwhelmed. The key to making the right choice is to determine the type of floor you're likely to have or the kind of setting in which to use it.
You can opt for either natural or synthetic materials, and in some cases, these two components combine to provide a better texture. If you're looking for durability, you can choose nylon or any other sturdy substance to ensure it doesn't stain. And you don't have to spend much time on maintenance.
But the question is, how do you choose from the numerous options lining the market? To help you, we have provided a detailed guide on the various types of carpets. And that’s not all; we’ve also included some maintenance tips and FAQs to clear all your doubts.
So, let’s get started, shall we?
Types of Carpet
Nylon
First and foremost, you're guaranteed two things with a carpet made of nylon – softness and durability. Nylon is one of the sturdiest materials, enabling you to get the most use out of the carpet for a long time. It's incredibly resistant to stains and abrasions, which is perfect if you have a pet or accidentally spill anything.
Moreover, it's most popular among all the other materials used for making carpets with an estimated 90% of residential mats made from nylon. It's capable of withstanding mold, mildew, and rot, so you won't have a hard time cleaning it. Plus, you'll be pleased to know that it holds color for a long time and is easy to dye.
With the help of hydrogen molecules, you can revive the carpet to prime condition using hot water. The heat reactivates the hydrogen molecules, thereby ensuring the fibers get back to their original condition. With the proper care, you can use them for 12 to 15 years before buying a new one.
But the most critical factor perhaps is the feel. For a highly durable material, it offers a soft feel making it a favorite. Due to the texture retention, it can hold on to the original appearance for maximum comfort. Additionally, the price is very reasonable, making for a valuable deal.
Polypropylene
Straight off the bat, Polypropylene is incredibly popular and used in 80% of carpets for commercial and residential use. The reason for its popularity is its high durability combined with the soft texture, making it desirable. In some cases, it's also called olefin, so don't be confused.
Besides, it's mainly used for loop style carpets like Berbers because though it is durable, it doesn't match up to nylon. Apart from that, it's affordable, thereby making it an excellent option. You won't have to spend too much to get a quality carpet for your home. Furthermore, it's environment-friendly as it doesn't generate any harmful by-products.
Another reason why most people prefer it is because of the similarity to wool, whereby it acts as a synthetic substitute for it. Moreover, it's sturdy enough to withstand daily use, and you can rest assured that it'll last a long time. However, it's prone to soiling, which may be a point of contention for some people.
As a result, it gathers oil over time, which in turn collects dirt and so you'll have to clean it regularly. But the good news is that it's easy to clean, and you even have the option of using bleach without affecting the integrity of the carpet. The fibers are woven into a heavy textile for carpeting while retaining a smooth exterior.
Polyester
Firstly, the advantage of using a Polyester carpet is that it helps to retain the vibrant colors. It's fade-resistant, and even after regular use, you can rest assured that it'll hold the colors to provide a stunning look. Moreover, polyester makes the carpets eco-friendly because they are made by recycling plastic bottles.
Likewise, it doesn't stain easily because it's a closed-cell fiber, making it completely stain-proof. Many people tend to confuse staining with soiling, which occurs when you accidentally leave something on the carpet or forget to remove the cleaning agent. As a result, it can hold on to dirt, appearing as stains to the naked eye.
However, users have noticed that it tends to flatten underweight, which may not make it the ideal option if it's prone to encounter a lot of movement. Plus, if it does get soiled, it's likely to affect the look as it's not easy to clean. On the other hand, if you manage to be careful, you can enjoy the carpet's visible luster.
Meanwhile, it doesn't rate high when it comes to durability, and materials like nylon are sturdier. Apart from that, it's budget-friendly due to the low cost of raw materials and production. So, you're likely to get good value for your money.
Acrylic
Right away, it's often referred to as synthetic wool as it offers a feel similar to the original product but at a lower cost. There are instances when it's also blended with wool to deliver a fantastic performance. Since the feel is so good, most people would want to purchase it at an affordable price.
As a result, it's highly popular and has generated a lot of positive reviews. Moreover, it offers terrific resistance against several elements such as static electricity, moisture, mildew, fading as well as staining. So, you can enjoy the vibrant colors for a long time, and it's also easy to clean, with the integrity remaining intact.
Apart from that, it has exceptional wick ability and can dry itself quickly to remove moisture trapped in the fiber. Additionally, it doesn't degrade in sunlight, which is sure to please you. And complemented by the unevenness of the material, it provides a great feel which you'll love.
However, there are doubts regarding the durability, and buyers have reported it may not last a long time. There's a chance it may flatten if subjected to a lot of movement, which isn't the ideal scenario. Plus, it's prone to soiling, and if you fail to remove the cleaning agent altogether, the alkaline in the solution could stain it brown.
Wool
Having gone through several substitutes, it's time to discuss the details of the authentic carpet material. You can rest assured if your carpet consists of wool, it's likely to be one of the softest products going around. But don't worry as the naturally luxurious material also scores high when it comes to durability.
Manufacturers can combine it with synthetic fibers or acrylic to make a carpet with both materials' best qualities. If you decide to opt for a pure wool carpet, you'll love it doesn't include any chemicals or additives. As a result, it's perfect if you're susceptible to specific allergies or chemicals, making it suitable for residential use.
Likewise, it has excellent texture retention ability, ensuring you can use it for a long time. Plus, it resists soiling since it's a natural fiber with microscopic scales preventing the dust from grabbing onto the carpet. But if soiling does occur, it tends to disperse light, making sure it isn't visible.
However, it's not particularly resistant to stains, and nylon is a more durable fabric. It can absorb any stain easily, making it difficult to clean. Furthermore, if it experiences too much activity, there's a chance it could flatten, which you may not like. You can solve the issue by purchasing high-grade wool, but it's costlier than the low-grade version.
Loop Pile
First and foremost, it goes by many names, among which are uncut pile or the Berber pile. The latter is derived from a particular type of knotted pile prevalent in North America and has several advantages, which is the reason for the unique design. As a result, the yarn loop remains intact for optimum comfort.
Meanwhile, it's very sturdy, ensuring you can use it for a long time. And coupled with longevity, it's also resistant to stains, which is sure to please many users. Even if you spill anything, the fibers don't absorb the stain making it easy to clean. As a result, it can withstand a lot of activity without wearing out.
Likewise, you can choose from a range of options making it highly versatile. There are two major types – the level loop and the patterned loops. While the former compromises of fibers of the same size, the latter features loops of varying lengths. You can also opt for a cut-and-loop construction where the threads are mixed.
However, it's important to remember it's less soft and has considerably less padding than a cut-pile carpet. Moreover, if you have pets or small children, it may cause snagging issues, and so you need to keep a close watch to avoid accidents. Consequently, many people may have second thoughts and opt for some other option.
Cut Pile
Straight of the bat, discarding the exposed fibers gives the Cut Pile carpet a soft feel. Moreover, by changing the angle of the cuts, each rug can provide a different texture to suit various needs. In much the same way, the fibers can be subjected to multiple treatments to deliver distinct sensations.
As a result, the carpet's length and thickness vary, and you can use it to cover all the floors of your house. The strength of the product lies in the twist, and the more the fibers the twisted, the higher will be the strength. It, therefore, ensures the model isn't susceptible to matting or crushing.
Furthermore, thanks to the enhanced texture, it requires low maintenance, and any wear or dirt remains masked. Besides, you can also opt for a shag carpet having the unique feature of being longer than average. However, there are specific issues like durability, and you may have to change it earlier than you want.
Due to the range of options on offer, you get exceptional versatility suited to your needs. While it can withstand excessive use, you can spot the footmarks along with the vacuum trails. It's not likely to affect the softness underfoot, but you may not like the exterior fading after regular use.
Saxony Cut
Firstly, it's a variant of the cut-pile with the fibers being soft and dense to provide a terrific sensation. The threads being short can stand straight up, thereby creating a fuzzy yet lush surface for optimum comfort. Moreover, it offers excellent versatility and can blend with nylon, wool, and polyester.
The density, the type of fiber, and most importantly, the twist all come together to produce a quality product. The twist is essential for imparting the necessary strength, and the higher the twist, the more is the durability. As a result, it's useful in preventing foot marks or vacuum lines in most top activity areas.
It comes in handy, reflecting the light, which helps mask stains, making sure the color doesn't fade. If you rub your hand on the surface, you'll see it doesn't leave any lines, leading to increasing popularity among users. So, it's easy to clean, and you won't have to worry about it gathering too much dust.
But there are issues when it comes to wear and tear. Because of the unique standing fibers, it tends to get flattened quite quickly, and it's susceptible to soiling as well. It's perhaps best to use it in formal living areas where the chances of the fibers remaining intact are higher. Moreover, it's costlier, too, which could be a deterring factor.
Plush Pile
Right away, the Plush Pile is also known as the velvet cut pile and presents a regal look, thereby providing a degree of sophistication. The fibers have deliberately been kept short and packed together, enabling you to get a luxurious surface and incredible sensations underfoot. Additionally, you can choose from a range of colors to spruce up any area.
An important factor is a twist in the fibers, and a higher twist provides more strength. But even with a lower twist, you get a smooth texture producing a classic look, making it very versatile. You can quickly assess all the factors and purchase the type best suited to your needs.
Another aspect is the shading and tracking of the product, meaning it'll show light and dark areas during use. While it's not a significant issue, many users may not like to see vacuum lines or the color changing due to a lower twist in the yarns. It also means that in areas with regular use, it tends to show footmarks.
It fails to score high on durability, affecting longevity and making it prone to wear and tear. You'll have to spend time on maintenance or even change it if you have to. Most customers may opt for some other model that doesn't show much scuffing.
Textured Cut
First and foremost, the Textured Cut's primary characteristic is the fibers are of uneven length. As a result, it gets the unique texture providing maximum comfort for a long time. The manufacturers use a special steam treatment helping to curl individual strands for more cohesion.
It ensures the fibers have the necessary twist, which has several benefits, one of which is the trackless nature. So, it isn't troubled by footprints or vacuum marks like some of the other products. Meanwhile, the strands' spiral view reflects light and helps to mask if it's crushed down.
It's suitable for use in areas where there's a lot of activity without needing to spend much time on maintenance. You'll love how the tightness of the texture makes it a fantastic option for preventing stains, and if you do spill something accidentally, it's easy to clean. Another point to consider is the texture changes with regular use.
While the durability remains intact, the textured look differs as the years go by. It's not a big problem, and issues like this appear in most models. It provides much-needed reliability, making it highly accessible, thereby generating positive reviews. You can rest assured; you'll be able to use it for a long time to get a terrific performance.
Frieze Cut
Straight of the bat, the long fibers, interspersed with the shorter ones, are twisted together to provide the necessary cohesion. You'll see the tangled threads spread across the surface, delivering a comfortable texture. Apart from that, it has several benefits and scores high when it comes to durability.
You can use it for a long time without worrying about wear and tear, while it's also useful in hiding dirt and footprints. As a result, you can use it in areas experiencing a lot of activity without affecting the quality of the product. It also ensures you get a soft feel, providing great comfort for your feet.
Likewise, it doesn't require a lot of maintenance, thanks to the unique design. And as the fibers are long, the load is transferred to the sides, keeping the surface intact. However, there are a few downsides, and it's not the easiest to clean. So, it's best to remain careful and avoid spilling on the carpet.
While there are aspects where it delivers a cracking performance, it doesn't precisely spruce up the place's appearance. Besides, the price is higher than some of the other models, and since the price is a crucial aspect for customers, it may lose out on potential buyers.
Sculptured Cut
Firstly, it uses a combination of both looped and cut pile fibers to create the ideal texture suited to your needs. Due to dual nature, you get variations in both height and feel on the surface. Cutting the various strands differently, provides different geometric patterns, ensuring you get a three-dimensional feel.
The variety of patterns in different colors creates a fantastic appearance meaning you can use it for residential and formal settings. Moreover, it can withstand daily use and ensures there are no trails left behind because of high activity. It's also stain-resistant, though not a lot, but helps to mask small spillage.
However, over time it tends to wear out, and the appearance starts to fade. But it's not a significant issue, and a similar problem is seen with other products as well. The longer fibers lose their twist, causing it to droop over the shorter fibers, thereby hiding them from sight. Meanwhile, the cost of the model is also high.
Many customers may not be flexible with their budget, and given the range of choices on offer, they may opt for some other model. We understand the price is higher due to the extra effort required to make different patterns. However, if you decide to purchase it, you won't be disappointed with the look and feel.
Woven Carpets
Right away, with Woven Carpets, you have the choice of decorating your room uniquely. Although made from traditional methods dating back to the 16th century, there's no cause for concern as it doesn't compromise with quality. You can choose from vibrant colors, which are ideal for most rooms or formal gatherings.
Moreover, it scores high when it comes to durability, making it extremely desirable among people. You can use it for a long time without having to worry about wear and tear. And it also has excellent variety, ensuring you get great versatility. Among the choices at your disposal are Axminster and Wilton carpets.
While the former provides you the option of choosing intricate patterns, the latter is simple yet elegant. The Axminster variant is made by weaving fibers through the backing material giving rise to eye-catching designs lending a degree of sophistication. On the other hand, the Wilton version, produced from the loom, involves weaving the fibers in a continuous strand.
As a result, even after regular use, the fibers can withstand prolonged activity and are complemented by the anti-static nature. Furthermore, it has the added benefit of absorbing harmful pollutants like nitrogen and sulfur dioxide.
So, the air around it will also be cleaner, preventing adverse side effects. Finally, it absorbs or releases moisture depending upon the humidity.
Plant-based
First and foremost, using a carpet based out of plant materials is very popular because of the eco-friendly nature. There aren't any harmful chemicals meaning if you have allergies, kids, or pets at home, you won't be affected in any way. Moreover, it flaunts a contemporary design to suit the latest trends.
Some of the materials used include sisal, jute, seagrass, and coir, making it highly versatile and suited for different needs and settings. While some are rough underfoot to provide added durability, some other products are soft, scoring high on the comfort scale. If you're worried about staining, you can opt for seagrass, which is resistant to watermarks.
As a result, it doesn't require a lot of maintenance, making it incredibly efficient. Meanwhile, it produces 63% fewer greenhouse gases, providing a significant step in protecting the environment. Besides, you get the option of dyeing it as well, meaning you can choose from a variety of colors.
You can use it in areas experiencing a lot of activity without the top surface wilting away. However, there are a few downsides, one of which is the price. The price is considerably higher than other models, which could cause you to think twice before purchasing it. Additionally, it's hard to get the perfect blend of durability and comfort in one carpet.
Twist Carpet
It derives its name from the fibers, which generate a twisting pattern, thanks to the tight weave. As a result, it gets a stylish look on top of providing the necessary durability and can withstand rigorous activity without losing its shape or finish. Moreover, you get a lot of variety to choose from.
It comes in varied colors and patterns, meaning it isn't prone to shading or vacuum trails like other models. And you can use it in most rooms, helping to grab the attention, and brightening up your space. Plus, you'll be glad to know it doesn't require much maintenance and is easy to clean.
Furthermore, thanks to the hardness of the external fibe0r, you don't have to worry about staining, and it doesn't absorb any accidental spillage. The most exciting aspect, however, is that it acts as a temperature and noise insulator. So, even if you have kids running around, the carpet muffles the sound while keeping your room at optimum temperature.
Additionally, it's very safe, and due to the high moisture content, it's flame-resistant as well. Besides, the biodegradable nature doesn't have any harmful effects, proving suitable for people with allergies or pets. Finally, it presents an affordable option, and you don't have to squeeze your budget to make the purchase.
Carpet Maintenance Tips
The process doesn't end with buying a carpet because you have to make sure you get the most use out of it. To help you, we have listed down specific ways to help you take care of your carpet. By keeping these points in mind, you can enjoy it for a long time.
Patching Your Carpet
It's possible to patch a carpet, but you'll need professional help. In case you're a DIY enthusiast, you'll have to get hold of a patch repair kit containing adhesive disks. You'll need to measure, using a tape, the size of the area that requires patching.
Proceed to remove the damaged area and replace it with the freshly cut out area. Ensure it's in the right position and then apply glue to hold it in place. Lastly, you'll have to smoothen the edges of the carpet to ensure the seams aren't visible.
Stretching the Carpet
Over time, if your carpet becomes loose, wrinkled, or lumpy, it's possible to solve the problem by pulling it. As a result, you'll need a power carpet stretcher, pry bar, knee kicker utility knife, tack strips, and a stapler with 5/16" staples. First, you'll have to secure one end of the carpet using the tack strips.
Next, with the carpet stretcher, pull the carpet right across the room to get rid of the rolls and creases. Then proceed to take the other end of the rug, embed it into the tack strips, and restore the worn-out spots. All that's left is to continue using your old carpet without compromising on performance.
Different Types of Carpeting
For those of you who are wondering, it's possible to carry out carpeting on different types of floors. Since it consists of various materials, you can opt for carpets suitable for a particular kind of space based on your need.
Carpeting a Hardwood Floor
You'll need to use tackless strips and nail them on the floor on the baseboards situated along the perimeter of the room. Remember to apply masonry nails for reliable performance and use the carpet padding to cover the surface. Next, cut the carpet four inches larger compared to the size of the room.
It's essential so that you don't run out of the carpet to cover the floor. Then lay down the rug and keep two inches extra near the walls. Beginning at the corners, take one end of the carpet and hook it to the tackless strip and stretch it to the other wall with the help of a power stretcher.
Now, hook the other end of the carpet to the tackless strip and trim off the excess portion. Please make sure the rug covers the room in the entirety, making it ready for use.
Carpeting over Concrete
If you want to carpet over concrete, the necessary steps remain the same, but there are some additional aspects you'll need to keep in mind. Firstly, nail the tack strips into the floor covering the perimeter of the room. Next, cover the concrete with carpet padding thoroughly and connect them by using tape.
Now, you'll have to unroll the carpet on top of the padding, starting at one corner of the room while fitting the edge into the tack strips. Cover the end of the back wall in its entirety by connecting it with the tack strips while using a power carpet stretcher to stretch it to the other wall.
Check the tightness and ensure it isn't slacking. Hook the other end to the tack strips and replace the baseboards. After completing all the steps, make sure no portion of the floor is left vacant.
Types of Carpet FAQs
Is it possible to dye the carpet?
Depending on the type of carpet, it can be dyed. It's possible for wool and nylon carpets while acrylic, polyester, and propylene resist staining. Also, important is the current color of the product, which will determine the colors you can use.
There are three methods to carry out dyeing. A wand having poundage ranging from 150 to 500 can spray on the dye. At the same time, another option involves using aerosol spray cans, while the third method consists of using a rotary scrubber having nylon bristles.
Can I paint my carpet?
Certain types like Berber, jute, seagrass, and sisal carpets involve using upholstery paint. For plush carpeting, you won't need much color, and it becomes hard, along with a matte texture.
What's the correct way to measure carpeting?
To conduct the measuring process, you'll need a diagram of the area you want to carpet. The description is essential because it's necessary to transfer it to the sketch after measuring the space. You'll have to calculate the total square footage and make sure you round up to 0.5m of one foot.
Remember to round up rather than down, ensuring you have enough material to cover the floor. Additionally, 5% extra material needs to be taken for the seams, and similarly to match the pattern, you'll also require additional elements.
How long does carpeting last?
If you avail of the cheapest form of carpeting for your apartment, it can last close to five years. On the other hand, medium-grade carpeting has a lifespan of 15 years, thanks to the higher durability. And opting for the highest quality of carpets will ensure you can use it for 25 years.
The longevity depends upon the frequency of use and the amount of activity it has endured. You'll also need to make regular checks and fix the problem areas so that it lasts longer.
What are the prevalent materials used for carpeting?
Carpeting involves an array of materials, including both natural and synthetic components. Based on your preference, you can opt for a carpet made from acrylic, polyester, nylon, wool, polypropylene, SmartStrand, and recycled plastic.
Depending upon the area of use, you can opt for uncut carpet pile, cut carpet pile, Saxony cut pile, textured cut pile, velvet cut pile, and plush carpet. You get a terrific variety of materials to choose from, and these components can also blend to deliver a fantastic output.
Can I recycle my old carpet?
All carpets can be recycled irrespective of the duration of use. The fiber separates from the backing, and in certain instances, both elements can be recycled by breaking them down and subsequently processing it. As a result, it's possible to produce new carpets, including certain by-products.
Final Words
We hope you have a much better idea regarding your carpeting needs after going through our informative guide.
With the right carpet, you'll get the optimum comfort for many years. Moreover, depending on the fiber strength, it's easy to clean and helps resist staining or soiling to reduce your stress. Likewise, you can choose from various patterns and colors to brighten up your living space.
Having the right product will give you the perfect balance of comfort and longevity for a cracking performance. So, all that's left is to bring home the ideal carpet and enjoy luxurious living.
That's all the time we have. Until next time. Ciao!
If you're someone who has heard the term "Visual Development" a thousand times but are still confused as to what it actually refers to, worry not, you're not alone!
The broad term "Visual Development" is used in such a wide variety of contexts that it can be pretty hard to pinpoint exactly what it is. From concept art to illustration to graphic design, there's a lot of places where the term "Visual Development" pops up quite frequently.
So if you're interested in this field and wish to get a basic understanding of what Visual Development is, you've come to the right place. We've answered a few of the most frequently asked questions that a lot of newbies have regarding this field.
So let's get started!
What is Visual Development?
So, What is Visual Development?
Visual Development goes by a lot of different names, from concept art to illustration, there's a lot of terms that are used to describe it. Put simply, "Visual Development" is the basic building block for a wide variety of visual art. It serves as the foundation on top of which further work is done to produce the final output, which can be anything from animated movies to video games.
The scope of Visual Development is to create the tone and setting of pretty much any type of concept art and set the underlying theme for the entire piece of work. This includes creating environments, clothing, designing characters, and a lot of visual organizational work which is essential to any form of visual art.
The scope of Visual Development is pretty broad, and this is precisely what makes it an incredibly lucrative career for aspiring artists. Visual Artists get a high level of professional creative control over their work and can create an entire imaginary world from nothing.
What Does a Visual Artist Do?
Visual Development artists are responsible for creating everything from sets and environments to characters, lighting, and pretty much everything else that are present in the background of any visual art form.
As mentioned earlier, the scope of this field is vast. An artist working in Visual Development creates the entire look and set of videos, animated films, and a wide variety of other productions. As a visual artist, you get the opportunity to work in a lot of different industries ranging from advertising to marketing and even public relations.
However, a considerable chunk of VAs usually work in animation where they are responsible for proposing ideas as to what the setting of the film should look like. They put into consideration the plot, characters, and action and then come up with an underlying theme around which the entire production is done.
Photoshop and Maya are the two most popular software that finds use in Visual Development. So if you're planning on establishing a career in this field, make sure your skills in those two software are well brushed up.
Where Do Visual Artists Work?
Employment opportunities for Visual Artists are plenty in animation studios and video production outfits. If you got talent, there's no end to what you can achieve in this field. From game studios to web designing and even advertising and public relations, there are a lot of firms that hire talented Visual Artists.
More recently, Mobile Technology has emerged as one of the most significant industries which hire Visual Artists. You can work alongside app developers to optimize UI and UX Designs and create website themes. Other options include product layout and designing, creating attractive magazine photos, and working with comic writers.
How Can You Start Your Visual Development Career?
Although opportunities are plenty when it comes to Visual Development, there's no denying that it is a fiercely competitive industry. Most artists pursue a bachelor's degree followed by a master before landing a decent job in Visual Development. Internships are a great way to launch your career and land your first job.
According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the employment for animators and multimedia artists is projected to grow around 8% in the coming years. On top of that, higher demand for computer graphics is expected to accelerate job opportunities in the mobile industry. So career prospects are pretty top-notch as long as you're able to specialize yourself in a wide variety of skills.
What Skills Do You Need to Master as a Visual Artist?
Visual Artists typically use things like drawing, illustration, animation, graphic designing, and painting in order to bring their imagination to life. So these are a few skills you absolutely need to master if you're looking for a good career in Visual Development.
Apart from those, basic programming knowledge and being up-to-date with the developments in the industry you're planning on entering can go a long way in landing you a job.
Final Words
Visual Development is a career path which offers artists with the highest degree of creative freedom you can expect in a professional setting. It offers you the opportunity to maximize your potential and make a successful career in a wide range of different industries.
We hope we've managed to answer any questions you might have had regarding Visual Development, and we wish you all the best in your future endeavors!
The bathroom is often the most neglected part of any household and needs a proper paint job. So, you must use the best paint for the bathroom ceiling and walls.
Excess moisture deposition on the walls leads to the formation of mold and mildew, which are potential health hazards. That’s why it’s essential to use special paint that shields your bathroom walls from moisture and adds a natural shine.
Also, any paint you use should come with a mildew-resistant additive to last longer. However, it’s best to avoid paints that are intended for exterior use. Although these specially formulated paints offer waterproofing abilities, they contain hazardous amounts of VOCs that might cause respiratory problems.
That’s why it’s essential that you select the right paint for your bathroom with careful consideration of all factors. And in this guide, we have explained these in detail and shared some quality tips to keep your bathroom mold-free.
Before we continue, for DIYers looking for exact painting techniques for furniture that will help you out with changing the way your old furniture looks without calling a professional. We have a solution for you, checkout our next article to know more.
So without further ado, let’s jump right in!
Why Do You Need Special Paint For Bathrooms?
Bathrooms are areas prone to maximum moisture and must be your primary concern when applying a fresh coat of paint formulated for the space.
Damp air from showers or steam baths, as well as direct splashes of water from the sink, bath, or shower, can easily damage the top layer of paint. Moisture can also seep into the plastic or drywall surface beneath, leading to mold growth and peeling paint.
Specially formulated moisture-resistant paint for bathroomsabsorbs moisture from an area of high humidity, thereby hindering mold formation. Also, these glossy paints make wiping down stains easy and deliver an aesthetic and classy look to your modern bathrooms.
What Are Some Of The Best Paint For Bathrooms?
Before you start painting, apply one or two layers of primers. Primer bonds with the paint to ensure it remains on the walls for many years and also keeps it dry. So, a good primer is essential if you want long-lasting paint for your bathroom. After that, it’s essential to choose the right paint.
In this section, we will discuss the types of paints available, along with their pros and cons, so you can decide which suits your bathroom better.
A. Eggshell, Matte, And Flat Paint
Matte finish walls add a soft touch to an otherwise glossy and smooth room and deliver a designer and luxurious appeal. However, professional painters avoid using soft paints in bathroom projects because they are more susceptible to mildew infestation in high humidity. Plus, these aren’t much easier to clean.
Over the years, painting technology has improved significantly, and there exists flat, eggshell, and matte paint that makes cleaning easier and incorporates mildew-resistant properties. And once the paint is cured, you can use water, soap, and a clean cloth to wash the walls.
B. Satin Paint
Satin paints sit just in between glossy and acrylic eggshell paints. These paints have a protective coating that’s easier to clean than traditional eggshell or no-sheen paints. So, if you want a softer-gloss finish texture on your bathroom walls while still reaping the benefits of a glossy finish, a satin finish paint should be a no-brainer.
C. Latex paint
Latex paint is one of the better options for painting bathrooms because it has mildew-inhibiting properties. However, do not go for water-based latex paints, as these can get washed away due to prolonged exposure to moisture.
D. Semi-Gloss Paint
Semi-gloss paints are the most versatile of all. This modern paint is mold-resistant, easy to clean, and an excellent choice for bathroom walls. There are plenty of semi-gloss options available on the market to choose from.
However, the downside of this paint is that it looks good on smaller surfaces like bathroom cabinets and windows and not on large surfaces like living room walls.
E. High-Gloss Paint
High gloss paints are the best choice for your bathroom walls, as they deliver protection along with great looks. So, it’s like hitting two birds with a single stone. These finishes are easiest to clean, and gloss repels moisture to seal the paint. Plus, compared to satin or semi-gloss for bathroom,these are more durable and long-lasting.
What Additives Make A Paint Suitable For Painting Bathrooms?
If you don’t have access to specialized paints, you can add certain additives to traditional paints to improve their quality. Two of the most used additives for paint include:
A. Anti-microbial Additives
Moisture and heat present in your bathroom create a humid environment that’s ideal for the growth of mold spores. Ignoring this can cause serious health issues and breathing disorders in the long run. To eliminate this problem, you can add antimicrobial additives to the paint to prevent mildew growth and give your walls a longer life.
B. Corrosion Inhibitors
While painting metallic elements like wall hooks, cabinets, curtain rods, and others, you must add corrosion inhibitors to the paint. It cuts the oxidation process and ultimately inhibits rust formation.
Tips For Painting Bathrooms:
Tip 1
Select the bathroom décor first, and then go on to choose the paint shades. This practice allows you to gauge colors that will complement the decor.
Tip 2
Understand the type of paint you’re looking to apply to your bathroom. Some paint textures require multiple primer layers before applying the main paint layer, while for some, a single coat is enough. If you’re unsure about it, consult a painting expert to guide you through it.
Tip 3
When painting, use old newspapers and masking tape to cover your floor tiles and bathroom fixtures. It protects them from the damage of the dripping paint.
Tip 4
Purchase a paint sample and apply it to a small section to visualize the colors better.
Tip 5
Always go for quality rollers and brushes rather than opting for cheaper ones. Using high-quality products gives you superior results.
Tip 6
When choosing colors, go for the ones with the most natural reflection, like white. These show stains easily and create a natural ambient light around the space to give it a healthy glow. And make sure to keep your bathroom well-ventilated to minimize the bathroom moisture.
Special Paint For Bathrooms Final Words
We hope with this guide, you understand the reason why bathroom walls need special paints. And if you’re confident about the task, by all means, attempt it yourself. However, if the painting job seems overwhelming at any point, the safest option would be to hire a painting expert.
Hiring professional help will ensure that your paint job is done with expertise, and you won’t have to worry about the longevity of the paint. Also, professionals ensure that you get suitable paint for your bathroom (and other) walls.
That’s all for today!
Acrylic paints have been a favorite of artists for generations. They’ve been used for both personal and professional painting projects since the 20th century.
These paints are easily available and have various uses. But we don’t recommend acrylic paints for your skin as they are unsafe and might result in allergies or similar skin problems.
But what if you’re invited to a costume party, and have to dress up as a clown or a vampire? And, you are out of your high quality body paint. Should you then resort to using acrylic paints if nothing else is available? That’s exactly what you’ll be able to answer after reading this guide in detail!
FUN FACT | Do you know acrylic paints are not like superglue, which are close to impossible to remove, and they can even stick metals together. Check out our article on superglue sticking two metal pieces and retaining them if gluing metal intrigued your curiosity.
So, let’s get into it.
Can You Put Acrylic Paint Directly On Your Face?
The answer to this question is a big NO! You shouldn’t apply acrylic paint on the face because it might cause allergic reactions, irritation, and other skin problems. And in a world where skin ailments are rampant due to pollution, you definitely don’t want to take that extra risk.
Though most acrylic paints are non-toxic, their pigments are not safe for everyone’s skin. Even if you get some acrylic paint on any other part of your skin other than the face, we recommend washing it off immediately.
It’s best to use dedicated face or body paints when you need to deck up in special colors. The reason for this is that acrylic paints stick to your skin and become non-washable once dry. Such dry paint can start to peel off the healthy skin cells and hair follicles from your face.
That’s why you should always use nitrile gloves when handling acrylic paints, and try to ensure it doesn’t come into contact with any part of your face.
Is Acrylic Paint Safe For The Skin?
Acrylic paints are not as bad for the skin as oil-based paints. But, you should never use acrylic paint directly on your skin as it can cause severe irritation and damage. And if you have sensitive skin, we suggest you stay away from acrylic paints with special care!
If even after everything you want to (or have to) apply acrylic paint on your skin, please use water-based ones and always wear a face mask. After application, ensure it stays on for a short while and is removed as soon as possible before drying.
Overall, acrylic paints are not made for the skin. Though they are versatile when it comes to using on the canvas, human skin is not a suitable base for them.
Is Acrylic Paint Bad For The Environment?
Acrylic paints contain pigments that are non-biodegradable, thus making them harmful to nature. When not disposed of carefully, the metals present in these paints can cause health problems for plants and animals alike.
However, some brands nowadays are manufacturing biodegradable acrylic paints that they claim are non-toxic. These paints have natural ingredients that help break down the paint into harmless components that don’t harm the environment.
Turning Acrylic Paint Into Face Paint
As we’ve already mentioned earlier in this article, applying acrylic paint directly to the face can cause severe skin damage. But, if you are dead set on using acrylic paint on your face, we would recommend taking the help of makeup artists who work as face painters.
If hiring a makeup artist is not possible, you can use non-toxic acrylic paints to try and limit the damage to a minimum. We still suggest using high-quality face paint instead of acrylic if you need to apply it to facial regions. Another option is to mix moisturizers to dilute the paint and then apply it to the skin.
What Paint Is Safe For The Skin?
Thankfully, there are many skin-friendly alternatives to acrylic paint that you can use on your face and body. The following list includes some acrylic alternatives that are safer for the human skin:
1. Water-Based Paint
When it comes to face painting, water-based paints are the best option because they are gentle to the skin and include lesser VOCs. The only drawback of these paints is that they crack easily and hence might damage your facial art if you engage in vigorous movements.
2. Metallic Body Paint
This type of body paint is usually non-toxic and gives the human body a shiny, metallic look. They are made from natural ingredients and are relatively safe, but the metallic pigments might be irritating to some people.
3. Henna
Henna is a traditional body paint made from a natural plant dye and is one of the safest options on the market. This plant extract is suitable for adults as well as children, so anyone can use it without worrying about breaking out in rashes.
This natural dye has been used for centuries in Asian culture, especially during celebrations. The stain of this paint stays on the skin for weeks without causing any irritation or allergy; and when it fades, it leaves a cool orangish tinge..
4. Latex Body Paint
Liquid latex body paint is popular among cosplayers and costume designers. It doesn’t leave any residue behind as other body paints often do. But before applying latex body paint, ensure you’re not allergic to latex and are not going to use this paint in extremely hot conditions.
5. Body Painting Marker
This type of body paint is used to create non-permanent body art. Body painting markers are among the best skin-safe paints and are washable. But before buying a body painting marker, you should check the brand as not all of them are suitable for every part of the body.
7. Alcohol-Based Paint
Next, we have alcohol-based body paints that are waterproof and used for special effects. These paints don’t crack when dry, but they may rub off due to sweat. As these body paints have alcohol, they tend to dry faster. So be gentle while removing this paint because you don’t want to irritate the skin by excess rubbing.
8. Commercial Body Paint
This body paint is available in jars or spray bottles that some companies produce and are free of latex. Commercial body paints are among the safest body paints available on the market, but you should always perform a patch test before applying them to the skin.
Choosing The Right Paint For Your Face
So, now you know which paints you can apply to the face and skin and which ones to avoid. However, still there are a fair number of options to choose from…and how can you do that? By keeping the following factors in mind when going through the choices available:
1. Hypoallergenic Formulation
The first aspect you need to check when selecting body or face paints is whether they are hypoallergenic. The reason to look for hypoallergenic paints is that they suit even the most sensitive skins out there, thus making them a safe option.
2. Paint Opacity
Many often overlook this factor, but face paints with high opacity are essential to make the colors stand out regardless of the skin tone. In addition, the opacity of the paint allows you to finish your work quickly as less buildup is required to achieve the desired look.
3. Water-resistance
Always check whether the product can withstand water when purchasing face or body paint. If it does, the paint will stay in place even if you are sweating, getting a drink, or suffer an accidental spillage during a party.
Can You Put Acrylic Paint On Your Hands?
Acrylic paints shouldn’t be applied anywhere on the body, including your hands. In case your hands do come in contact with it, wash it off as soon as possible to avoid permanent skin damage. We’ve already mentioned that you need to use protective gloves when handling these paints.
Step-By-Step Instructions For Face And Body Painting
Face and body painting might be required in many situations, especially for those who practice performing arts. The ideal course of action here would be to purchase hypoallergenic, water-resistant paint that’s suitable for the human skin. This will guarantee that you’ll not be putting yourself at the risk of skin infections or more harmful diseases.
Once you’ve selected the right type of paint, you can get on with the makeup. Here’s a list of a few simple steps you can follow to begin face and body painting.
Step 1: Gather Your Tools
Before you begin, ensure that all your tools like brushes and sponges are ready at hand. You will also need a mirror, ample water, a spray bottle, damp cloth/ wet wipes, and of course, the paints which you’re going to apply.
Step 2: Prep The Skin
For the second step, cleanse your skin and pat it dry. After that, apply a moisturizer to hold the paint firmly to your skin.
Step 3: Start Application
After preparing your skin, start applying the paint carefully. Always ensure to start with light colors and gradually move to darker tones. And be careful not to apply too much face paint at once, or it will dry fast without letting you blend it.
Step 4: Add Details (Optional)
The fourth step is entirely optional. If you want, you can add details like fairy wings, animal prints, butterflies, and many others based on the theme that you are going with. You can also take the help of reference pictures to create small objects on the face or the body.
How To Remove Acrylic Paint From Skin?
Acrylic paint is hard to remove. Unlike water-based paints, which come off quickly, getting rid of it is challenging. But that doesn’t mean you must stay away from your favorite colors. Just follow this guide for removing acrylic paint from your skin:
Use soap and lukewarm water to remove the acrylic paint gently
Lightly scrape the paint off using your fingernails
Rinse thoroughly
Alternatively, you can use rubbing alcohol if the paint has dried on the skin
If the measures mentioned above fail to remove the acrylic paint off the skin, you can try peeling off the paint faster using vegetable oil, canola oil, olive oil, baby oil, or mayonnaise.
Best Face & Body Paints
There are many washable, FDA-approved paints available on the market that you can use on your skin. Some of them are mentioned below:
1. Ben NYE MagiCakes
This is a lukewarm-water-activated face paint that you can easily apply with a wet sponge. It comes in various colors and even works on dark skin tones. This face paint is an excellent choice for heavy makeup and cosplays as it doesn’t run or drip in extreme temperatures.
2. Snazaroo Classic Face & Body Paint
This one is a fantastic option as it comes in 18 ml resealable bottles, making the paints long-lasting. Not only that, these paints are cosmetic-grade and fragrance-free, which makes them suitable for even sensitive skin. Plus, the opaque colors make sure that you don’t need to apply too much of it.
3. Neon Glow Blacklight Body Paint
This paint kit is perfect for glow-in-the-dark fun events and blacklight parties. The kit comes in six vibrant colors and is certified by the ASTMD-4236 as a safe and non-toxic paint for kids and adults. The paints are activated by UV light and emit a bright glow under blacklights.
The skin application of these colors is smooth and dries quickly. Plus, the colors are easy to remove with soap and water.
4. Assorted Face Painting Kits
You can also get a number of face painting kits that are available from various brands. These kits are meant for kids, and the paints are usually hypoallergenic and FDA-approved. This makes them safe for applying on the face and body.
These kits include a number of colors along with stencils, sponges, brushes, glitters, etc. Plus, the colors last for hours on the skin without making you feel uncomfortable. And you can easily remove the paint using a wet cloth or baby wipes.
Acrylic Face Paint Final Thoughts
We have finally come to the end of this extensive guide, and we hope we were able to throw some light on this much-debated topic. Our suggestion would be to avoid using acrylic paint anywhere on the body, even if it’s water-based or non-toxic acrylic paint. Instead, use FDA-approved paints manufactured explicitly for human skin application.
If you must apply acrylic paint on your body or face, don’t keep the paint on for a long duration. Also, please stick to reputable brands that don’t use harmful or allergic ingredients in their colors. This way, you’ll be as safe as you can be.
So, that’s all from us. If you found our guide helpful, please share it with your friends and family. And do remember to maintain all safety precautions when using body or face paints!
Hairpin legs are a distinctive addition to any table, hairpin legs for tables, hairpin tables for desks and last but not least hairpin legs for dinning tables are infamous for all the right reasons.
Whether the table’s a study desk, an artist’s desk or used in the kitchen, hairpin legs can change the look and feel of the entire room and in some cases, the entire area the table is placed at.
The classic ‘40s neo-classical aesthetic is sure to transform the aura of any room, regardless of where you keep the table.
However, with a wide variety of styles, lengths and diameters to choose from, choosing which hairpin legs to get can become a confusing task.
Here, we’ll start off with three of the best hairpin leg designs on the market today, followed by a guide to let you decide which hairpin legs are best for your particular table [or tables].
If you`ve found the hairpin legs for table, hairpin legs for desk, hairpin legs for dinning table below interesting we invite you to check various other articles on the subject, we have curated lists of the best hairpin legs for bed , hairpin legs for nightstands, hairpin legs for side-table and last but not least hairpin legs for end table; below we also list a couple idea guides that showcase hairpin option as a solution for the task at hand.
Made For Makers: Elevate your home projects with our hairpin...
Modelled After The Classics: Drawing inspiration from the...
The table offers different designs for a variety of applications. The double weld construction with superior quality material is sure to keep your table steady for a long time. It ships with screws, a handy build guide and protector feet for the hairpins. With lengths from 4 inches to 40 inches depending on the kind of application, the sizes are flexible enough for any table.
Our Experience
This is one of the newer products on the market, but the manner in which it radically changes the look of the room is remarkable. Depending on your application, you could go in for the coffee table variant, the variant meant for benches, or low coffee tables. You could also go in for counter-top hairpin legs or if you’re looking to spruce up beds or cupboards, you could also have the furniture variant.
The sheer amount of variety in terms of sizes and colors is unmatched. In terms of colors, there are 12 radically different shades available, based on your particular requirement. The width is available in a single 3/8 inch variant. With a 60 day money-back guarantee on offer too, there is very little to fault with these hairpin legs - except that they cannot deal with heavy loads. You can also choose between 2-leg and 3-leg designs!
Verdict
This wonderful set of hairpin legs is sure to go well with any table one can think of. With a number of design combinations (think sizes, colors and lengths), you can pick your own unique design. Besides the fact that these hairpin legs cannot bear more than 130 lbs at once - and you get only four leg sets, there’s little to fault in the construction, durability or design. A resounding yes from the reviewers for these hairpin legs!
This is a unique, heavy duty addition to the recommendations. Unlike other sellers, DIY Hairpin Legs are offering single hairpin legs for order - meaning you can order as many or as few as you’d like depending upon your specifications. The metal finish and lifetime guarantee give it another edge here.
Our Experience
Coming to this particular hairpin leg, you get a lot of flexibility as in the previous model. Here, though, you get to call the shots over how much weight you want to put on the legs, since this comes with an option of heavier-duty 1/2 inch legs, besides the usual 3/8 inch legs. The cold rolled steel process gives these legs a sense of sturdiness and security.
Another benefit is that with each order of four legs at a time, you also get a maintenance kit directly from the seller. These are available in a 2-rod design only. The length is fixed at a cool 16 inches, which is useful enough for most applications. The welds are extra strong, which means these legs will require much lesser maintenance over time since most legs fail right at the welds (it’s their Achilles heel, so to speak). A brilliant addition to any household or industrial use, except for the lack of variety in colors.
Verdict
This set of legs is unlikely to fail you at any time. Sturdiness, strength and long term reliability are its strong suits. The modern steel finish goes with a number of designs as well. The flexibility in the width allows you to go for household or industrial use depending on your needs. If you’re looking for a minimalist hairpin leg set which will last long without much fuss, this should be high up on your list of choices.
This set of legs is meant to be used in more heavy-duty applications, such as restaurants, industrial tables, or office tables which face a lot of load - this can accommodate up to 350 lbs at once. These come in sets of four, and are available in a modern looking black color. These legs can be had in a 3-rod design - which gives it an extra sense of weight handling strength.
Our Experience
These legs offer you an unmatched peace of mind, given their construction. Rest assured, these legs are sturdy enough for the most demanding of weights, and with 16 inch and 28 inch designs on offer, you can choose which one to go for. Further, the black color goes well with most table designs, especially in lighter rooms or rooms which need some contrast to go with the lighting.
Besides the fit and finish, it comes with pre-drilled holes for maximum convenience. The logic behind this is that tables come in a variety of sizes, and the positioning of the legs for each table will vary. Hence, you will have to do the labor of ordering the screws extra. These hairpin legs are perfect for writing, drawing, and typing - all of which exert some force on the table. The table is unlikely to wobble in any of these circumstances. All in all, for heavier use, this is our pick.
Verdict
Though not for everyone with the black powder coat, for those who need peace of mind with any major weight that they’ll need to put on the table - these legs are second to none. The triple rod design ensures extra stability and minimal wobble. Further, the 1/2” diameter is perfect for a writing table, or even a restaurant table.
This sums up the three best offerings on the market, all with their own pros and cons. Now, coming to the harder part - how do you choose which hairpin legs you need?
Fret not, here we give you a handy set of questions which will help you determine the major aspects of the hairpin legs you will be needing - the width, the coating, the number of rods, and the height of the hairpin leg. There are other factors to consider too - read up and find out!
Hairpin Legs Frequently Asked Questions
1. 1/2” or 3/8” hairpin leg width - which is best for me?
There is a straightforward answer to this - 1/2” is for loads over 200lbs, while 3/8” caters to tables which won’t be facing loads over 150lbs. If you are looking for office tables, study tables or any application which has considerable weight on it, go for 1/2” - don’t take the risk, since the table could budge or collapse in case you pick 3/8”.
2. How many rods do I need?
It might not be apparent from the design, but the load a hairpin leg can sustained only depends on the width and height of the leg. The number of rods in the leg you should have is purely an aesthetic consideration - go with the one which goes better with your room! Generally, if you’re going for a minimalist design, you should go in for 2 rods. 3 rods are more suitable for complex room designs, and complement the other accessories you might be having in the room.
3. Is coating on the hairpin leg necessary? Which coating should I go for?
An uncoated hairpin leg which comes in copper or steel may look better, but the fact remains - rust will start to corrode the surface of the leg in a short while. If you live in areas with medium to high humidity, a powder coating is essential to prevent rust from settling on the legs. Rust can take away much of the usable life of your table’s hairpin legs, hence you should take utmost care in this regard.
Generally, hairpin legs come with powder coating which can protect your hairpin legs from damage by the elements. For those looking for pure copper or steel designs, clear powder coating is also available, which gives you long term reliability and the finish of your choice. If you’re bent on getting steel hairpin legs, galvanised steel is also available on some designs.
4. What is the height of hairpin legs I might need for my table?
This is another subjective issue, since it squarely depends on your expectation of how the table should look like in isolation, as well as how it matches with other stylistic elements in the room. For coffee tables, one can go with anything from 4 inches to 16 inches, whereas cupboards and shelves should generally stay within 6 inches. Counter-tops can go up to 28 inches, with the minimum being 12 inches generally. Benches are also not meant to go too high up.
5. Which other factors do I need to look out for?
You should also consider how long you intend to keep the table, which can affect which finish you go for. Further, the warranty is an important factor to consider too, since hairpin legs are prone to rust. It is wise to further consider whether the overall design (and not just the number of rods) of the hairpin leg goes well with the ambience of your room.
A few other factors which also should be taken into account are the dimensions of the mounting plate and the location of the holes where the screws should go into. Predrilled holes are great, however, make sure you know their diameter beforehand and don’t end up getting different sized screws. A tip here would be to get one size lower screws and upper ones too, since you’ll save time in finding out the exact measurements.
Wrapping It All Up
In case these questions are still leaving you confused over the plethora of choices on the market, fret not! You can go in for any of the three reviewed hairpin legs, each of which come with their distinctive features and designs. These products have been carefully selected from a wide variety, and you’re unlikely to go wrong with any of them.
And now, you also know the factors you need to consider before going in for the hairpin leg of your choice. These facts will go a long way in making sure you have the best, and longest experience possible with the hairpin legs you end up choosing.
Furnishing your house with functional pieces that also look great aesthetically can be a chore.
The bucket is an often overlooked and underestimated addition when it comes to providing both functionality and tying a room together. But how would you go about picking what product works for you when there are so many different options and varieties.
Buckets have come a long way from being a simple pail for mopping. They now offer a lot more in terms of build, material, function, and extra features.
To help you along, here is our complete guide to help you decide on the perfect bucket. Whatever the room may be, from a living room to a home office space, there is a bucket for any space that adds a flair of functionality and tasteful design.
With that being said, let's get right into it.
30 Types Of Buckets For Your Home
Materials
Depending on the material the bucket is made out of, the functionality can change. Certain materials have an advantage and work better in doing specific jobs over others.
Plastic
Plastic buckets are easily the most common type of buckets in any household. Being made of plastic, they are multi-purpose and durable options, able to store a variety of materials.
Coming in any color imaginable, this is the safe choice for a garden, bathroom, or any job you may need it for. Additionally, it is easy to match any room’s color scheme with its plethora of color options available.
On the other hand, plastic does not have as much of an aesthetic charm that other materials, such as wood or metal lend to a room. However, it is incredibly durable and will surely stand the test of time.
Metals
These buckets have one of the highest durability possible. This is, of course, considering it is maintained. Being made of metal, it is prone to rusting after some time; however, drying it off after using or storing it away in a secure location can prevent rust from forming.
Additionally, using them indoors is always a safe option. For example, using metal buckets as plant pots is a creative way to add a rustic vibe to any room. There are also certain metal materials that are less prone to rusting and decay, lengthening the lifespan.
These metal buckets have the ability to withstand odors without absorbing them, opening up the possibilities to more innovative functions.
Wood
One of the more traditional yet uncommon materials being used nowadays is wood. It is more commonly seen to be aesthetic than functional lately. As newer materials have been used to make buckets with better durability and functionality, wooden buckets have taken a back seat.
Susceptible to breaking down due to rot and mold, it is a better idea to look for a different option if functionality is what you are looking for. However, using wooden buckets indoors is an entirely different story. Shielded from the elements and protected from this breakdown, they are a great option that match every aesthetic.
Glass
Another of the more uncommon materials to make a bucket out of is glass. As a niche material, it works well in what it is designed for, usually filled with ice for drinks. The ice does melt, so making sure the bucket is insulated is essential.
These buckets are a beautiful but fragile item if you want to have a functional and tasteful way to display or store temperature-sensitive materials. That said, the pros of aesthetic design and functionality weighed against the fragility should be considered before picking up a glass bucket.
Size
Having multiple sizes of buckets can change what they are used for. Furthermore, the size of a bucket brings different aesthetic qualities from a decorative perspective.
Extra Small
Having extra small buckets is almost always used for purely aesthetic purposes as it is too small to lend any functionality for a task. A great idea for party favors or as a plant pot, these palm-sized buckets are loved by many for their adorable appearance and charm.
Small
Small buckets are an excellent choice for similarly sized small jobs. Whether it is displaying food at a party in servings, mixing different colored paints, or using simple plant pots, small buckets can be a niche yet a perfect sized tool for specific jobs.
Medium
Coming in at around ten quarts, these medium-sized buckets are usually used around the house for keeping drinks cool at a party or holding water while washing your car. The applications that these buckets can be used for are endless. The sizing makes it ideal for many household tasks, from storing items to transporting things; medium-sized buckets are the perfect middle ground choice.
Large
Should you require more space for larger jobs, the large bucket is an excellent purchase for any task, with ample space to get the job done. Usually measuring 15 quarts, these buckets are perfect for mopping or storing items away cleanly while still being easily accessible.
Extra Large
If you have any jobs involving larger volumes and the 15-quart bucket is insufficient, extra-large buckets are available. Usually a more niche purchase due to their size, it is perfect for storage and typically includes a lid to preserve the contents. Be it storage or holding materials, these 20-quart buckets can be a practical option for more oversized items and jobs you may have.
Unique Features
Buckets come in many different sizes, as we have seen, but the various available features are where the variety truly shines. This variety in design lends a hand mainly to the bucket’s functionality and purpose in performing specific tasks.
Included Lid
An included lid allows an entirely new world of possibilities for a bucket’s purposes. It protects the contents from outside contamination. This makes buckets with lids the go-to choice for long-term storage or for materials that need to be protected and maintained separately.
Additionally, having a lid gives you the option to store multiple buckets on top of each other, which is a great space saver. The easy snapping on of a cover is perfect for quick and easy storage for any household.
One other type of bucket with a lid is tamper-proof lids. These buckets are securely sealed for transporting food or other materials that you may not want to be opened until they reach the recipient. The lid will show if it has been opened to ensure no tampering happens en route.
Be it tamper-proof or not, having a lid is a must if keeping the contents of a bucket safe is a priority for you.
Food Safe
If you want to display food in a fun and unique way, food-safe buckets are a good idea. Be it for a potluck or buffet-style party, they can be replenished easily and lend a special touch on par with bars and restaurants.
Being approved by the FDA is what sets this bucket apart from other regular buckets. The materials it is made of are certified to be food safe. As such, the food cannot be contaminated, and at the same time, the bucket will not be affected by the food over time.
Dual Spout
Purely designed with convenience in mind, the dual spout build allows for a more effortless pouring experience. Having two spouts on the bucket removes the constant mental reminder to align the bucket to have a clean pour.
Of course, having a single spout bucket is still an option. But, if having a clean pour from one container to another with little thought involved is what you want, the dual spout is perfect for you.
Translucent
Initially, having a translucent bucket may not be the first choice for specific tasks. Due to its see-through nature, what sets this bucket apart is being able to keep tabs on how much material is left inside. For jobs requiring measurement or simply keeping tabs on how full a bucket is, an opaque bucket is a great pickup.
Partitioned
Truly a unique design, having a partition in the middle of a bucket gives you superb usability to transport two different materials at the same time. In the context of a household, it is easy to imagine using this for mopping; one side is used for clean water and the other for soapy water.
Another use could be for displaying or storing items and plants in an appealing arrangement. Easy to see and access, with its open-top design, a bucket with partitions in it is excellent for efficient storage.
Whatever the job or purpose, the partitioned bucket gives the functionality of two buckets in one. Saving both energy and money, picking one of these buckets up is an excellent idea for any home.
Reinforced
While using any bucket, it is a common occurrence for the top of the bucket to become misshapen due to the heavier loads and uses. It is easy for standard buckets to warp or even break over time when used with a handle. Reinforced buckets handle this issue by incorporating rings to reinforce the shape around the lip of the bucket.
This simple addition is enough to keep the bucket’s shape no matter how heavy the load or how many uses you put your bucket through. A reinforced bucket is ideal for more practical use over time or for jobs that deal with heavy materials.
Nesting
Nesting buckets are simple buckets save for the tapered design that allows them to be stored within each other. It is similar to a Russian nesting doll, hence the name nesting bucket.
Buying multiple units of this type of bucket is a good investment; they provide functionality when you need it but store away when not in use. This design can be helpful for those who may need multiple buckets for a specific task, such as a party or cleanup. When the job is done, they can be stacked into each other and stored away cleanly.
Included Wringer
One of the most useful buckets for the house setting, a bucket with a wringer built-in, is a hands-down value purchase. It can be a hassle to keep the mop from dripping soapy water onto the floor when mopping. This bucket wringer is the extra feature that will leave this inconvenience in the past.
There are multiple designs when it comes to buckets with a wringer. One more industrial version has two buckets on top of each other with the wringer on top of the larger water bucket to collect and hold the soapy water. Both of these buckets are on wheels in order to move them around easier.
Another design catered to the more minor household needs is a simple bucket and wringer on top to push the excess water back into the bucket. Removing the excess water and putting it back into the bucket, the wringer is efficient and saves time when mopping.
Personalized
A bucket with a simple touch of customization that sets it apart from any plain bucket has no other function than cosmetics. However, this addition adds just that much more sentimental value with that personal touch.
Any room’s décor will benefit significantly from a simple bucket with a personal flair added to it. Customizing a bucket will make it unique for a specific purpose, such as storing different items. It can also set apart different buckets for people, like having a bucket for different children’s toys.
Included Tongs
Similar to glass buckets, these buckets are usually used for storing ice. The included tongs allow you to take the ice out easily. Where this bucket differs from the glass type is the material that the bucket is made out of. They can come in a variety of finishes and designs, not just glass.
Purchasing one of these buckets is meant for those who want a cohesive design between their bar and ice bucket with matching tongs. Of course, you could buy tongs separately but getting the ice bucket and tongs as a set will ensure the aesthetic build is maintained throughout. These small touches will be sure to add to the overall décor of any home bar.
Collapsible
For those who are limited in space for storage, the collapsible bucket is a fantastic innovation in the design of buckets. With the ability to fold fully flat, they take up little to no room. Of course, with the innovative design, it is limited in the materials that it is available in.
Mainly composed of plastic, the durability is not as confidence-inspiring as a traditional bucket. It is susceptible to spilling the contents as the plastic walls of the buckets have no rigid structure and support.
As a result, it is not advisable to put any materials you don’t want being spilled in these. However, it is a unique option for many general household tasks when it comes to bucket design.
Cushioned Lids
One of the more practical features that a bucket could have is a cushioned lid. Not only does this allow a dual feature to the bucket, but it adds an extra furniture element to a room. Having an extra seating option available is great for entertaining guests.
As the bucket is doubling as a seat, it is imperative that the comfort is not compromised simply to increase functionality. On the one hand, a quality cushion will give you more function out of your bucket by adding another seating option. On the other hand, the more permanent set up as a seating arrangement limits the purpose it serves as a bucket. It is thus used as a bucket solely for storage rather than transporting materials.
Uses
A bucket can serve many purposes with its functionality. However, there are still specific purposes that some perform better in a household simply due to their material. What’s more, some buckets are specifically designed with a particular job in mind. Both design and material are what dictate their use for a specific purpose.
Mopping
One of the staple items of every house is a mop bucket for any cleanup situation. Similar to those used in industrial cleaning services by janitors and custodians, these buckets are designed specifically for mopping.
Some of them come with special features added onto a standard bucket, such as a wringer, which easily removes water from the mop. Another notable feature is a spout to pour out dirty and soapy water easily.
These buckets are also adequately sized to carry around large volumes of soapy water. As they are meant to hold dirty materials and strong cleaning products alike, they are usually made of plastics.
Storage
Buckets in a household are a common storage choice. Due to their easy stackability, variety of sizes, and ease of access, it is easy to see why they are ideal. In fact, these buckets can come in a plethora of materials that change what you can store in them.
More giant metallic units are ideal for more heavy-duty materials and items. For example, they are a perfect choice for garden sheds to store tools and gardening soil. On top of that, making it easier to store and transport them are handles for easier lifting. And having a lid on the bucket can allow you to stack these storage containers on top of each other.
Alternatively, plastic options or even wooden buckets are available for more delicate storage to lend an aesthetic addition to any space. Different color finishes allow them to fit in with the décor or style of any space, be it indoors or outdoors. Sizing also varies to fit in with any constraints you may have when it comes to space.
Sand Bucket
For those who have children in their homes or simply love the beach - a sand bucket is a great idea. It is simple to use for children, thanks to its plastic and light build. Of course, any bucket could technically be used at a beach as a “sand bucket,” but the lightweight nature and bright colors are what make this particular type shine.
A day at the beach will be made much more pleasurable with a sand bucket to build a sandcastle, fill water in a moat, or collect seashells. Bright colors help them to stand out and be found easily after playing in the sand.
Car-Wash Bucket
Not to be confused with the prior mopping bucket, a car-washing bucket serves a similar purpose of cleaning. Of course, these buckets are identical in purpose; they can be differentiated in the build and features of a car-washing option that makes it easier to clean a car.
One such difference between this variant and the mopping bucket is the size. Car washing buckets are generally smaller in size for easier maneuverability around a car. You wouldn’t want to scratch your car while cleaning it after all.
An ergonomic handle is a must to help with carrying the bucket around with one hand easily. Another feature of car washing buckets is a grit guard to prevent scratches. All these features and the design of a car-washing bucket together make it ideal for washing vehicles over other types.
Ice Bucket
Usually made of metal or glass, these buckets are insulated to hold ice without it melting. The ice bucket is an ideal option for parties or home bars, providing easy access to ice without having to repeatedly go to a freezer.
They also come with special features to help store ice more efficiently so that it doesn’t melt within minutes. Of course, handles on the sides or top that fold away will help transport the ice around easily. Furthermore, a few variants come with a lid to lock in the cold air and increase the insulation, making the ice last longer.
Ash Bucket
A simple bucket with a simple task, an ash bucket is simply for convenience’s sake. For homes with a fireplace, it will remove the need to carry the ash outside for disposal repeatedly.
Positioned next to a fireplace, you can store ash and coals over time and dispose of the entire bucket when it fills up. An attached lid is a cherry on top to ensure the ash won’t spill or be spread in the air. You wouldn’t want to risk all the ash staining your furniture or floors.
Gardening
Gardening can be a demanding physical task or hobby. To help cut down on the strain, as well as increase your efficiency, gardening buckets would be a good investment. Due to its build and special features, you will be able to tend to your garden with ease.
One unique feature of the gardening bucket is an attached adjustable strap. By wrapping the strap around your waist, it will let you carry around the bucket. As the bucket is attached, you won’t have to pause to bring your bucket around constantly. It also frees up both hands for work instead of constantly going to and from your bucket.
Saving time and energy, as well as potential body aches, a gardening bucket has multiple advantages for home gardeners.
Additionally, buckets can be used to store your plants. There is little to differentiate a bucket from a traditional flower or plant pot. This allows for a beautiful way to bring nature into your home. Hanging buckets holding your favorite flowers and plants will brighten any room.
Industrial Pail
In the event that you are doing some DIY work around the house or are working with industrial materials like paint or cement, industrial pails are the standard choice. Typically made of plastic or metal, these buckets allow for the safe storage and transport of the materials being used.
A typical industrial pail is the paint bucket. Two-gallon buckets are perfectly sized to hold paint safely with a lid to store it when not in use. Small DIY paint jobs are handled with ease with these pails at your disposal.
For larger projects, there are five-gallon-sized pails to accommodate heavy-duty materials. Be it for cement or mixing mortar, the volume of this larger bucket has ample space to help you along with any project you have.
Party Favors
Using small buckets as party favors is an excellent use for their size. Due to their easy-to-carry, palm-sized nature, using them as individual party favors is a no-brainer. Many are made of plastic due to their durability and availability in different colors and styles to match any party theme.
Continuing from the party favor theme, they can also be used to display decorations and snacks. While these sized buckets may not have many practical uses in practical tasks, they make up for it in the potential of decorating parties and special occasions.
Selecting A Bucket
To determine which bucket is right for you, it all comes down to the material and design. Some materials do have advantages over others in functionality. Similarly, sizing and additional features attached to the actual bucket help them perform specific jobs better.
Plastic and metallic buckets are multi-purpose and more durable than the glass and wooden variants. Depending on the job or task you have, a specific design can change how efficiently you can get the job done. Matching the right build to a suitable material is how you should go about selecting the right bucket for your needs.
Final Words
When having all these different materials, designs, and uses available, you can see how choosing the perfect bucket for a task can make a vast difference in your experience. It is simply a matter of combining the suitable material with the right build.
Be it for decorating or manual work, the perfect bucket for you is somewhere out there - built just for your specific needs. All you need to do is make the right pick!
There are several ways to test and find reliable CR123A batteries. For instance, you can use a multimeter to check the internal resistance and voltage fluctuations of the battery. Voltage drops are usually an indicator of poor-quality CR123A batteries.
Nowadays, CR123A batterieshave become a popular source of power for operating home appliances and devices.
However, the quality of a battery can differ from one brand to another, which makes it hard to determine which battery is ideal for your home appliances. Moreover, several factors, such as internal resistances, voltage, and others, determine the quality of a good battery.
Hence, we have compiled this guide to help you test and find high-quality and reliable batteries.
What Is A CR123A Battery?
In simple terms, a CR123A battery is a cylindrical cell that relies on lithium chemistry to produce energy for home appliances. When it comes to shape, it shares the same resemblance to a C-cell battery since it is small and compact.
Moreover, these batteries can be used for all types of applications. For example, you can use them to power both military-grade technology as well as medical appliances. Since these batteries are so widely in demand, they are usually hard to stock due to their limited availability.
Some of the top brands that manufacture these batteries are Duracell, Panasonic, and Energizer. In fact, some brands offer a charger with a rechargeable battery which makes it convenient since you can use the battery for a long period.
However, you must be very careful while storing non-rechargeable batteries since they discharge quickly. Ideally, you should avoid hot places since they damage the cell and cause the battery to discharge faster.
Most manufacturers provide clear instructions regarding storing the excess batteries in a cool and dry space since it prevents the batteries from discharging quickly. As such, the batteries can last for a long period. You canbuy CR123A batteries from a local hardware store or a nearby convenience store.
How To Test CR123A Lithium Batteries?
When it comes to checking the quality of CR123A batteries, there are several ways of testing them. In this section, we shall explore some of the common methods of testing CR123A batteries:
1. Capacity And Shelf Life
Basically, one of the best ways to check the quality of CR123A lithium-ion batteries is by checking the capacity. Batteries with high capacities are usually a good indicator of high battery performance since they have a slow discharge rate. This makes them last longer than other batteries that have low capacities.
Batteries with a good shelf life are another way of checking the quality and performance. If a battery has a short shelf life, it clearly indicates that it discharges faster. As such, it wouldn’t be helpful if you store batteries with short shelf life.
2. The Torch Test
Another way of testing the quality of different CR123A batteries is by performing a torch test. Simply take three batteries from different brands and place them in three individual torches. If a torch shines more brightly than the other two, it clearly suggests that the battery within the brighter torch delivers higher performance.
Also, if certain torches experience flickering during the test, then there is a high chance that the batteries are discharging quickly or experiencing higher voltage fluctuations. Sometimes, you might notice the torch reaching a high temperature since the battery is overheating. In such a situation, we recommend turning off the torch to prevent further increase in temperature, or else it can cause an explosion.
If the torch refuses to turn on after multiple attempts to switch it on, it signifies that the battery is dead. Consequently, the cell doesn’t have any charge to power the device.
3. Multimeter Test
This test is mostly used by professionals in the electrical and engineering field since they use this device for various purposes. However, you can easily find this device in a local hardware store, and they are affordable.
For this test, you need to take a fully recharged battery and place it between the two ends of the two receptors of the multimeter. If the battery doesn’t display any power while not being in load, it indicates that the battery is dead. On the other hand, if you notice readings on the multimeter, the battery is in optimum working condition.
But you should be careful since the battery can display higher voltages sometimes. This usually happens when the battery provides power without any load. Once you place the battery in a home appliance, it will display normal voltage reading. You can also use the multimeter to check if the internal resistance of the battery is performing the task optimally by preventing short circuits.
Are All CR123A Batteries Rechargeable?
In general, cr123 batteries are primary batteries that are designed to be disposed of once they have died out completely. As such, attempting to recharge a CR123A battery can be dangerous since it can explode and cause severe damage to your property and yourself.
On the contrary, some brands design CR123A batteries with different chemistries. This allows the users to recharge the batteries and use them repeatedly. However, only a few brands can design such batteries, and the stock is very limited. Thus, you should always check the packaging to see ifyou can recharge CR123A lithium batteries or not.
How To Test CR123A Lithium Batteries Conclusion
Like any perishable good, batteries have a limited life span, and the quality of the cell decreases over the years. Nevertheless, you can always opt for rechargeable CR123A batteries since they last much longer.
On the other hand, you can preserve the quality of the battery by following the storage instructions given by the manufacturer. For instance, fresh batteries should be stored in a cool and dry place since extreme heat can damage the cells and cause the batteries to discharge faster.
If you are storing fully charged rechargeable batteries, you should check them once in a while to see if there are any voltage drops. Besides, you can purchase a multimeter to test the quality of the batteries from time to time.
With that, we have reached the end of this guide, and we hope you found it informative. Stay safe, and see you next time!
At worst, it may even take several days. And considering that the artist has to wait for each layer of paint to dry up before progressing, it not only is a nuisance but can seriously hamper productivity.
But don’t you worry because in this article we have listed all the hacks and tricks that you need to know to quickly dry out oil paint.
Give it a read!
Learn How to Make Oil Paints Dry Faster
Paint
Before we jump into more nuanced and genius ideas of quick dry-times, we need to deal with the most basic part of the whole endeavor, i.e., paint.
When it comes to Earth colors, go for the paint which uses Iron Oxide as the pigment source. It will dry up significantly faster than other kinds of paint.
You can get the information of the pigment source, most probably, from the manufacturer’s website but sometimes it’s even labeled on the box and the retailer’s website.
Hues with Cobalt/Lead
When it comes to hues - shades with a mixture of pigments, try to opt for the ones that have cobalt and lead in the pigment mixture.
Metal or metal oxide pigments dry up faster than natural pigments. We have witnessed that with iron oxides as well.
All oil paints use some sort of oil as the emulsifier of the paint - generally, linseed, walnut, or poppy.
It is a well-known fact that oil paint that uses linseed oil as the emulsifier dry up significantly faster than ones with walnut or poppy oil - with walnut being better than poppy in that regard.
So, if drying time matters a lot to you, go paint with linseed oil. You can find that information from the manufacturer’s website as well.
Other tools
Apart from picking up the right paint, you’ll also need to use different mediums and additives for serious improvement in drying time. Here are a few things that, according to us, should help you in that pursuit:
Glue chalk gesso is a primer that absorbs a significant amount of oil from the base layer of the painting, hence, allowing it to dry up faster. It also makes the canvas and the painting much more durable.
To properly apply the gesso, use a sponge brush or a special brush called a primer to apply the gesso on the canvas. Apply only a thin layer of gesso on the canvas, and once done, let it dry thoroughly.
If you are really on the crunch, then one thing that would help is the use of a smoother surface of canvas than a textured one.
Surfaces with texture will accumulate more oil than a smoother surface, especially, when it comes to the base layer.
On the other hand, a smoother surface won’t do this. And because of this, a painting done on a smooth canvas will dry up much faster than one done on a textured canvas.
Tweak Your Process
Certain protocols can also be adopted while painting that’ll aid in the drying process. The following are some methods that will be a substantial help in that pursuit.
We have already mentioned how paint with linseed oil dry up way faster than paint with other oils like walnut and poppy.
Therefore, it’ll also be helpful if while painting, you mix the paint with linseed oil on the palette. This simple method will result in substantial improvement in the drying time of the painting.
Colorful painted on concrete wall. Abstract background. Retro and vintage backdrop.
Make it thin
Always keep in mind that, thinner layers of paint will dry up significantly faster than thicker layers. There’s no voodoo behind this. Of course, if the applied layer has more oil then it will take significantly more time to dry up.
To thin out the layer of paint you can use turpentine, which is one of the most popular mediums used for this purpose. There are also other alkyd mediums like Liquin that can achieve the same result and be harmless unlike turpentine.
Keep in mind that these solvents are to be handled with care because they can have hazardous effects. So, read the labels carefully and handle these solvents with utmost caution.
One tricky but effective method to make your painting dry up fast is by using a heat gun.
You have to be cautious when using a heat gun to dry up the painting because if it is too close to the surface, it can tear up the paint and completely ruin the artwork.
So, be sure to hold it up at least a few inches above the painting and gently hover it on the painting to get the perfect result. From our testing, the ideal temperature for the gun will be somewhere around 130 F.
Less number of layers
The less the number of layers you have in your painting, the faster it’ll dry up. Not only that, but it’ll also make finishing the painting a lot less time-consuming.
Therefore, we advise you to plan out your painting before you pick up the brush. Count the number of layers that you’ll have to use to finish the painting and if there’s any way to cut the layers down, do it.
Another thing to keep in mind is that when applying the base layer, make the paint as thin as possible. The base layer is the main culprit of accumulating excessive oil. So, if it’s possible to apply a thin coating for the base layer, it’ll significantly reduce the drying time.
Fast Drying Paint for Base Layer
The base layer of paint is one of the most notorious causes of excessively long drying time. So, it’s a no-brainer that if you apply proper precautions when painting the base layer, it’ll significantly improve the dry-up time.
Always, opt for paint with iron oxides, cobalt/lead and/or linseed oil for painting the base layer. If your base layer dries up fast then the subsequent layers as well.
Bonus Hack. One simple hack for base layer painting is to use acrylic paint rather than oil paint, if possible. It’s a known fact that acrylic paint dries up extremely fast when compared not only to oil paint but also every other medium.
Room
After using all the above tips and tricks while painting, when it comes to actually leaving the painting to dry in a room, keep the following things in mind.
Room Condition
For quick drying times, maintaining the condition of the room is extremely important. If not done so, the painting will take ages to dry up and in the worst case scenario, might even get ruined.
Of course, the room where you choose to dry up your paintings should have the least humidity possible. Keep it well-lit with natural light - through glass-paned windows. But also make sure that there is no dust in the room.
And according to us, the perfect temperature should be somewhere around 70 F.
Tools That’ll help
There are certain gadgets that should help you maintain the condition of the room. Of course, the primary goal will be to control the humidity.
The obvious tools for that purpose will be to use a dehumidifier. A cheaper option is a table fan but to use a table fan, you will have to keep the room squeaky clean - free of dust.
It’s an excellent choice to install an air conditioner in the room because it can do both the jobs of a dehumidifier and a table fan while also keeping the dust in check. But of course, it’s a much more expensive ordeal.
Conclusion
So, that’ll be all for this guide. We hope that the tips and tricks we mentioned in this article help you achieve a substantial cut in drying time.
Some of these methods need a significant investment on your part, so, we’d recommend you to take time and properly plan out your painting process well advance in time.
With that, we wish you well in your artistic endeavors and thank you for reading.
Dried paint brushes happen to the best and the most cautious of us.
How many times have you had a burst of creativity, got a great idea in your head, ran into your studio, set up your canvas only to find that all your brushes have dried acrylic paint on them and are now unusable?
Next morning you wake up, go into your studio, only to find your beloved paintbrush has now solidified into one single mass of paint-hardened bristle. Despite your best efforts to untangle, separate or wash the hairs, they are not yielding whatsoever.
We understand how bad it feels. Because of that, we have compiled this guide to walk you through all the separate options you have on how to revive a stiff acrylic-coated paintbrush.
Note: Be forewarned though, that the methods listed below might not be able to help you out as some brushes might just be far too damaged, especially if you've kept them that way for an extended period of time. These methods should only be used as a last resort after all simpler methods have failed.
How to Clean Dried Acrylic Paint Off Brushes
What Kind Of Bristles Are On Your Brush?
First things first, you need to know what kind of bristles are on your brush. They are broadly categorized into two types:-
Synthetic Brushes
If your brush has synthetic bristles, then in all likelihood removing hardened acrylic from them is an absolute lost cause. If washing with soap and water aren't working out, then you've pretty much exhausted all your options. It's very hard and almost impossible to get acrylic paint out of synthetic acrylic paint brushes.
This is because synthetic bristles simply do not hold up to the kind of harsh chemicals you need to use to get those clumps of paint coating off. They will probably, break down if they come into contact with harsh chemicals.
You can try out the methods listed below, but we can't guarantee that it'll work. But then go ahead, try it out. After all, you don't have anything to lose, do you?
Natural Bristles
If your brush is made out of natural bristles (hog, squirrel, badger bristles, etc.), you'll have a much easier time trying to get the dried-out paint off them.
These bristles are way more suitable for harsh chemical washes. Because of this, we highly recommend buying natural brushes. They may cost a little more, but they make up for that in durability and clean-ability. They'll save you a lot of money in the long run.
So without further ado, let's get down to what solutions you can use to get that dried off paint out of these brushes.
How To Get Dried Acrylic Out Of Brushes
Acetone, Nail Polish Remover
Acetone is the primary component in most nail polish removers. You can find it in most medical and cosmetic stores. Thus it would be pretty easy to get your hands on some acetone.
Dipping your paintbrush in an acetone solution will let the acetone penetrate the bristles and get rid of most of the acrylic buildup. The paint simply breaks out of the bristles and dissolves into the solvent.
Tip: Acetone solutions are quite pungent. Hence, they should be kept out of reach of small children and ideally in a room with a lot of ventilation, so that the smell airs out quickly.
Rubbing Alcohol, Isopropyl Alcohol
Isopropyl alcohol, commonly found in rubbing alcohol is another excellent choice. It has considerably less odor than acetone and works much in the same way.
The solvent penetrates right into the bristles and dissolves the paint sticking onto them. In fact, most acrylic paint removal kits you find online are basically made out of this ingredient. It's just repackaged and sold under a different brand name.
Hence, if you want to hold on to your hard earned dollars, just get the generic isopropyl alcohol. They work nearly identical to the acetone solution.
Steps On How To Use These Solvents
Once you've gotten a hold of these solvents isopropyl alcohol or acetone, the rest of the process is pretty straightforward.
Step 1
Fill up a glass jar with the solution of your choice.
Step 2
Dip the brush into it up to the level of the ferrule.
Step 3
Let it soak for a few minutes.
Step 4
Take the brush out
Step 5
Rinse with warm soapy water, preferably dish-washing detergent.
Step 6
Repeat process until all the paint clumps are gone.
The process is pretty basic and should be able to get rid of most acrylic buildups, especially if your paintbrush hasn't been in that state for too long.
Hand Sanitizing Gel
Your ever faithful hand sanitizing gel now has another use - it can be used to clean the debris off your acrylic paint brushes.
Hand sanitizing gel has pretty much the same chemical makeup as the solvents mentioned above (it uses ethyl alcohol instead.) As a result, it can be used to achieve the same results, in the same way.
In fact, we would prefer this over the others because it's easier and requires no apparatus. All you have to do is squeeze out a bit of it onto your palm and then rub your brush thoroughly and vigorously until all the debris is removed.
Repeat this process a few times, and all the clumps of paint should come out.
It's a manual process, and it might get a little messy, so ensure you have enough water handy to clean your hands and the brush afterward. Use warm soapy water for washing, just like we mentioned before.
Other solvents you can use:
Ammonia solution,
Denatured Alcohol or
Lacquer Thinner
However, using these solutions might be dangerous and pose a safety risk. In our opinion, it just isn't worth it.
Note: In all the processes that we have listed above, remember to ensure that your brush does not stay in prolonged contact with these solutions.
Don't just dip it in the solution and leave it overnight. This can be disastrous for your brush, and all the bristles might get frayed or broken.
What Else Can You Do How to Prevent Dried Paint Brushes
If you've tried out everything we've listed above, (if one of the methods mentioned above didn't work, it's highly unlikely another one will) you can still try out a few manual methods before completely abandoning hope and giving up.
Use An Old Comb And Manually Remove The Clumps
If all fails, get yourself an old comb you no longer use and use it to try to scrape off all the paint gunk of your brush. The finer the teeth on your comb, the more success you'll have with this method.
The first thing you do is wet the brush with a little water and apply a little oil. This will add some strength to the bristles and also, allow the paint clumps to slide off them a little more efficiently, while you run your comb through.
To ensure that you don't break the bristles or pull them out of the ferrule, make sure you grip the bristles and hold them firmly in place at the base near the ferrule. Doing this should prevent any accidental breakage.
Give Your Paintbrush A Trim
If you simply can't get all the paint out, the next best thing is to give the brush a trim. Hey, it's better than simply throwing it into the trash, isn't it?
Besides, you can use that trimmed brush for other painting purposes, for example, stippling. You can even get really creative with your paintings by using differently trimmed acrylic paint brushes. You might just turn a mishap into something marvelous.
Preventive Measures
As the old adage goes, prevention is always better than cure. You'll never have to go through the whole process above if you only had been more careful in the first place.
But it's not all about carelessness. These kinds of things are bound to happen unless you have a set routine or a due process in place.
How to Prevent Dried Acrylic Paint Brushes
Always Keep Water Handy
Liquid acrylic is water soluble but not dry acrylic paint is not. When you dip your brushes into the water, the paint breaks off.
It's always a good habit to keep a jar of water handy and somewhere inside your field of vision. So that when your eyes automatically wander there, you'll remember to dip the brushes in there and take it out.
While this is not much of a problem during painting as you'll be using different colors on the same brush, but you might have a few acrylic paint brushes you use once or twice and then keep separately because you don't need them presently. In all probability, you have a separate space for these brushes - the less frequently used ones.
A good idea would be to keep a jar of water alongside these brushes as well. Thus again, as soon as you're done with them, you dip the brushes in the water.
Make A Schedule
We get it! Making a schedule is annoying, painful and definitely not an artsy thing to do. But it does have its benefits though.
But if you set aside a specific time out just to clean the brushes, you can rest assured that there will never be any acrylic build up there.
Note: Very often we wash our brushes but not all the way through. As a result, some paint is leftover at the base of the ferrule or the center parts of your brushes. These areas are often overlooked and cause problems later on.
So when you're taking a timeout to wash the acrylic paint brushes, take your time and wash them as thoroughly as you can. It just takes a few seconds more.
What this break will also do, is give you a fresh perspective on your painting. You take a step back, look at your painting, and you might just figure out exactly what it's missing or how you can make it better.
Keep Regular Check
If you left your paint on your brushes overnight or only for a few hours, it might dry up, but you won't have any problems cleaning it up with any of the processes mentioned above.
However, the longer the acrylic stays on your paintbrush, the harder it becomes to salvage that paintbrush. If multiple days or weeks have gone by, it can be immensely hard to clean it up.
Thus if you keep a regular check on all your painting supplies, that situation will never come to pass, and your clean acrylic paint brushes will remain clean brushes, dried paint will be a memory of the past.
Final Words
In closing, we'd just like to remind you that the processes we talked about earlier have a relatively high chance of working, but only if the dried paint is not too old.
If the paint is not coming out, rubbing the brush extremely hard will not help your case. On the other hand, it might just break the bristles.
Remember to not let the paintbrush lie in strong chemical solutions for too long; just keep it there for a few minutes.
Don't even keep the bristles immersed in water overnight as this might bend the bristles.
If you've tried everything and it simply isn't working out, then you just have to accept it's time to bite the bullet and get yourself a new set.
Folks looking for cr123a batteries that promise long-lasting performance must opt for the Duracell Lithium Battery. Lithium batteries from Panasonic, Rapthor, and Enegitech are also reliable options because of their versatility and outstanding performance.
The best cr123a battery is widely used in smoke alarms, security systems, and other devices.
And rightly so, since the nominal voltage of these lithium batteries is 3.0 volts. Interestingly, these cylindrical batteries have a shelf life of seven to ten years.
So, are you looking forward to purchasing a cr123a battery for a smoke detector? If yes, dive in to explore the nine excellent options that are worth every penny.
POWER FOR A WIDE RANGE OF DEVICES – The Duracell 123 3...
LONG-LASTING POWER – Duracell high power CR123A Lithium...
Sitting atop our list is our favorite Duracell cr123a 3V Lithium Battery that is designed for peak performance in high-drain devices.
Equivalent to the 3V EL123, DL123, and CR17345 battery types, this cr123a lithium-ion battery is compatible with various devices apart from smoke detectors. Coming with a shelf life of about ten years, Duracell supplies its battery in a range of options– one, two, four, six, and twelve-packs, so you’re spoiled for variety.
Unlike other batteries, these ones are long-lasting and can power your device for about 30 months. So, if you can spend a tad bit, we suggest you give this Duracell battery a go.
Looking for a cr123a lithium battery for your smoke alarm that can perform well in extreme temperatures? Panasonic has got you covered with its 3V Photo Lithium batteries that function well in temperatures ranging between -40°F and 158° F.
These non-rechargeable lithium batteries boast a capacity of 1,550 mAh and provide 3 volts of power, making them perfect for smoke detectors. Their versatility doesn’t end here, as you can use them in high-end flashlights, cameras, and other devices.
Weighing only about 4.5 lbs, these batteries come in multiple packs for user convenience. However, they last only for about four months, so you might as well order extra packs for future use.
Remind: 1.These batteries are non-rechargeable. 2. Not...
1650mAh High Capacity: Each CR123A 3V lithium battery has a...
High-capacity, reliable, and long-lasting– the Rapthor cr123a lithium non-rechargeable batteries are a perfect alternative to alkaline batteries.
Packed with 3 volts, each unit offers a capacity of 1,650 mAh– undoubtedly, one of the highest capacities that you can get with cr123a batteries. So, rest assured, they will power your smoke detector for a long time.
Furthermore, they are UL-certified for built-in PTC (pressure, temperature, control) protection against overheating and over-current. Besides, they come with a shelf life of 10 years, so you can store them without worries.
The batteries are covered with a 100% satisfaction guarantee, so you can return them if unsatisfied. The only downside is that you cannot use the Rapthor cr123a batteries for Arlo cameras.
【Fits For】 These 123a batteries can use for Smart Lock,...
Sold in a pack of six, the Enegitech cr123a 3V lithium non-rechargeable batteries are compatible with a variety of smart devices. Therefore, you can use them to power flood and freeze sensors, laser pointers, and flashlights along with smoke detectors.
Thanks to the high-quality cell used in manufacturing, the batteries can be stored for up to ten years. These batteries are equipped with an EPTC smart protection chip that makes them safe for use in every setting.
As each of them offers a capacity of 1,600 mAh, you can rest assured that they are built to last long. However, the brand offers these batteries only in six-pack options, unlike the others that offer multiple packs.
CERTIFICATIONS—EEMB CR123A is CE and UN 38.3 compliant. It...
Searching for lithium batteries that work in both extreme hot and cold environments without malfunctioning? Your search ends here because EEMB cr123a lithium batteries power smoke detectors in temperatures ranging from -40°F to 185°F.
Each of the 3V batteries has a capacity of 1,500 mAh, which means they are high in energy density and will last three to five times more than alkaline batteries. Therefore, you can use them in your smoke alarm without thinking twice.
Available in multiple packs, these batteries are UN and CE-compliant, and UL-certified, which makes them a dependable option. Other than smoke detectors, you can insert these batteries in camcorders, electronic doorbells, and other devices.
Known for manufacturing the highest-capacity batteries that are high in durability, Bevigor doesn’t disappoint us when it comes to its cr123a 3V lithium batteries. Supplied in only an eight-pack option, these 3V lithium batteries have a power capacity of 1,500 mAh, ensuring long-lasting performance.
In addition to being UN38.3, UL, CE, and ROHS safety-certified, these batteries are tested under strict quality control standards to make sure they pass every criterion.
As no harmful compounds are used in manufacturing these batteries, you can store them for upto ten years in the storage box. Though these batteries are perfect for smoke detectors, you can also use them to power Arlo cameras, electric meters, electronic doorbells, and so on.
Ideal for a wide range of applications, the NVI Lithium 3V Non-Rechargeable Batteries are perfect for powering smoke detectors.
These 1,650 mAh batteries are designed to be safe for use both indoors and outdoors, and their CE, UL, and ROHS certification testify the same. On top of that, they feature PTC protection thermistors to prevent batteries from overheating.
Highly striking is the fact that each battery is equipped with a safe air hole and an explosion-proof cap. To top it off, these batteries are anti-explosive and anti-corrosive, thanks to their thick steel shell design. Not to forget, these batteries work well in extreme weather ranging between -40°F and +140°F.
Available in multiple options from one-piece to 50-piece packs, these are 3 Volt non-rechargeable lithium batteries , weighing less than 0.04 pounds.
PKCELL certainly lives up to its tagline, “Green energy, easy life,” and that’s why its batteries are free from mercury and cadmium. Like others on the list, these batteries score high on versatility and are compatible with smoke detectors, torches, cameras, and other electronic devices.
And as they come with a rating of 1,500 mAh, you can rest assured that they will last longer than most options. Note that these batteries aren’t safe for use in extremely hot regions.
NOTE: Not recommended Compatible with Arlo security cameras,...
High-performance 3V lithium batteries, Replacement for any...
With a 1,650 mAh capacity, these 3V batteries from FARSAIL are a reliable option for smoke detectors because they are designed for high-drain devices. Other than that, you can use them in digital cameras, flashlights, medical equipment, and other high-tech devices, except for Arlo cameras.
What’s more, these non-rechargeable units can be used as a replacement for any standard 3-volt lithium battery like 123a, cr123, and 123.
If stored properly, the batteries can last for as long as ten years without losing their efficiency. Designed for long-lasting performance, these units can withstand freezing and humid climates ranging from -45°F to 185°F.
CR123A Battery For Smoke Detector Buying Guide
Still unsure which cr123a battery will be the right choice for your smoke detector? –You’re not alone! Like you, there are many people who often get stuck in the decision-making process, especially if they’re a first-time buyer.
But don’t worry; we’ve got you covered with this buying guide, where we’ve mentioned some important factors that you must keep in mind while shopping. Let’s check them out.
1. Battery Life Of Lithium Batteries
Let us ask you a question-- what are cr123a batteries popular for?Of course, they are much sought-after for their exceptional battery life and extended durability. So, the first thing you must check is the battery life the brands offer with their battery sets.
In this regard, always check the power rating mentioned by the brand in the description of the product. While some prefer batteries with 1,500 mAh capacity, others opt for a battery rating of 1,650 mAh . Ideally, going for batteries with high ratings is the best bet because you won’t have to replace them soon.
Many alarm manufacturers mention the power rating and the battery size that are compatible with their devices, so make sure you check the instruction manual.
2. Shelf Life
Another crucial factor that you must consider is the shelf life of the batteries since they are often stored as a backup for extended periods. When shopping for batteries for your smoke alarm system, look for options that come with a shelf life of at least ten years.
3. Budget
Rarely do cr123a batteries come in single packs; most brands sell them in multiple packs ranging from a two-piece to 50-piece options. Make a budget so that you don’t spend more than required.
And when purchasing batteries, weigh the price with the capacity offered because some brands offer more units at a lesser price.
CR123A Battery For Smoke Detector Verdict
When it comes to smoke detectors, cr123a lithium batteries make a great choice because of their large power capacity and shelf life.
From budget buys to high-end options, they are available in various price ranges, so finding the one that suits your budget won’t be much of a problem. Before we call the curtains for the day, here’s a quick rundown of our favorites from the list.
For simple DIY projects or most everyday projects, super glue is the best solution!
Metals can be found everywhere and are used in everything from household items to large machinery and decorative. And, if you're wondering, does super glue work on metal to metal applications, the answer is yes. Super glue forms a strong bond with a metal surface, but only for a short period.
Although, in the case of metal to wood, super glue lasts quite a lot longer than metal-to-metal. In fact, among some high quality glue for metal to wood are super glues. If you have any doubts about how capable super glue is for wood, check out our exclusive article on can you use super glue on wood.
In case you’re wondering whether super glue can stick metal to metal, the short answer is it depends on the type of metal surfaces. Super glue isn’t that effective for smooth metal pieces. Gluing two metal pieces is not at all as easy as gluing two pieces of leather together, check out the full article to know more on that topic.
So, without further ado, let’s dive in!
What Is A Super Glue?
Super Glue, industrially known as cyanoacrylate adhesive (as it contains ethyl cyanoacrylate), is a high-strength, instant, and fast-bonding adhesive that can bond almost any kind of material. These adhesives are known for their temperature and water-resistant properties and are primarily used with wood, most plastics, metal, stone, paper, and many other materials.
Although super glue works well with almost any material, you shouldn’t use it on wool, cotton, or anything that can be placed in an oven, microwave, or dishwasher. This is because the glue isn’t food-safe.
Super glues exist in either liquid or gel forms. Liquids are ideal for penetrating fractures or cracks and dry faster than gels, but their gel counterparts create a more flexible bond. Also, gels drip less due to their higher viscosity, so you have greater control over projects requiring greater precision or vertical application like fixing delicate flatware or building models.
Localite super glue is currently the best glue on the market that comes with a patented-side squeeze design for precision application and easy gluing in tough-to-reach areas.
Who Invented Super Glue
Dr. Harry Coover, a part of the wartime research team, invented the super glue in 1942. The team was tasked to develop clear plastics to use in precision gun sights. And a substance with exceptional stickiness was discovered but not used at the time.
After a few years, in 1958, Coover realized the potential of cyanoacrylate and started to manufacture the glue for commercial sale. It became a widely popular and helpful household adhesive within a few years.
How Does Super Glue For Metal Work?
Cyanoacrylate forms an incredibly strong adhesive bond with almost any surface instantly, and the only thing it needs to set is water. Now that most objects already have a small portion of water in their formulation, these adhesives do an excellent job of sticking them quickly and efficiently.
Furthermore, air contains a trace of water in the form of humidity, so when molecules come into contact with it, they form a kind of plastic mesh. As the glue hardens, the mesh strands cannot move, strengthening the bond. However, a lack of adequate water would halt the bonding process and prevent the adhesive from hardening.
Super glue takes only a few seconds to dry and set. But, to attain a full bond strength, keep it undisturbed for a minimum of ten minutes.
Does Super Glue Work On Metal?
As stated earlier, super glue certainly works on metal, but short term. A metal super glue binds objects with porous surfaces better than smooth surfaces like metal and concrete surfaces. Let’s explain why.
The working of glue with the metals is divided into two parts. One is cohesion between the molecules of metal glue, while the other is adhesion between the glue and the metal surface.
Evidently, super glue is engineered to have higher cohesion levels and form a cross-linking structure as it is fully cured. But the real challenge lies in the bonding of metal atoms and glue molecules.
The bond between two metal surfaces doesn’t form unless there’s a charge transfer from metal to glue. And the polar functional groups present in the glue serve as connectors between the glue and the metal.
In simple words, the reaction between the metal surface and glue molecules forms a bond between the two. However, as these adhesive forces deteriorate, the bond between metal and glue weakens, and the glue can no longer hold two metal bolts together. So, super glues typically adhere to metal surfaces for a shorter period.
How To Glue Metal?
Gluing metal involves only a few steps, and the right glue, of course.
Step 1: Preparations
We recommend working in a workshop or a well-ventilated area with adequate space to handle all the necessary materials well. Use protective papers or clothes to cover up the furniture. Then conduct a thorough survey of the parts and test the fit. Make sure to remove any particles or fragments obstructing a seal.
Step 2: Clean The Metal
Metal surfaces need to be dry and clean before applying any glue. So, remove any dirt, dust, grease, wax, or oil using a clean damp cloth. Also, most metals have rust deposited on their surfaces, so make sure to clear them up using fine-grit sandpaper.
Step 3: Join Metal Pieces
Position the pieces and press the prepared surface firmly to ensure a tight seal without gaps. Leave the parts undisturbed for a few minutes to form a bond.
Metal epoxy adhesives take longer to bond, and you might need to clamp them for at least an hour. Although metal glues and polyurethane glues cure faster than epoxies and ordinary glues, clamping is recommended for stronger bonds. Keep the pieces undisturbed overnight for full bond strength.
And clean off excess glue using acetone or mineral spirits.
What Safety Measures To Take When Applying A Super Glue?
To maintain safety while using super glue, always work in a well-ventilated area such as a larger room with multiple windows open and a working fan. The more air flows around your workspace, you’ll inhale fewer fumes. You can also glue outside if you don’t have access to such rooms.
After finishing the work, take a few minutes to wash off any glue from your skin. It would be better to wear nitrile gloves when working with super glue. This is because the skin is made of crevices, cracks, pores, and grooves, which provide the glue with a perfect surface to grab onto. Moreover, the skin is saturated with water, which activates the hardening process of the glue.
How To Remove Super Glue From Metal?
A. Collect Required Items
To remove super glue from metal, you need the following items:
A sponge
Clean rag
Cotton pads or balls
Nail polish remover or acetone
Plastic scraper or a putty knife
Rubber gloves
B. Apply And Scrape
Put on your gloves and soak a cotton pad or ball in a nail polish remover or acetone. Apply the cotton to the excess glue for five to ten minutes. When it feels like loosening a bit, use a plastic scraper, putty knife, or a razor blade to scrape off the glue. Be careful not to scratch the surface.
C. Wipe And Repeat If Required
With most glue removed from the surface, repeat the above steps to eliminate any leftover residue. And once all adhesive is removed, use the sponge to clean the metal surface using soapy water and a clean rag to dry it off.
Does Super Glue Work On Metal Final Words
That’s all we’ve to tell you about using super glue on the metal!
But before leaving, here are a few tips for using super glue on the metal. After creating a rough surface using sandpapers, add a few tiny drops on a single metal piece and not on both. It minimizes the risk of using too much glue, that’ll stop the parts from sticking together.
After gluing the pieces together, secure the parts using clamps. It allows the creation of the needed strong bonds and might cut down on the drying time.
We’ll now wrap up this guide. See you again next time!
Now, you don't need to be a chemistry grad to understand the nature and properties of this compound. But a little insight will help you work in the right direction. As gardening enthusiasts, we all want our plants to thrive and attain optimal growth.
But some factors like poor magnesium or sulfur content in the soil, lack of nutrients, weeding, etc., can interfere in the growth stage of plants. That's where Epsom salt comes into the picture, its health-giving white crystals nurturing your plants with much-needed minerals.
Without further ado, let's learn more about this unique ingredient.
Epsom Salt For Greener Gardens
Epsom Salt - A Quick Break Down
Before we discuss the benefits of Epsom salt, let's talk a bit about its composition. This white substance is essentially a mineral compound that works as a superfood for plants and trees. Long story short, Epsom salt or Magnesium Sulphate (MgSO4) is a natural and non-toxic vitalizer that can enhance nutrient absorption and regulate enzymes in plants.
The compound was originally discovered in Epsom and is now a part of a healthy lifestyle for many. For instance, it can help people suffering from magnesium deficiencies and other ailments. However, in this guide, we'll be primarily focusing on its positive impact on plants.
Here, we’d like to mention that even though it looks very much like regular table salt, it does not consist of sodium chloride. In fact, table salt can harm plant life and have a range of other ill-effects.
Advantages Of Epsom Salt In Gardening
Boosts The Germination Process
Magnesium is a key mineral that promotes seed germination by providing nourishment and strengthening cells. During this nascent stage, seeds quickly lose sulfur, so it's important to supply them with the essential nutrients.
Mix a tablespoon of Epsom salt in 1 gallon of water and sprinkle the solution on the seed bed. Alternatively, you may add the salt directly to the soil before planting the seeds. If you're growing wildflowers or grass seeds, distribute 1 cup of Epsom salt every 100 sq ft.
Combine it with the soil and water the area generously. Top up the supply by pouring Epsom salt solution on the seedlings each month during the growth stage.
Helps Facilitate Transplant
Now, this is something most gardening enthusiasts are familiar with. Any plant, when taken out from its original location and replanted somewhere else, can undergo a shock. This is especially common when you remove overgrown plants from a pot and put them in the garden, yard, or a larger pot.
That said, transplant shock arises due to a disrupted root system and the subsequent failure in root integration. When a plant fails to establish itself, it gradually dies off due to a lack of nutrition and limited water intake. While most plants undergo this shock when replanting or repotting, the right care can help them acclimatize better and faster.
That's where Epsom salt comes in handy, as it helps plants absorb nutrients when they are replanted. Simply put some salt at the bottom of the hole dug for replanting, and you're good to go. Also, make sure to provide your plants with sufficient water and use Epsom salt-infused water for a few months to keep it healthy and thriving.
Supplements Nutrient Absorption
Based on scientific evidence, magnesium sulfate helps plants increase overall nutrient absorption, which in turn spurs timely growth. Basically, it supplements cell uptake of essential minerals like phosphorus, nitrogen, and sulfur.
These nutrients play a vital role in root growth as well as foliage density, and ideally, they should be present in soil from the get-go. However, sometimes nutrients can wash out or leach through the ground, thereby causing a deficit and impeding plant growth.
In such cases, we suggest adding Epsom salt as it rejuvenates the plants and provides them with the necessary minerals and vitamins.
Helps Produce Greener Leaves
Let's take a trip back to 5th-grade science and talk about the green pigment in plants - chlorophyll. Magnesium is a key mineral that produces chlorophyll needed for photosynthesis. This process is essential for the survival of plants wherein they capture light energy to convert CO2, water, and minerals into organic compounds (food source).
For this to happen, plants and trees largely depend on solar energy, the lack of which can cause yellowing of leaves and a general loss of vitality. Therefore, it's important for plants to receive sufficient sunlight and, at the same time, enough minerals so they can produce much-needed chlorophyll.
Prepare an Epsom salt solution by mixing one 1 tablespoon of the compound in 4 cups of water and spray it directly on the leaves to ensure better magnesium uptake.
Enhances Flavors
Epsom salt may not have the same atomic makeup as table salt, but it works as a flavor enhancer in fruit-bearing plants. Prepare a batch of MgSO4 solution by adding 1 tablespoon of the ingredient to 1 gallon of water.
Use it liberally during the growing season and apply it near the roots of trees for the best results. Alternatively, you may sprinkle the salt directly on the soil bed at least 3 times a year. So, whether you're growing nuts, grapes, berries, peppers, or tomatoes, Epsom salt treatment will provide you with flavor-infused fruits.
Repels Garden Pests
While Epsom salt is water-soluble, it's quite useful in drier climate areas where minerals are less likely to wash away. Therefore, if you live in such a place, you may distribute the salt across your garden area, especially around plant bases, to repel pests.
MgSO4 is much like Diatomaceous earth in nature, which makes it a natural pest deterrent. So, if you're worried about your plants being attacked by snails and slugs, this is one of the most inexpensive yet effective ways to deal with it.
Works As A Fertilizer
You'd be surprised to know that Epsom salt doubles as a fertilizer, especially if you're looking to increase the level of magnesium and sulfur in the soil. There are two ways to do this - you may either mix it with fertilizer and add it to the soil or water your plants with the MgSO4 solution.
The first method works well right after planting, whereas the latter can be used throughout the growth stage. Other than that, you may incorporate the salt into the soil around the plant base using the plant height as a yardstick for measuring the required amount of salt. To explain further, use a tablespoon of Epsom salt per 1 ft of the plant height.
This practice is especially effective in gardens and orchards, where you want a plentiful yield of fruits and flowers. While some plants can tolerate a dip in magnesium and sulfur levels, most cannot, and hence they begin to show signs of nutrient deficiency.
The most common symptom of magnesium deficiency is the yellowing of the leaves. More often than not, the leaf-edges turn yellow, and you can also find a yellow pattern in the center. On the other hand, lack of sulfur causes the yellowing and browning of newer leaves. Either of these anomalies can drastically impact bloom rate and impede growth.
Grows Lush Green Lawns
The lack of magnesium in your soil should not stop you from growing a lush green grass pad, and as such, Epsom salt will help you achieve your dream lawn. If you're not sure about how much salt you need to apply, then just follow the recommendation of the Epsom Salt Council.
According to them, 3 lbs of Epsom salt should be spread across an area of 1250 sq ft for the best results. After applying the salt, don't forget to water the area. However, make sure that the minerals do not wash away.
Works As A Foliar Spray
By now, you already know that plants can absorb magnesium through leaves. Meaning, you can use Epsom salt solution as a foliar spray to up the magnesium level in plants. This is a care measure that you may undertake throughout the plant's lifetime, thereby ensuring healthy growth and bountiful produce.
Besides, regular application of this foliar spray will help your plants hit growth milestones on time. To make the most out of your solution, mix 1tablespoon of salt to 1 gallon of water and spray it on blooming plants once every month. However, if your plants are prematurely yellowing, it's best to sprinkle the mix directly on the soil.
Nourishes Houseplants
Some houseplants get a bad rap for being too sensitive and dying early on despite sufficient care. If you're worried about the same outcome, use Epsom salt to boost their nutrition level. Since it's a pH neutral compound, MgSO4 is gentle on houseplants and can help them reach their full potential.
Mix 2 tablespoons of Epsom salt into 1 gallon of water and apply it directly on the leaves for higher mineral uptake. Or, depending on the plant height, you may add 1 tablespoon of salt per foot to the soil. Ideally, you should administer this mineral compound to your plants every month and note the difference in growth and foliage density.
Produces Gorgeous Roses
Epsom salt is a vitalizing agent that benefits both newly-planted and established rose plants. To get the most beautiful blooms, you must add the salt in the hole before planting the roses.
In the case of full-grown rose buses, use the Epsom salt solution, prepared in 1 tablespoon to 1-gallon ratio directly on the leaves. This application is strictly seasonal, so spray the plants once in spring when they start to flower.
Aids In Removing Tree Stumps
Depending on the thickness of the tree trunk, removing stumps can turn out to be a costly affair. So, if you don't want to spend several dollars in the stump removal process, use Epsom salt to do it yourself.
It may not be a conventional approach per se but a somewhat effective one that can simplify the process. For starters, you'll have to make multiple holes on the top of the stump using a ½-inch electric drill bit. Keep them a few inches apart and continue drilling till the holes reach half the depth of the tree stump.
After that, pour Epsom salt in the holes and add enough water to moisten the salt grains. Make sure not to saturate the salts. Once you're done with that, cover the tree stump with a waterproof material to keep out rain and moisture while it cures. Eventually, the MgSO4 will dehydrate the stump and kill the living cells.
When that happens, you can easily ax off most of the stump and dig up the entire root system underneath the soil.
Eradicates Weed
While MgSO4 nourishes all types of vegetation, it has proved to be an excellent weed eliminator when combined with other substances. Simply add 2 cups of Epsom salt and 1 cup of dish soap to 1 gallon of white vinegar.
Spray the mixture on weed-infested areas, and soon enough, the unwanted growth will start to wilt. However, if you want to stop them from reclaiming the soil, heat the solution, and then sprinkle it across the area. Doing so will attack the roots and prevent weeding in the long run.
How To Use Epsom Salt With Flowering Plants
Epsom salt is the key to fuller buds and perky blooms. So, if you want your flowering plants to reach their full potential, make sure to throw in some MgSO4 in the mix. More often than not, flowers experience magnesium deficiency during the blooming process.
Therefore, we recommend using a foliar spray or a watering solution regularly to lengthen the flowering cycle. Also, it helps plants to rebloom faster so you can enjoy plentiful blossoms throughout the season.
Besides, if you're growing continual bloomers, administering Epsom salt ensures richer green pigment and bigger crowns. As mentioned earlier, magnesium increases the production of chlorophyll in plants. As a result, the plants thrive, providing higher yields every flowering season.
For optimal use, follow this application technique: once a year, mix Epsom salt into the soil surrounding the flowering plant. Top it up with a batch of dissolved salts when the new vegetation crops up.
How To Use Epsom Salt With Vegetable Plants
In general, Epsom salt can benefit the majority of vegetable plants, but it particularly works wonders for tomatoes and peppers. This is mainly because both these plants are naturally deficient in magnesium.
In tomatoes, MgSO4 prevents rots, and that goes for squash varieties as well. Other than that, it enables plants to establish a deeper root system and produce a higher yield. Incorporate the salt into the soil while planting the veggies so they can access the necessary minerals from the get-go.
After that, keep spraying the plants with the salt solution every two weeks or so, to provide them with a consistent supply. You may also administer a foliar spray but be careful not to dampen the leaves too much.
Final Words
That's all, folks.
We hope this elaborate guide has been able to provide you with enough information on Epsom salt and its varied applications in gardening. But before you go ahead and buy your own supply of this nourishing compound, here's some advice.
When you're purchasing Epsom salt for your vegetation, buy only those brands which are rated as agriculture-grade. That said, agriculture grade MgSO4 is meant for outdoor and plant-use only and not suitable for human consumption.
In case you want to include this salt in your diet, buy something which is FDA and USP-approved and hence suitable for intake. Other than that, these salts have laxative properties, so be careful to avoid contamination, and keep the stuff away from pets.
Furthermore, make sure to wear protective gloves while preparing a salt solution or mixing it with soil. Since magnesium-sulfate can be absorbed through the skin, avoid contact at all costs. On that note, we'd like to take your leave.
One one hand it gives you a lot of time to think and manipulate the colors on your painting. On the other hand, it might get frustrating to wait for the first layer to dry up before you put in the next layer.
The malleable nature of oil paints, in addition to the depth, and vibrancy of its pigment quality, makes oil color the choice of paint for many artists. If only there were a way you could plan out the drying time and maybe speed it up as well, so you could be more productive.
So How Long Does It Take For Oil Paints To Dry?
The short answer for this question is that, "It depends."
There's no definite way to know for sure how long it will take. It could be as little as a day and as long as five days to a week.
Most artists generally accept that it's a long process and they don't have any problems with it. Instead, they have come to love the process, because of all the time they get during painting. This time allows them to experiment and try out new and novel ideas with their paintings.
Here in this guide, we'll list out the different factors that influence and lengthen drying time, and then we'll write down a few methods by which you can combat these factors and speed up the process.
Factors Which Decide Oil Paint Drying Time
Environmental Conditions Like Temperature, Light, Humidity
The local climate of the place where you do your painting determines to a large degree how long it will take for your paint to dry.
The best possible environment for quick drying is, of course, dry arid areas like a desert or somewhere inland where there are no water bodies. The worst possible situation is a cold and wet place, somewhere like London.
What Can You Do To Speed It Up
Warm, dry air is best. So if you have a radiator in your house, keep it close to the radiator. But not too close though, or the oil on your painting might start cracking up.
Basements are more humid than the rest of the house. So don't set up your wares in the basement. Instead, consider a well-ventilated area like a garage or a room with a lot of windows.
Also, try to keep your paintings in a well-lit place. Storing them in continuous darkness is going to make the paint slowly turn yellow.
The Pigments and Colors You Are Using
Each oil-color pigment (red, black, white, blue, etc.) has a different composition. This is because different colors are made from various separate sources, which can be artificial or natural.
Unlike acrylic colors, oil colors don't exactly dry up, i.e., they do not evaporate. Instead, they get oxidized, which is a chemical reaction between the paint and the oxygen present in the air. Depending on the chemical makeup of the particular paint, it might take longer for certain colors (up to a week for some cadmium hues) or shorter for others ( one or two days for cobalt blue).
Here's a quick rundown on how long it takes for the most common paints to dry up, oxidize.
While there isn't really anything you can do about how long it takes for the colors to dry, you can't be expected only to use colors which have a quick drying time. That will be severely restrictive for your painting. So if you want to utilize your entire color palette, here are a few workarounds which will be a big help to you.
- Paint in layers
One of the best features of oil painting is that you can paint in layers. Paint one layer, and then paint more layers on top of it to make a detailed, intricate painting which has depth and realism.
A very commonly used principle taught in most art schools and employed by most artists is the "fat over lean" principle. This principle basically means that the thin layers go under the thicker ones. The "fatter" layers are painted over the "leaner" ones.
The bottom layer or the base layer of the painting is called the underpainting. This is where you define the general layout and organization of your piece. All your basic shapes and elements get drawn on this layer.
Most underpaintings (the bottom-most layer) are made with one or two colors which are of a quick-drying type (like burnt umber.) You can expect this paint to dry up by the end of the day or take a maximum of two days. Make sure to keep the layer as thin as possible also. This will also speed up the drying process.
This technique is also known as "slow over fast." The 'slower,' more detailed layers are painted on top of the 'faster' mono or bi-colored layers. This practice also prevents cracking of the upper layers.
When you're painting the upper layers, our suggestion is just to let nature run its course and dry the paint out over the due course of time. This is how oil paintings are meant to be done, and this is what makes them so brilliant. Be sure to store your art in a safe place, away from kids and pets.
- Make An Underpainting Of Acrylic Paints
Oil painting is incredibly versatile in that it can be used to paint even over other types of colors like acrylic. Now painting an underlayer with acrylic has its advantages and disadvantages.
The primary advantage is that acrylic dries a lot faster than oil colors. It will take a maximum of 30 minutes and will dry almost instantaneously if you're painting outdoors.
The disadvantages, however, are that acrylic becomes considerably darker when they dry up and also give off a plastic feel that many artists intensely dislike. It simply lacks the fluidity of an oil painting. Because of these disadvantages, it is very rarely used by artists in spite of it's exceptionally fast drying time.
If you're hard pressed for time, this is the best method you have to speed up your painting considerably, maybe at the cost of a little quality.
- Work On Multiple Paintings Simultaneously
This is another trick widely utilized by painters everywhere. While one of your paintings is drying, follow up and continue on an old painting or start a new one.
This technique will help you to be productive while not losing touch with your creative process in the middle of long breaks while your paint dries.
The Oil Color Solvent/Medium Which You Are Using
The amount of oil used in your painting and the oil-to-color ratio is also a very important factor in the drying time of your paints. The less the amount of oil used, as in the 'thinner' the paint layer is, the faster it will dry.
There are also different types of oil solvents available on the market. You choose the most suitable one depending on the amount of fluidity and consistency you want in your painting.
When it comes to different oils, the fastest drying oils are Linseed oil and Alkyds.
Safflower oil is a moderately fast drying oil while the slowest drying oil is Poppy Seed oil.
Most people use linseed oil for painting, whereas poppy seed oil is excellent for keeping your paint brushes wet in between painting sessions. Alkyd oils are not a traditional, natural solvent and are made out of an alkyd resin.
What Can You Do To Speed Up The Process
You are not entirely at the mercy of the elements when it comes to the kind of oil solvent you are using. There are a few methods you can apply which can significantly expedite the process of drying of your paints.
Paint thinners are usually made of an odorless mineral spirit like ether or they are made out of turpentine. Applying these thinners to your paint thin the oil paint layer itself, which makes for quicker drying. Remember when we said, thinner layers dry faster than thicker layers.
These solvents aren't without their set of problems though. The first problem is that they give your oil painting a watercolor-like consistency. Thus you should ideally only apply these solvents to the first layer or the underpainting.
The second problem is that if you apply too much of these thinners, your painting might dry so fast that it peels off. This again makes paint thinners suitable for only the bottom-most layer where it won't cause serious harm to your painting.
Make sure you get the artist grade products as the standard variants are incredibly harmful to the environment and also produce toxic fumes. If you're really in a hurry, we would suggest you use turpentine over mineral spirits like ether as they generally work much faster.
Alkyd colors are also frequently used to hasten drying times and have of now, become a staple in most studios. They are made of pigment and oil-modified alkyd resin, which acts as a binder. This causes the paint to dry more rapidly.
Alkyd oil colors offer all the buttery feel and the versatility of oil colors but with a much quicker drying time. They start drying an hour into the application but remain wet, as in, workable for many hours after that. Some artists think alkyd paints are a little sticky as compared to traditional oil colors.
A good idea would be to substitute some of your most frequently used oil colors with alkyd replacements. Because these colors will be used in a number of mixtures, it will speed up the overall process of painting.
However, do remember that although regular oil paint can be layered over alkyds, alkyds should never be layered over oil. The less flexible alkyd may crack, ruining your whole painting.
Artist drawing with acrylic paint
Final Words
Although the techniques mentioned above will help speed up the process of drying, most of them are best utilized in the bottom layers only.
You can use paint thinners in the top layers, but that might hamper the fluidity of the painting which defeats the purpose of oil painting in the first place.
We recommend you use the techniques mentioned above on the underpainting and then paint the layers above the traditional way. The fluidity and buttery feel is what gives oil painting it's edge and drawing "naked" will help you get a better appreciation of how the colors work and blend together to create a masterpiece.
Well, that's it from us. Thank you for reading. Until next time!
A couple of weeks ago, I found my stash of old coins that I collected as a child. Some of these coins have since then been discontinued, but I could not bring myself to throw them away or give them back to the bank. So while looking through Pinterest, I stumbled across some pretty looking DIY projects that use copper pennies and silver nickels.
Learn How to Make a Penny Backsplash
1. I had been planning to install a new backsplash for my kitchen, but I had not found anything unique to inspire me. However, these penny DIY projects made me want to use the old coins to make my own new backsplash. There was no better way to display my collection than this!
Now it’s quite simple to make your own penny backsplash. According to the tutorial I followed, you will need the following things:
Pennies
CLR Cleaner
Super Glue/Silicone adhesive (Make sure it’s heatproof and waterproof for extended utility in kitchens)
Grout
WD-40
Magic Eraser Dirt Cleaner
Spray lacquer, or resin and hardener
2. Start with cleaning the pennies with the CLR cleaner. If you do not have CLR, you can use some other rust remover too. Soaking the dirtiest pennies in coca-cola or liquid tartaric acid will surely help.
The number of pennies you will need depends on the area of your backsplash. You could also get a few dollars converted to pennies from the bank. It also helps add variation to the color.
3. Next, clean the kitchen surface that you are going to use, and start gluing the cleaned and dried pennies in the pattern you desire. It will take about 24 hours for the glue to cure completely. You could cut the pennies in half if you wish to have a straight edge for the rows.
4. Adding small pieces of leftover tiles or colored glass pieces to create a boundary for the backsplash will make it look beautiful. It will take around 5 hours for the entire gluing process to be done.
When the adhesive has dried after 24 hours, use WD-40 to clear out excess glue from the coin surfaces. It will help give your project a clean finished look and prepare for the grouting step.
Make sure you clean out random blots of dried glue for a straight finish. Wiping the coins with Magic Eraser and a steel wool will help with these blots.
5. Now comes the grouting step of the project. It will take about 10 minutes to complete grouting the backsplash, and the nest 20 minutes for it to dry. Apply another round of Magic Eraser after the grout has dried.
To make your copper pennies shine a little longer without any stains, you could go an extra mile and coat the backsplash in lacquer. Using resin and hardener instead will give a permanent transparent epoxy coating to the backsplash.
6. The finished backsplash project will look like this! This penny backsplash will give a rustic metallic look to your kitchen, and you will definitely be proud of your successful kitchen project. With demands in variation of colors and styles, ceramic and glass penny tiles or templates are readily available for sale.
If you want to go for something which does not look simple, like the one above, or something with different patterns and designs, you could take inspiration from some of these brilliant ideas –
1. This design is made with unpolished old copper pennies and new shiny ones. Using the darker rusted coins with new shiny coins create different patterns. This backsplash has a symmetrical design, which uses curved and floral patterns.
It also uses pennies from other countries. These pennies were stuck to Musselbound adhesive tile mats for perfect shaping. The grouting held these mats together, and behold! There is a henna inspired design for your penny backsplash.
2. This copper penny backsplash is quite impressive. It has been made on a detachable wooden frame. They calculated the total area of the kitchen backsplash, and the number of pennies that can fit perfectly in the wooden frame.
The number of pennies used is approximately 1.5 thousand. If manufactured penny tiles seem expensive, this copper penny design can actually be replicated with a tight budget. The diamond shaped pattern gives the overall backsplash a refreshing look. The epoxy layer helps keep the backsplash clean and makes it durable.
3. If you adore geometric shapes and designs, this idea is quite easy to recreate. It looks quite hypnotizing to look at. The concentric diamond shapes are alternately fixed to give this trippy effect.
You could try different shapes like circles, squares, and triangles as per our desire. Using copper pennies and silver nickels for alternating bands can give a brilliant look to the backsplash.
4. This elaborate copper penny wall design is absolutely one of my favorites. If you are not interested in making the regular floral or geometric patterns on your kitchen wall, you can go for something abstract and pretty. Like this tree trunk design.
You could use darker shades of pennies to show variations in shadow depths or shiny shades for highlights. Making dendrite patterns like rivers will give an illusion of fluidity to the backsplash. It will surely look wonderful behind the stove or kitchen counters. 5. Diverting your attention from kitchen backsplashes, this bathroom sink backsplash is sure to catch your eye. It is such an ingenious idea. These copper pennies add to the warm yellow feel of your bathroom sink and make it look very rustic.
You can try covering your wall up with copper pennies in a rectangular shape, as shown in the picture. On the other hand, you could try making concentric patterns around the mirror. Using resin epoxy in this case will assure durability of your backsplash, so you will not have to clean the corrosion every other day.
6. Copper pennies can give the kitchen room a warm and antique feel. However, using silver nickels or steel pennies to match the metallic modern interior can make your kitchen look stunning. It is also a very economical and timesaving way to make your room look modular.
This bar backsplash is the perfect example of silver décor making your kitchen look like something straight out of a magazine. Using white LED lights can highlight this backsplash really well. It just makes the wall look otherworldly.
7. Making a homogenous or patterned backsplash can seem quite mundane, especially if you are interested in giving the backsplash an abstract design. If you are low on time and can’t manage designing the backsplash in minute details, you can go for this simple idea.
Here, the designer fixed the pennies randomly, without pre-planned color grading, or patterns and shapes. This randomness makes the wall look pretty and sophisticated. You could even light up the wall with warm yellow lights, to get that shimmer dancing off the surface of the pennies.
8. If you have a flexible budget and enough time to make an extensive backsplash design, you should look no further. It uses backer boards to hold the copper pennies in place, covering the entire kitchen counter wall. The best part about this project is that the overall cost was $350.
The backsplash uses two tones of copper; the brownish old pennies and the shiny uncirculated ones. The criss-cross design on the backsplash makes the boards look like they have been attached in a continuous flow. The part behind the sink uses a different pattern, which looks like the maze from Pacman.
9. You might think that copper pennies can be very limitedly decorative for these crafts. It’s just the same old rustic orange color repeated over and over again, with a little variation from old blackened pennies. Turns out, when copper corrodes due to excessive moisture, it develops a teal green patina all over.
The variation on your backsplash, using this technique can give you an amazing combination of copper and teal colors behind your kitchen counter top. All you need to do is soak the pennies in vinegar and salt, and put them out to dry in the air. The green blue oxidation shades make these corroded pennies stand out against their orange neighbors.
10. This design gives a completely new but literal meaning to floral patterns. They literally designed a sunflower using differently colored pennies for changing shades. The picture shows the design made on the floor, but you can absolutely replicate this idea for your backsplash.
You could try other flowers like roses, or daisies with nickels. Use darkened coins for shadows and the shiny ones for highlights. This lifelike art will most definitely catch everyone’s eyes and praises as well.
11. Copper is one of those colors that look good with ombre designs. The gradual change of color with increasing oxidation of the metal gives it a fluid look. It shows various color shades from bright orange to dark brown and finally teal blue.
You can acquire these colors by oxidizing the copper pennies with different levels of moisture. You can then glue them in place, in a smooth and gradual change of shades. Make sure to put lacquer and resin on the coin so that they don’t lose their color to moisture and oil.
12. If you are new to DIY arts and crafts, and you want to try your hand at making your own penny backsplash, this product is sure to help you. It is a template to help you fix copper pennies at equal distance from each other so that you get a perfect tile for your backsplash.
After you’re done sticking the coins to a wooden board or adhesive papers, grouting will hold the coins in place, giving a sturdy and compact structure to the backsplash. Resin epoxy will make sure your backsplash stays for a long time.
13. Do you have many beer bottle caps just wasting away in your recyclables? This idea will make a great use of them for both your kitchen and bathroom sink backsplashes. You can design your own backsplash variation that uses copper coins or ceramic tile pennies with these discarded bottle caps.
It is a great way to add contrasting colors to regular copper pennies and silver nickels. It will display your craft skills as well as the balance between rustic and modern things. Resin will make sure your craft endures water and grime splashes.
14. This idea uses readymade penny tiles. Although it does not have metal pennies, it uses a clever trick to add the metallic shimmer to your backsplash. It uses colored grout to make a simple white penny tile look special.
The grout is actually golden colored with slight shimmer. The pennies on the tile look accentuated with the addition of golden grout. If you have a modular kitchen with a theme of white and gold, this idea will look amazing. The feather-shaped accented tiles inserted in between add a different charm to the backsplash.
15. Glass and ceramic tiles are a roaring trend in the interior décor industry nowadays. It is mostly because of their quality and peppy color combinations. The fact that they can be matched with any type of tiles, wood or stone, makes them be constantly in demand. So you can mix and match colors, styles and materials in your kitchen or bathroom, to your penny tiles and create an inspiring backsplash.
16. Penny tiles are a very versatile product and can be clubbed with any other décor item of your choice. In this case, these penny tiles add character to simple white subway tiles on the kitchen backsplash. Along with character, it also adds color, texture and novelty to the otherwise simple subway tiles.
You can use these tiles as accents on your backsplash at regular interval. Fusing two types of tiles can be quite economical and visually appealing. You can create strips of copper pennies or nickels to complement the colors of different tiles.
17. I adore this idea. It gives us a perfect blend of copper coins and ceramic penny tiles. Although the picture shows that it is used for flooring, you can certainly take inspiration from this and come up with a few fusion ideas of your own.
Make patterns on the backdrop of copper coins using white or black ceramic tiles, like flowers or hearts. If you don’t have copper coins to spare, you can use silver nickels or steel coins and match them with pastel ceramic pennies. You can combine almost any color and make a trendy backsplash for your kitchen or bath.
So what do you think about these ideas for penny backsplashes? Did you like the DIY copper and nickel back-splashes or the ones with the ceramic tiles? I’m sure these must have inspired you and given you your own ideas. Share your brilliant ideas with us too, for an amazing penny backsplash!
An increasing number of students are wondering whether a standard college or university degree is as valuable in the current job market.
Many prefer jumping into the work environment, racking up experience to secure a job with good pay. The trend has only gone up due to higher college fees, leaving many students with debts that are extremely tough to recover from. Due to this shift, there are those who are doubtful about the next career move.
Thankfully, at this juncture, students don't face bleak prospects in the absence of a college degree. They can opt for several jobs, many of which require just a high school diploma. Some might need licenses, certification courses, or even hands-on training.
But, one can do away with schooling and a formal degree even if they aim for cushy employment opportunities. And we've offered a comprehensive guide for such career options.
Let's dive into it without any further delay.
Career Options | High Paying Jobs With Little Schooling
For the sake of brevity, we have divided the career options in different categories.
Trade Professions
Plumbers
Clogged drains and toilets are common problems in every household. It is often a dirty job, but somebody has to do it. If one doesn't mind working with their hands, then becoming a plumber is a good career choice.
People are willing to pay a good amount of money for the handiwork, but plumbing is a bit more complex than clearing out drains and toilets. As such, a high school diploma is sufficient, but one can go to a trade school or dive into an apprenticeship.
As per the data provided by the BLS or US Bureau of Labor Statistics, there is likely to be a 16% growth in the field. This translates to an additional 75,200 openings apart from the current workforce of more than 480,600. Plumbers take in a fair amount of money annually, in the ballpark of $55,160. They make a steady $26.52 per hour for their services.
Electricians
It turns out that not many people might be needed to change a lightbulb, but one must have the right person for the job. Although colleges have taken precedence over trade schools in recent times, it has led to the dearth of skilled tradespeople like electricians.
The vacuum is about to be filled, with several people flocking to the vocation, which makes it a smart career move at the time. One might train via online programs or join apprenticeships to learn on the job. Notably, in the latter scenario, an apprentice doesn't make as much as a fully licensed electrician.
BLS estimates that the number of jobs for electricians will increase by 20% by 2022. The massive jump is reflected in the median pay, which comes to around $56,180 annually. Electricians stand to make $27.01 hourly for services rendered. Moreover, by 2026, there is likely to be 59,600 openings. Long story short, this field sounds promising for anyone starting out a career.
Commercial Transporter
A commercial transporter or driver is a seldom considered career option due to the timings of the job. The absence of a nine to five schedule often puts off candidates who don't take to the idea of long hours on the road, driving trucks.
Despite the apparent negatives, becoming a commercial driver is easy and rewarding. Firstly, all one needs is a CDL or commercial driver's license issued by the state. Many undertake certification programs to get an edge, but they're not a requirement for the job.
Truckers can find work easily with companies looking for capable drivers, or might go an independent route by opting to become an owner-operator. BLS lists the median annual pay as a commendable $45,260, and commercial drivers make around $21.76 every hour. While the current workforce is strong, the profession is expected to add at least 108,400 openings by 2026.
HVAC Technician
Heating and cooling systems are integral in every household, but installing or maintaining them is quite cumbersome. This is where an HVAC Technician or heating, ventilation, and air conditioning expert comes in.
The expert's duties and responsibilities include overseeing the installation process, troubleshooting or repairing equipment as needed, while providing customer service and technical support. They also need to be involved in the design, layout, and installation of low-voltage wiring.
While most technicians prefer a postsecondary education at a trade school, many opt for a long apprenticeship period, where they can learn on the job. In some states, licensing also requires passing a written exam.
As things stand, BLS reports that the median annual salary for professionals is around $48,730. They rake in $23.43 hourly for services too. While the option might not be as popular as some of the others, HVAC Technicians are poised to see 48,800 openings added to the existing workforce.
Office Careers
Retail Management
If working with bare hands is not someone's cup of tea, there are several comfortable office jobs as well, which don't need much formal training but pay quite well. Most people have experience in retail somewhere along the way, usually during summer internships while at school.
While the job can be quite demanding, the position as a retail manager does pay well. Moreover, there are frequent burnouts, which is why companies try to retain good managers with a host of incentives, including monetary perks. During application, one must keep in mind that the job requires a degree of customer service and usually has unusual shift hours.
As per BLS, retail managers bring in a laudable $126,640 median annual salary. The high-stress job also pays $60.89 hourly for services. It might not be for the faint-hearted, but the profession stands to see nearly 28,900 new openings by 2026.
Paralegal
The law requires a lot of grunt work, but lawyers rarely have time to go into all the details. Due to the heavy workload most successful law firms have to handle; they delegate some of the detailed tasks to paralegals.
They mostly deal with the paperwork, drafting documents, and conducting research before presenting it to the lawyer who can then take it to court. While becoming a lawyer requires one to spend hundreds and thousands of dollars on a degree, opting to be a paralegal is relatively simple. One merely has to have an associate's degree program.
Paralegals manage to bring in around $51,740 each year, as per BLS. Their hourly wages are estimated to be around $24.87. While many already choose this profession, there are likely to be nearly 41,800 new openings by 2026.
Claims Adjuster
Just as everybody needs insurance, the companies need claims adjusters to estimate how much should be paid out on a case to case basis. Understandably, not many people like claims adjusters since they determine how much money a person who's suffered a loss should get from the insurance company. But, it is a comfortable and honest living due to the money that can be made.
If one wishes for upward mobility in the workplace, a degree does come in handy. But, entry-level positions do not require any additional education. One just needs proper analytical and interpersonal skills, which need not be acquired from college classrooms.
Going by BLS estimates, a claims adjuster usually makes around $66,540 a year, and their hourly wage is nearly $31.99. However, there aren't any projected openings in the future as the industry is expected to maintain a steady workforce.
Loan Officer
People are always looking for loans, and they go to banks usually. Thus, the establishments are swamped with applications, but regular bankers don't usually evaluate them. The task falls upon loan officers. Once again, it is not exactly an enviable job as the individual has to carefully review the application and then decide whether the bank might grant the loan or not.
Usually, the job is a little technical, so a background in accounting and business is definitely preferable. Moreover, some job postings specifically look for loan officers who have completed their bachelors' degrees. That said, the requirement isn't set in stone, and one might find opportunities in the profession by combining experiences of working in a bank and some college coursework.
The professionals make nearly $63,270 in a year, and their hourly income is around $30.42, as per BLS. It is a good time to choose to be a loan officer since the field is likely to see 36,300 new openings by 2026.
Engineering and Construction Careers
Architectural Drafter
While some jobs need not require a specialized degree, they do need knowledge of certain subjects. An architectural drafter certainly has their job cut out for them. Their task is to take the plan that the architect has drawn up and then put them in an electronic format, with the help of the AutoCAD software.
Vocational trade schools offer knowledge that is suited for the job. What's really crucial is that drafters can be certified by the American Design Drafting Association. Employers don't normally ask for it, but getting certified means the individual has an edge due to their understanding of nationally accepted drafting practices.
One must be familiar with how to use the AutoCAD software too. Thus, focusing in high school on mathematics, science, computer graphics, and design are beneficial for those who want to opt for this career. The ability to draw freehand is an added perk. BLS estimates drafters make nearly $56,830 a year and bring in around $27.32 per hour.
Construction Manager
Construction projects are extremely complex affairs where several aspects need to move like clockwork. It requires handling numerous moving pieces, simultaneous tasks, and subcontractors. At the same time, attention must be paid to ensure that things are done correctly and safely.
The construction manager is responsible for handling all of these matters, and while the job sounds complex, it is not. Associate programs are sufficient to provide the know-how and certifications needed to jump into the field.
Moreover, the pay is also lucrative, as one can understand from BLS reports. Construction managers make around $95,260 every year and bring in something in the ballpark of $45.80 every hour. That said, the most exciting part is the prospective growth in the industry, with estimates indicating at 44,800 new jobs by 2026.
Civil Engineering Assistant
A civil engineering assistant is actually a technician who helps the civil engineer in planning, designing and building highways, infrastructure projects, or bridges for industrial, residential, commercial, or development projects. However, the job doesn't need one to go to have a college degree. Getting an associate's degree is enough if the technician has an eye for detail.
Although the field is not too fast-growing, the job is best suited for those who enjoy their workdays being unique. BLS estimates indicate that civil engineering technicians can make as much as $53,410 in a year and bring in about $25.68 in an hour.
Not only is the pay good, but there are likely to be some openings in the coming years as well. Research indicates that around 6,600 new openings are slated to appear by 2026.
Medical Careers
Respiratory Therapist
While most would consider that breathing troubles warrant a visit to the doctor, the professionals treating such patients are often respiratory therapists. These individuals aren't doctors themselves but are licensed thanks to the associate's degree. As such, one does need education beyond basic schooling but can avoid the expenses of studying medicine and becoming a doctor.
Respiratory therapists stand to make an impressive amount of money each year, based on the BLS reports. The median annual earnings come to nearly $61,330, while the hourly earnings are $29.48.
It is also an exciting time to be a respiratory therapist since the industry is likely to see growth in the coming years, with 30,500 positions opening by 2026.
Medical Sonographer
The diagnostic medical sonographer resorts to imaging equipment as well as soundwaves in order to get images of different parts of the body. These are known as ultrasounds. Furthermore, they analyze these sonographic images, which help doctors diagnose and treat the patient's problems.
With an improvement in sonography technology, medical professionals are finding new uses for it each day. Thus, there are strong growth prospects in the field. Moreover, a two-year associate's degree is sufficient for entering the profession.
One is likely to be attracted to the job due to the pay. BLSreports suggest sonographers make nearly $68,750 a year and $33.05 an hour. The field is supposed to see almost 21,100 new positions by 2026.
Nurses
The medical field always requires nurses, but there are different categories, depending on how much schooling one wants to complete before entering the profession.
First off, we have the CNA or certified nursing assistants. Here, a basic certification program is needed, but the potential for earning is limited. Instead, most people prefer to gain working experience as a CNA while enrolling for other certifications.
It brings us to LPNs or Licensed Practical Nurses. A certification program is required in this case, and the caregivers perform more hands-on duties in hospitals and other institutional settings. But, the opportunities for advancing are limited.
Finally, we have RNs or registered nurses. Normally, one opts for a bachelor's degree in nursing to reach this position, but it is also possible through an associate's degree. Their task is to supervise the nursing staff while making active decisions about the patient's care. The cerebral nature of the task ensures that remuneration is higher, but the education needed is also more extensive.
As per BLS, RNs have a median annual salary of $73,300 and hourly earnings of $35.24.
Lab Technician
With a growth in the medical industry, facilities are coming up at an amazing speed. However, behind-the-scenes growth has to match this pace. To give you an example, every sample collected at a facility reaches a lab where the medical technologists run the tests with the help of their assistants, who are known as technicians.
While the position of a technologist requires a high degree of knowledge and extensive education, it is relatively easier to become a technician. An associate's degree is enough to land the job, making it a coveted post for many who are eager to jump into the workplace after schooling.
Lab technicians earn around $53,120 a year, while their hourly wage is in the ballpark of $25.54 as per BLS reports. It makes the career option lucrative, which explains why there's growth with 42,700 positions about to be added by 2026.
Oral Hygienist
An oral or dental hygienist is a licensed professional who is registered with a dental association or such similar regulatory bodies. The best part about the job is that one just needs an associate's degree for it.
Some might find the job a little unsavory since they have to examine strangers' mouths all day, but the chances of progress in this field are massive. Reports indicate a massive boom in the oral hygiene industry headed in the next decade. Thus, professionals might find themselves faring better than those with college degrees.
BLS reports that oral hygienists make $76,220 a year while their hourly income is around $36.65. Since the industry is looking at almost 40,900 new positions by 2026, the prospects look really bright for anyone considering oral hygienists as a vocation.
Technology and Computer Careers
Network Administrator
The job of the individual, here, is to ensure that a company's computer infrastructure remains in stellar working conditions. Notably, the job is quite stressful at times, with problems requiring immediate attention and swift resolution.
A network administrator mustn't just fix problems but has to proactively anticipate and stop them. It requires a fair amount of knowledge and skills, which is why technicians generally need educational accreditation. One might opt for an associate's degree and other certifications like CompTIA Network+ or CCNP.
An administrator makes $83,510 a year as per BLS, which makes it quite a coveted job for the salary. The hourly earnings are around $40.15. Since the field is poised to see a growth of 24,000 new openings by 2026, it is clear that becoming a network administrator is a popular choice among many.
Computer Programmer
While being a computer programmer can open many doors, one doesn't need a bachelor's degree for it. There are free online resources to learn the coding languages, and it can be further supplemented with some courses. But, hands-on training is the best teacher in the world of programming.
Since there are several coding languages, it is easy to find one with relatively lesser competition. Staying up to date about the technologies used by companies nearby can also help programmers get hired quickly.
As per BLS, they make around $86,550 a year and $41.61 hourly. Since computer technologies are increasingly becoming an indispensable part of our lives, the field is only expected to grow exponentially in the coming years.
Web Designer
Businesses increasingly have their own websites, and though there are DIY tools, companies prefer to hire experts to design the sites. This is primarily because most business takes place on the website, which becomes a reflection of the company.
Web development is an exciting field because here, one is judged by the skills they have, not how they acquired them. Although some prefer to obtain a professional degree, web developers can be self-taught with no formal education. Learning HTML, JavaScript, and CSS can help one become a good web designer.
The pay is good, and as per BLS, a web designer in demand can bring in around $73,760 a year, while their hourly income is $35.46. One expects there to be nearly 24,400 new positions by 2026.
Graphic Designer
A graphic designer's talent is their ability to create. While it can be developed through formal education, this is primarily a self-acquired skill. Most graphic designers today need to be well-versed in handling computer programs. But just knowing one's way around a designing program is not enough. One also has to be able to create something beautiful with it.
Since this is best learned while on the job, the profession calls to many who want to start working without extensive schooling. Luckily, the job pays well, too, as BLS reports, graphic designers, make around $52,110 per year. Their hourly income is nearly $25.05. The field is always booming, and one expects there to be 11,100 new job openings by 2026.
Final Words
Wrapping up, most traditional degrees aren't all they are made out to be. While research shows that STEM students rarely end up working in the same fields that they studied for, humanities students have it even harder. They need to augment their degrees further before landing a job.
If one thinks broadly and puts some faith in vocational schooling, the return on investment is much higher. We've provided a detailed guide of some of the best paying jobs, which show potential for growth but don't require a lot of formal education.
Based on your choice, you should decide whether there are additional courses you can enroll for or places you can gain experience from. Following this list will help you snap out of indecision regarding your career, so you can seize the day.
On that note, we will sign off. Till next time!
Wish to paint a landscape that got you mesmerized during a recent trip? It’s time you learned how to blend oil paints.
Complicated as it might seem initially, blending top grade oil paints is a technique that can help you create the most beautiful artwork. Notably, it’s also utilized for creating more realistic pieces of art and allows you to paint oil over acrylic.
But like every other oil painting technique, blending will require you to be clear about several essential aspects. Like, how long do oil paints last and take certain precautions in the course of the task. So, today we thought of penning this guide to take you through everything you need to know. Let’s get going then!
How To Blend Oil Paints
To blend oil colors the right way, you’ll need regular practice and will have to apply appropriate techniques. Notably, this includes a clear understanding of the best oil paints and the processes of mixing different hues effectively. That’s why we’ll be discussing each of these essentials to help you become a pro at blending oil paints.
A. Understanding Colors
If you wish to blend oil paint like a pro, you must master the technique of playing around with different colors. After all, the quality of the blend will depend on how you choose and combine the right colors. And if you’re using the blending technique for achieving realism on the canvas, it’s even more essential to understand how to mix the oil colors and blend them.
1. Beginners’ Color Palette
Newbies in oil painting should start their journey with only a few hues. And gradually, they can expand their choices as they gain confidence in this type of art.
At the start, it’s best to choose hues such as Phthalo Blue, Ultramarine Blue, Lemon Yellow, Alizarin Crimson, Cadmium Red, Burnt Umber, Viridian Green, and Ivory Black.
2. The Primary Colors
It’s most likely that you’ll know the colors that are regarded as primary — blue, red, and yellow. Unlike other shades, you can’t get them by blending other colors. Rather, you will be able to blend these colors to obtain a variety of other colors.
3. Secondary Colors
The mixture of different combinations of primary colors gives rise to a secondary color. For instance, if you combine red and blue, you’ll obtain purple. The mixing of blue and yellow creates green while combining red and yellow provides you with orange.
The best part about oil colors is that they allow you to play with any primary color to create a number of secondary varieties. For instance, you can get a lighter or darker shade of orange using such combinations. Note that the key to learning color mixing is the knowledge of altering the kind or vibrancy of colors.
This color mix is referred to as a hue in the field of art. And to get a more realistic hue, you can combine more than one secondary or primary color.
4. Complementary Colors
It’s a must to understand the complementary colors while mixing different shades of oil paint and blending them beautifully. This is because certain colors combine well with others. For instance, dark and light blues blend effectively, while blues also match well with greens.
You might have already come across the term complementary colors, such as red-purple or blue-green. It’s essential to keep in mind that using complementary colors becomes more of a technical practice as you go about painting realistically. Again, it will take substantial practice to fully master the art of color mixing.
B. Choosing The Right Brush
Now that we’ve discussed the different types of colors, the next most essential factor to consider is the paint brushes you’ll use for blending. Obviously, you’ll get different varieties of paint brushes meant for producing different effects. The following are some tips to help you understand which brush you’ll have to choose for each effect.
1. Quality Is The Priority
Your paint brush should be of the right quality so that it can make the desired difference in your oil paintings. Avoid going for brushes for which the bristles spread or split too much.
Yet another problem with cheaper paint brushes is that the bristles might loosen with time or get stuck. Thus, you’ll want to ensure that the brush you’re purchasing belongs to a trusted or recommended brand.
To test the brush quality, you can check its spring. You should do this by brushing it against the hand to ascertain how its bristles respond to the brush strokes. Note that this is a good sign of the likely response of the brush to each stroke.
2. Going For A Suitable Shape
Given that there are several shapes of brushes to pick from, let’s talk about the right varieties for blending. Remember that if you use the right brush, it will be much easier to get the desired effect.
With regard to blending, the go-to option is a Filbert paint brush. This brush comes in an oval shape, has a thick ferrule (metallic part), and consists of medium to long hairs. As such, you’re sure to have better control with every stroke.
The Two Best Blending Techniques
1. Blending With Two Colors
Step 1
Begin by applying the colors you wish to blend opposite to each other. Apply two separate brushes or clean the brush in between to ensure the two colors are unmixed. Note that you should keep a gap between the colors as that will help create a smooth combination.
After this, you’ll have to:
Blend colors on a practice sheet of paper before working on the painting
The amount of paint you use depends on the texture you want to add
If you wish to add a thick texture, use more paint and vice versa.
Step 2
At this point, you’ll have to combine the colors on the palette. Notably, this will be a mixture of the colors you utilized beforehand. Now, try to maintain uniformity in the mixture as much as possible. Include the same amount of every color and combine those colors smoothly using the paint brush.
Step 3
The blended color should be applied between the two that you used. Fill the gap between the two colors fully while applying the mixture color. But you’ll still have to wait to blend the colors. First, wash out the paint brush using a paint thinner so that you’re able to get a perfect blend.
Step 4
It’s from this step that the blending process should start. You’ll have to move the brush back and forth between each of the three colors (including the mixed one).
Act as though you’re making a “Z” pattern; the paint brush should go zig-zag between the unblended colors and the mixed color. Following this, you’ll have to brush up and down between the two colors. Then keep a close watch on the color as it blends into the combined color in between.
Step 5
Unlike acrylic paint, these colors provide you with ample time to blend them uniformly and effectively. Use fresh paint on your colors if the paint gets dried up too quickly.
This will wet the paint so that it can blend again. And when you’re satisfied with the output of the blending task, keep the painting aside to dry fully. On a side note, oil paint takes between 3 to 7 days to cure entirely.
2. Tinting Oil Paints
Step 1
First, you’ll need to determine the location of the light source in the room you’re painting. Your object will have to be tinted at the spot where the light falls directly on it.
Select a position for the light source, and accordingly, you must plan to tint your object. Mark the light source to ensure you are able to keep track and don’t tint and paint the wrong portions. Now, combine the shading and tinting on the object to create a realistic perception of depth.
Step 2
You’ll have to apply the base color at this point. As with shading, apply the base color everywhere except the area you plan to tint. And for that part, you should leave an unpainted patch that you can fill in later on.
Sketch your object with strong lines so that you can omit painting the potentially tinted portion.
You should use charcoal, ink, or pencil to sketch the object
For instance, if the object is a banana, you should add yellow as the base color.
Step 3
Next, you’ll need to combine the base color with white on the palette.
It’s the intensity of the light source that will decide the amount of white you’ll have to add to the color. If the source is too bright, such as the sun, you should add more white. But if it’s dim like a light bulb of low wattage, you should add less white. In case the object is a banana, you’ll have to mix white with yellow.
Step 4
Finally, paint the mixed color in the unpainted spaces around the center. You’ll then have to start blending the mixed paint and base color by moving the brush back and forth, following a zig-zag pattern.
Now, wait till the paint is blended evenly, and then find a secure spot to place the canvas for drying. Coming back to the example of painting a banana, you can apply the yellow-white mix to the unpainted spaces, primarily in the middle of the artwork.
Blend Oil Paints Final Thought
Hopefully, blending oil paints doesn’t seem complicated to you anymore. You might have understood by now that blending paints the right way amounts to developing a clear idea about the different color types and using the right tools and techniques. So, pick the brush and paints, and get started with your next artwork!
But before we call it a day, we’d like to share a pro-tip with you. Make sure you try out different color combinations, apply complementary colors, and even try blending with different shades of a single color for the technique. This way, you’ll discover the more effective color mixes and those that you should avoid.
That’s about it for today. See you next time!
Most woodworking professionals would agree that a table saw is an important machinery in their workshops. As such, choosing the right one becomes crucial.
A table saw should be versatile, portable, and packed with exceptional safety features. Now, as far as the Bosch 4100-09 is concerned, most woodworkers say that it is one of the best performing table saws.
But, is it so? Well, today we’re going to find out. Bosch is one of the leading manufacturers of top-grade power tools and accessories.
Naturally, the Bosch Worksite Table Saw is the ideal choice for DIYers and woodworking professionals alike, thanks to its robust combination of power and portability. What’s more, it delivers top-notch precision, which allows you to cut through a wide range of wooden materials effortlessly.
If we have piqued your interest, let us take a look at the capabilities of this table saw in detail. This will help you decide whether to buy it.
Bosch Worksite Table Saw With Stand Review
Key Specifications
Before buying any woodworking machinery, you should have knowledge about the specifications of the model. Here, we have highlighted some of the key aspects of the Bosch 4100-09 unit so that you can quickly decide if it fits your requirements.
Measurement:39”×29.75”×21”
Power:Electricity (corded)
Motor: 4 HP, 15 amp
Warranty:1-year limited warranty
Table dimensions:21-1/2’’x 28’’
Weight:92 pounds
Blade diameter:10”
Blade speed:3,650 RPM
Size of dust collection port:2.5” in diameter
What Do You Get In The Box
These are the things you get in the box
The table saw
SquareLock rip fence
A push stick
An adjustment wrench
Multi-functional blade wrench
Stand
Throat plate insert
Miter gauge
A guard system consisting of a barrier-guard device and anti-back pawls
Bosch Features
This unit is packed with a ton of features that make woodworking very easy. Let’s take a detailed look at some of its top features.
Portability
Portability is one of the many aspects, where the 4100-09 table saw from Bosch stands out from most of its competitors. Weighing around 92 pounds, it is a relatively lightweight table saw, which makes it very portable.
For professional woodworkers, it is a very important feature as it allows them to easily carry it from one workstation to another. Meaning, all the spare parts, safety tools, and essential accessories can be conveniently stored inside the main body of the table saw without compromising on movement.
Cutting Capacity
The product sports a 40-tooth carbide blade that easily fits into the 5/8” shaft of the motor. But, you can also use an 80-tooth blade for cutting veneered panels.
Its unique shaft is compatible with different types of blades, including dado blades. What’s more, you can change them in the blink of an eye; all you have to do is pull the locking lever and use a wrench to remove the old one.
Further enhancing its cutting capacity is its unique tabletop that measures around 21-1/2’’x 28”. But you can extend it to 40” by using the locking level and extending the tabletop to your right.
Doing this will help you to achieve an 8” cutting capacity on the left and a 25” cutting capacity on the right.
Safety Features
The Bosch 4100-09 comes with optimal safety features, thanks to its Smart Guard system which consists of adjustable blade guards, anti-kickback pawls, and a riving knife. The best part about it is that you can easily attach or detach the components without any additional tools, making this product extremely flexible.
Now, if you have used a table saw before, you would know that kickbacks are a major problem, which must be dealt with ingenuity. And this unit handles it extremely well due to the inclusion of a high-quality riving knife, also known as a splitter.
Finally, as far as the blade guard is concerned, it ensures that there is enough clearance between your hands and the blades, taking safety to the next level.
Design
The unit boasts an aluminum tabletop, giving you ample space to work.
But especially pleasing is its sturdy design which makes it worth the investment. Users worried about longevity will love its durable metal construction, which can handle regular wear and tear with ease.
Additionally, thanks to its pneumatic wheels, the Gravity-Rise stand enables you to move the table saw without any difficulty. Also, you can adjust the height of the stand as per your requirements, which is an added advantage.
Motor
It is powered by a robust 4 HP motor that can cut through thick hardwoods easily. And even though it is not the most powerful product that you will come across, it does a decent job for most parts.
You will find that the motor delivers a blade speed of 3,600 RPM, but you can tweak it depending on the task. However, that doesn’t mean it compromises on user experience because it comes with a soft start feature that reduces recoil and noise.
Furthermore, it is integrated with the Constant Response Circuitry from Bosch. Meaning, the unit can keep a check of the power consumption when it is under load and adjust the torque accordingly.
Overall Functionality
You need to have a certain amount of woodworking knowledge and experience to operate the Bosch 4100-09. However, it suffers from various shortcomings that affect its functionality, thereby restricting the variety of tasks users can perform.
For starters, controlling the blade is not that simple as the height of the wheel is controlled by the handwheel, which you cannot lock in one place. Though it doesn’t wobble much during operation, we feel that a locking feature would have added more stability.
Moreover, despite having positive stops at 90 degrees and 45 degrees, adjusting the bevel angle is not easy. Not to mention, the bevel scale tends to be inaccurate at times, which makes it suitable only for rough cuts.
Pros
These are some of the advantages of using the Bosch 4100-09 table saw.
Outstanding Features
It comes with a Smart Guard system, which prevents accidents by ensuring that the machine does not jam or kickback during use.
Plus, the riving knife lets you use blades that are wider than those available with the unit. This means that you may have to purchase additional components for the best results but we must tell you that assembly isn’t easy. So, first-time users may find it difficult to get it ready.
Highly Functional Fence System
The fence system is one of the best on the market and you can glide through the rail, thanks to its Sqaurelock Rip Fence. Moreover, you can lock it easily and carry out small precision cuts without any problem.
Integrated With Constant Response Circuitry
The product’s powerful motor is integrated with the Constant Response Circuitry, which helps keep track of the blade’s rotational speed. Additionally, it helps you manage the output without impacting the performance of the blade and prevents sudden speed oscillations while using the unit.
Top-notch Portability
Weighing around 92 pounds, the Bosch 4100-09 is relatively lightweight, so you can move it easily in case you need to switch worksites. Plus, its Gravity-Rise table deserves a special mention as it is equipped with wheels that deliver portability.
Compatible
This model is compatible with dado blades that let you carry out different types of cuts. Meaning, it is highly versatile so that you can work on various projects.
Cons
Just like any other machinery, the Bosch 4100-09 also has its disadvantages. Here are some of its most common problems.
Poor Dust Collection System
The 4100-09 mostly does a decent job when it comes to dust collection. It features a 2.5-inch dust port, which you can connect to a vacuum to remove most of the debris. However, don’t expect it to collect all the dirt particles as it does not come with a dust collection bag.
Understandably, we were not impressed with the performance. It might still help you clean a room but you will have to undertake further measures to ensure that all corners are spick and span.
Reduced Rip Capacity
In our opinion, the 25” rip capacity is not enough for cutting large pieces of wood. For example, if you intend on cutting wide sheet stock on a daily basis, the product’s output may not match up to your expectations.
We suggest that you use it for light-scale or moderate projects for the best results.
Difficult Bevel Adjustment
Adjusting the bevel angle is quite difficult, to say the least and you might need assistance to alter the settings.
Alternative Table Saws To Bosch
After reading thus far, if you feel that the 4100-09 model from Bosch is not the right product for you, consider going with these options mentioned below. Needless to say, they are all highly efficient table saws.
The Bosch 4100-10 is an upgraded version of the Bosch 4100-09 unit and both these models have a lot of similar features. For starters, they come with a 4 HP motor, allowing both units to complete different tasks with aplomb.
Now, the former can be bought with a Gravity-Rise stand; however, the model number is different. Also, it looks a lot different from the one you get with the latter, meaning there could be variations in output.
What’s more, the 4100-10 features a 24-tooth blade which is better suited for rip-cutting wood, whereas the 4100-09 model has a 40-tooth blade.
Founded in 1924, Dewalt is one of the leading power tool brands in the US. On that note, allow us to introduce you to the DWE7485-QS table saw which is powered by a 15 amp motor.
Understandably, it has a substantial capacity and can carry out high-quality and accurate cuts at 5,800 RPM. Speaking of cuts, what caught our attention right from the start was its 24-tooth blade which can make short work of different materials.
Upon purchase, you will find that it comes with a wide range of accessories, including anti-kickback pawls, a riving knife, a push stick, and wrenches so that you can change the blade. Plus, it features an onboard storage, which comes in handy for keeping all the tools organized.
However, despite all the good things, it has a rip capacity of 24.5,” and an 8.5-inch blade, which we don’t think is sufficient for cutting through large wood pieces.
Next up, we bring you another quality alternative to the Bosch 4100-09 from Evolution Power Tools, a prominent name in the table saw industry. Whether you are a DIYer or a professional woodworker, this machine can help you get the desired results.
Even though it is a bit bulkier than the 4100-09 model, it is more versatile in its functionality. For instance, by using its 28-teeth, 10-inch R255-TCT multi-material blade, it can easily cut through a wide variety of surfaces, including wood, aluminum, plastic, and mild steel.
Moreover, the blade is made of Japanese tungsten steel, which makes it highly durable and long-lasting. But another advantage is that you can use it to make precise crosscuts without any hassle.
It also comes with a hi-torque gearbox that helps in minimizing motor stress, thereby improving its performance and longevity. That said, we have noticed a few performance issues.
You will find that its collapsible frame does not come with detailed assembly instructions, which is pretty disappointing. As a result, assembly takes time and could be frustrating.
Pros
Highly durable
Backed by a 3-year warranty
Can cut through a wide variety of materials
Cons
It doesn’t come with detailed assembly instructions
For over 50 years, JET has dedicated itself to manufacturing a wide range of top-quality woodworking and metalworking machines. And the Jet Table Saw is another prestigious addition to their woodworking repertoire.
It features a robust 15 amp motor that can cut through thick materials easily. But, for us, the main highlight of this product is its wheeled stand, which collapses quickly for storage, portability, and quick setup.
We also found that it weighs under 100 pounds and is slightly on the heavier side to provide stability during operation. Further adding to its stable output are the anti-kickback pawls and a European-style riving knife for working on heavy-duty tasks.
Furthermore, it is backed by a 3-year of limited warranty, which is something we truly appreciate. However, the downside is that the fence is a bit difficult to adjust, and it is more expensive than other models.
Pros
Professional woodworkers consider it as their go-to product
Our next item is a quality product from the Japanese powerhouse, Hitachi, the new Metabo, a brand that has been in the business for over a century. So, it should not come as a surprise that their 10″ Table Sawis in our top recommendations for alternatives to the Bosch.
Just like the latter model, it also comes with a soft start feature that minimizes noise and recoil during startup. Now, excessive recoil can lead to safety issues, so Metabo has ensured optimal protection with the integration of an electric brake. It stops the movement of the blades instantaneously in case of any accident.
Moving on, as far as the cutting capacity is concerned, it sports a 10” 40-tooth blade, which can cut through thick materials easily. Meaning you need not worry about performance issues.
But in case it encounters a problem you’ll be pleased to know that it is backed by a 3-year warranty. Hence, you can expect it to perform efficiently for a very long time.
SKIL is a very popular brand among woodworking professionals, and hence it requires no introduction. The 3410-02 Table Sawis a highly budget-driven alternative to the Bosch 4100-09 and could be a suitable choice for those looking for a reliable cutting machine.
Thanks to its heavy-duty steel stand, woodworkers can set it up in a jiffy. This is further helped by the fact that it weighs around 67 pounds, which makes it a lightweight option. But keep in mind that it does not have wheels underneath, so you may need help with installation.
Lastly, people who are on a tight budget will love its affordable price tag, which makes this unit all the more valuable.
As you already know, Dewalt is one of the oldest and most reliable power tool brands in the US. So, it made sense to add another robust product to the list.
The DEWALT DWE7491RS Table Saw is a premium, powerful and accurate product. Weighing about 100 pounds, it is not the lightest option that you will come across. However, the base can be folded, which certainly helps in portability.
It features a 2 HP motor, which can handle medium to light cutting jobs. However, it may fail to compete with the other options mentioned on this list because of its relatively reduced motor power.
Now, as far as the blades are concerned, they deliver precise cuts. Not to mention, they are retractable and ensure safety for users. Naturally, it is a good alternative to the Bosch 4100-09.
Pros
Portable
Delivers precise results
Good value for money
It has a decent motor
Cons
The miter gauge is not great
What Are The Various Categories Of Table Saws
There are 3 main categories of table saws on the market:
Cabinet
These table saws are large in size and are mostly used for heavy-duty professional work; hence they need fairly big workspaces. Moreover, cabinet saws deliver accurate results but are more expensive than other table saws.
Benchtop
Benchtop models are perfect for DIYers and individuals who are starting out new.They are much lighter than cabinet table saws, making them highly portable and easy to store.
Also, if your workshop has limited space, you should go with a model in this category.
Contractor
The contractor is another popular category of table saw and features robust motors that can perform all types of cutting tasks with ease.
Although a bit heavier than benchtop models, they are lighter than cabinet table saws. But despite their robust design, they have spacious tabletops, which helps in cutting large materials.
Factors to Consider When Buying A Table Saw
Let’s be honest; choosing the right table saw that meets all your requirements is easier said than done. In this section, we have mentioned a few important factors that you should keep in mind before making a purchase.
Blade Compatibility
While choosing a unit, it would be best to ensure that it is compatible with dado blades.
The stacked variant utilizes two blades with a few chippers positioned between them. On the other hand, the wobble design offers excellent adjustments but cuts unevenly with more possibility of a tearout.
That being said, both types of dado blades will need a table saw with an extended arbor for better grip and extra space. For this reason, we strongly recommend going with a model with a lengthy arbor.
Build Quality
The build quality is another factor worth considering, as it plays a crucial role in determining the overall value of a table saw. Since buying any model requires a significant amount of investment, you should always go with a unit that offers durability.
You must check the materials with which the table saw is made, as it affects both the performance and longevity of the machine. As far as performance is considered, the material should be able to minimize vibration; otherwise the cuts tend to be inaccurate.
Now, the primary materials used in table saws are cast iron, aluminum, stainless steel, and plastic. Among them, cast iron significantly reduces vibrations but is heavy and expensive.
Plastic, on the other hand, is inexpensive but flimsy and, therefore, vibrates the most. So, we suggest choosing a product that is made of either aluminum or stainless steel as both efficiently control vibrations while being lightweight and portable.
Portability And Size
Portability is something that all professional woodworkers should look for in a table saw, as they have to carry it from one job site to another. It doesn’t necessarily have to be lightweight, but it should come with a sturdy cart stand.
Motor Power
Believe it or not, the motor power is as important as the build quality of a table saw as it has a direct impact on the torque. In general, strong motor power comes in handy when you cut thicker woods.
So, in that case, you should always opt for a model that has a higher HP, amps, and rotations per minute. However, if you cut medium and soft hardwood, a medium-powered option will do the job.
Fence Quality
The quality of the fence may not be the first thing that comes to your mind when purchasing a table saw, but it is a noteworthy factor nonetheless. An ideal rip fence should be adjustable, and it should lock well to the table.
Dust Collection System
People with allergies and breathing issues appreciate machines with efficient dust collection systems. That said, the main problem with machines with poor dust collection systems is that it allows dust to build up inside them, which takes a toll on the tool’s productivity.
As a result, it lowers the cutting effectiveness of the blade and may cause it to wear out quickly. For this, all woodworkers should aim to purchase a table saw that comes with a big dust vacuum port.
That being said, the best option would be to go with a model that features a dual dust collection system and a vacuum port on the blade guard.
Safety Features
Table saws are usually very dangerous machines to use, which is why safety is a major concern. However, most models in this day and age ensure that they are packed with a ton of safety features.
For starters, they come with the blade guard, which makes it easy to remove or adjust the blade as per the user’s requirements.
Apart from this, anti-kickback pawls are also necessary as they reduce wobbling and provide stability. Speaking of stability, you will also find that some models come with blade brakes that shut down the machine in the blink of an eye when it touches the skin.
Understandably, these are some of the most practical safety features your table saw should have.
How To Safely Use A Table Saw
These are some safety tips that you need to follow while using a table saw to avoid the risk of getting injured.
Wear Ear And Eye Protection
You should always wear proper ear protection while using a table saw. Since it is a large and heavy-duty piece of equipment, the saw blades can be exceedingly loud and may damage your eardrums. Hence, we recommend buying disposable earplugs or earmuffs that don’t cost much in order to protect your hearing.
Additionally, you could wear safety goggles while cutting wooden materials as it will prevent the debris and sawdust from entering your eyes.
Consider Using Clearance Inserts
If you use the table saw for cutting extremely thin pieces of wood, it would be best to use an insert to avoid injuring your fingers.
Those who don’t know, an insert is a thin piece of wood that sits between the blade saw and the side fence to create a buffer zone while cutting thin wooden boards. Doing this prevents your fingers from getting too close to the blade.
Use A Splitter, Push Stick, Or A Push Shoe While Cutting Thin Materials
While you are cutting short and narrow pieces of wood, your hands might not have sufficient clearance between the side fence and the blade. This is why you should always consider using a notched sled or a push stick that guides the wood along the cutting line.
Now, certain push devices come with adjustable features to easily fit different wooden materials. You can also buy these accessories from your local lumberyard or purchase them online from e-commerce stores.
Never Use Warped Boards
Never even think of using bent, warped, or water-damaged wooden boards because disfigured wood will lead to uneven cuts. This will in turn produce kickbacks, which obviously, is something you would not want.
Don’t Forget To Install The Blade Guard Properly
Blade guards play a very crucial role in ensuring safety. It keeps your fingers safe and deflects debris away from you.
Nowadays, it is easy to hook guards to the blades. All you need to do is fit it on top of the blade and secure the plastic clamps or screws for a tight fit.
Also, if the blade guard does not come installed, there is no need to worry. You can buy it from the manufacturer by visiting the brand website.
Know The Location Of The Emergency Button
In case of any accident or a severe kickback, you should immediately turn off your table saw. Most models feature a massive paddle or button; simply press it to turn off the unit in an emergency.
At times, it is possible to push the button with the leg if your hands are preoccupied.
Never Wear Loose Clothing Or Hanging Jewelry
While operating your table saw, you should never wear clothes, such as ties or loose sleeves that can get caught in the blade.
We have found that loose and baggy clothing could get trapped in the machine and pull you into it. And believe us; it is nothing like Charlie Chaplin’s movies so you could get seriously hurt.
Plus, people with long hair should tie it up before operating the machine.
Always Read The Instruction Manual Carefully
Ensure that you read the instruction manual carefully before installing and using your table saw. Even though the functionality of most models are similar, it might vary depending on the brand and the year of manufacture.
The reason you should read the instructions carefully is that they will provide a clear knowledge of every part of the table saw. You will be able to learn about its different components and how they operate.
This will come in handy when fixing any accessory or to disarm the unit during an emergency.
Tips To Maintain Your Table Saw
Table saws require regular maintenance to function efficiently without experiencing hiccups. Here are sometable saw maintenance tips.
Check The Alignment
In most cases, table saws don’t require an alignment provided that it’s not a lower-ned model. Either way, it is best to develop a habit of checking the alignment every time you start working. Doing this will ensure overall safety and deliver precise cuts.
On the other hand, bad alignment can cause many problems, including kickbacks, uneven cuts, and burnt wood edges. Hence, you need to ensure that you are using a straight blade.
To check this, you can place the blade on a flat surface to ascertain whether the saw is vertical. One way to be sure is to look at the splitter or the riving knife which should perfectly align with the blade. Also, don’t forget to check the stabilizing accessories like miter gauge stops, rip fences, and miter slots; the latter should be parallel to the blade.
Overall, it would be best to check all the components that could affect the cutting angle because some parts will require realignment more than the others.
The Cleaning Process
Most woodworking professionals and DIYers often tend to overlook this maintenance step. You must clean and lubricate the parts from time to time in order to prevent tool failures.
Firstly, ensure that you have unplugged the table saw from the power source before gaining access to the internal parts you want to lubricate. We suggest going through the user manual before doing that, ensuring that you know how best to clean them.
After having cleaned the internal components, it would help if you lubricate them with a dry silicone-free lubricant, especially the trunnions and gears. However, do not use wet lubricants as they collect more dust and debris, thereby forming a gum-like material that may harm your table saw.
Polishing And Caring
Always ensure that the tabletop of your model is smooth and well-polished. A dirty surface drastically affects the quality of your work and could reduce the lifespan of the machine.
On the other hand, having a clean and polished tabletop means the materials will slide smoothly allowing you to make varied cuts.
So, as a rule it would be best never to put any kind of food or beverages on them. Also, if you notice rust, sand it gently with a block of wood and sandpaper.
Another valuable tip is that you should always wax and polish the parts in direct contact with the wood, such as the outfeed and rip fence.
Consider Replacement
By following the steps mentioned above, you can extend the lifespan of the vital parts of your table saw. But, if the condition of the components does not look good, you might have to consider replacing them.
So, if your table saw gives out weird vibrations while you are working, turn it off immediately. Then without further delay, get it diagnosed by a professional mechanic.
You should also note that the saw blade is the most common part that needs replacement as it becomes dull quickly if you use the tool frequently. But, if you don’t want to get new blades, at least ensure that you use a blade sharpener for much-need longevity.
Bosch Worksite Table Saw with Wheel Stand FAQs
These are some of the frequently asked questions regarding the Bosch 4100-09 that we have answered. We strongly recommend reading it carefully to clear all your doubts.
What is the Bosch 4100-09’s country of origin?
Bosch is a US-based brand, but its power tools are made in China, including the Bosch 4100-09.
What is the cost of the Bosch 4100-09?
The Bosch 4100-09 table saw would cost you between $500 and $600, making it one of the high-end models. Rest assured, it will be well worth- the investment.
Can I use the Bosch Table Saw professionally?
Despite having a moderately powerful motor and excellent blade rotational speed, the Bosch 4100-09 is not meant for large-scale or heavy-duty projects. As such, it is an ideal choice for DIYers and hobbyists rather than professional woodworkers.
What are the materials that I cut with the Bosch 4100-09?
You can use this product to cut wood but not other materials such as steel, metal, or plastic.
Is using the Bosch 4100-09’s Smart Guard system mandatory?
No, it is not mandatory to use the Smart Guard system of the Bosch 4100-09. If you want, you can operate it without installing this safety feature. However, we do not recommend you doing so as it is highly risky.
What are the dust collection options of the Bosch 4100-09?
As mentioned before, this product comes with its own dust-collecting feature. But, if you consider adding additional equipment for enhancing the functionality of the dust-collecting system, you can do so by using these two vacuum hoses:
Do I have to remove the riving knife for dado cuts?
No, you don’t have to remove the riving knife for dado cuts because it is unremovable. So, to carry out dado cutting, you need to slide it down until it reaches the tabletop.
What are some of the best brands of table saws?
Some of the popular table saw brands that have been consistently manufacturing quality units are Bosch, Dewalt, Skil, and Jet Power Tools. The table saws from these brands have always met the demands of the customers.
Verdict | Is The Bosch 4100-09 A Clear Winner?
Now, coming to the main question - Is the Bosch 4100-09 a clear winner? Well, without a doubt, it is highly beneficial for people looking to purchase a top-quality table saw.
Its powerful amp motor can easily slice through thick woods, which is something professional woodworkers look for in a table saw. And to manage the power for a stable operation, it features a Gravity-Rise stand, allowing buyers to use it on uneven surfaces.
Apart from this, it comes with exceptional safety features, which is a bonus, especially for first-time users.
However, it is not accurate and hence is best for making rough cuts where precision and half-angle play a minor role. But, this does not overshadow the fact that it is affordable, portable, and durable.
Overall, the machine is safe, easy to use, and built with premium-quality materials. So, if you are looking for a portable and heavy-duty table saw, the Bosch Table Saw could be your best bet.
Both are discontinued products, and no longer available on the market. So far no updated products available.
All campers and travelers already know that the Coleman Roadtrip series consists of the LXE and the LXX. Still, most of them are confused about their differences – and their confusion is genuine. Both the LXX and LXE are popular camping grills because they have great features and are completely portable. Both of these models have similar features; so, which of the two should you choose?
Due to the reason that campers and travelers can get confused between the two, we decided to share a Coleman Roadtrip review where we compared the two greats. We will be mentioning the major differences between them order to help you determine which is perfect for your needs. Before we begin the comparison let us talk about the similarities of the products in the Coleman Roadtrip series.
Coleman Roadtrip Series Review– The Similarities
The series consists of the older LX and the focus of this review – the LXX and the LXE. Both these products can be pulled away easily as they can be folded up and moved with the help of its caster wheels present on the sides.
Both these products consist of the insta-start matchless lighting system that will automatically light up your grill. Now that we have mentioned the similarities, let’s get into the main topic of our review – the differences.
Portable propane grill ideal for tailgating, picnicking, and...
Delivers 20,000 BTUs of heat across 285 square inches of...
This product from the Roadtrip series is quite easy to operate and use. We found that with just a few tries, you will be able to assemble the entire product on your own. Another great advantage of this product is that any of Coleman’s grates can be interchanged and used according to your grilling requirements.
Due to the interchangeability, there isn’t much that cannot be cooked by the Roadtrip LXX. When it comes to cooking space, this product offers its users a total surface area of 285 square inches.
The Coleman Roadtrip LXX boasts some key features such as its matchless ignition system, side tables, and steel hooks for its grill tools. Along with these features, the burners in this product will be able to provide the total heating power of about 22,000 BTUs/hour.
Portable propane grill ideal for tailgating, picnicking, and...
Delivers 20,000 BTUs of heat across 285 square inches of...
This next product from the Coleman Roadtrip series is quite easy to use and move around. Alongside this, the product is also quite easy to assemble on your own and can be put together in just a matter of seconds. The product has a surface that offers space for cast iron grilling. This can then be backed with a pot support that needs to be bought separately.
Since we are on the topic of cooking space, the Roadtrip LXE offers its users with a cooking space of up to 285 square inches – which is the same in the case of the LXX. Moving further, if you wish to use this product, all you have to do is push a button and you are ready to go. Lastly, the cumulative cooking power of this product stands at about 20,000 BTUs/hour.
Comparisons Between the LXX and LXE
To be completely honest, we found that both of these products had a lot of similarities. Both of them had been specially designed to be easy to operate, versatile and most importantly – quite portable. Due to these similarities, common customers can find it hard to make a decision between the two. Well, we would like them to know that there are, of course, some parameters that make these products different from each other.
1. Cooking Power
The very first difference between the two products is that they have different cooking powers. The LXE model offers a figure of about 20,000 BTUs/hour for its users while the LXX offers its users a slightly higher 22,000 BTUs/hour.
2. Cooking Space
Besides simple cooking power, another important consideration is that the number of members that can be cooked on the grill. The LXE works at the lesser 20,000 BTUs but still is large enough to cater food for about 15 people. With the slight difference in cooking power, it results are still quite impressive.
3. Build Quality
Another aspect by which both of these products are different is because of their build qualities. The LXX model from the Coleman Roadtrip series has been found to be made of more durable steel as opposed to the LXE models. Both of these models have side tables but the difference seems to be in the case of their hooks. The hooks used in the LXXv have been made of stainless steel whereas the LXE features plastic hooks.
4. The Thermostat
Finally, another section that differentiates both these products is in their thermostats. While this may be a minor difference, all beginners or first-time users can make choices accordingly. That said, the LXX model can be bought with a completely adjustable thermostat whereas the LXE model has nothing of this sort. Naturally, beginners would like to work with the LXX because of this helpful advantage.
So, there you have it, folks! You know all the differences and similarities of the Coleman Roadtrip series. You can go out and make your purchase while keeping all the above considerations in mind, whatever you choose, you are right!
These are both good products, simply choose the one that fits your needs better!
A diy coffee bar in your home can help you entertain family, friends, loved ones. It can serve coffee, tea and all their variations rapidly, professionally, allowing you to focus on having a good time, enjoying their company and stories.
Coffee bars have no strict set of rules, you simply need mugs and a coffee maker, preferably an automatic one. The options when it comes to design are limitless, from fee market salvaged furniture up and pallet wood bars up to extensive bars and dedicated areas you can tailor anything that fits your needs in terms of space and design.
DIY Coffee Bar Ideas
1. reclaimed wood coffee bar
Reclaimed wood has an immense value, it can shape the extraordinary, here taking the shape of small coffee bar, made to entertain.
A simple and clear setup inspired by the Scandinavian-design can enhance your space, the presence of coffee at your grasp in a beautiful shape is something to cherish.
In the office a coffee station would help a great deal, regardless of proportions, size and features a coffee can comfort you in times of need, it can make you more productive.
via instagram.com
5. wood and black in a graphic display
Contrast between black and wooden surfaces ought to be pursued, it speaks of nobility, elegance.
The rustic presence combined with concrete and chalkboard is splendid. Slices of wood and inserts of greenery near glass recipients also contribute to this epic setting.
via The Tale Of An Ugly House
7. complete set in wooden simplicity
Old wood interiors create warmth, they set a delicate ambiance that roots the individual in well being, a strong feeling of appurtenance in the setting is evoked.
Source Unknown
8. withered white in Scandinavian setting
White worn-out side by side with chalkboard frame and a splendid leaf wreath is here completed by delicate typography and wire baskets.
via instagram.com
9. diy coffee bar tailored from scratch
Follow a swift tutorial and craft your diy coffee bar from scratch, emphasize it with all the right coffee-related elements.
One low height teal and wire composition, practical and beautiful.
Souce Unknown
11. traveling inspired coffee bar
A corner of your home inspired by your daily and yearly adventures would be something phenomenal, use elements that you greatly care for to shape epicness.
In diy projects wood will always be the ideal material, easy to work with, accessible and incredibly beautiful material that can emphasize any setting, any space.
via eatwell101.com
27. refurbish an old furnishing to your needs
A new light on an old piece of furniture can shape the ideal diy coffee bar, hit the flee market in the search of old gems.
via creativethings.stfi.re
28. pallet wood tailored as mug display
A coffee mug display would put your collection in the right light whilst keeping them accessible, use it wisely.
via delicatecontruction
29. simple iron and wood coffee bar cart
A simple diy coffee bar cart that can be particularized a great deal, design that here shines in golden hues carrying wooden surfaces.
Black and white balanced by wood in multiple states. Typography and metal elements complete the setting brilliantly.
Source Unknown
34. memory in a sensible coffee bar
Small things in life add another dimension. Here the word faith and the happy couple smiling framed represent items with which one identifies, a personalized space that suddenly became much more than a coffee bar upon their arrival, here one finds calm, peace.
Source Unknown
35. RE-PURPOSE an old window for coffee
A simple addition to a coffee and tea station can be an old window, one ready to carry your mugs and potentially display memories. One glass surface can also carry things that you could write down, a spicy coffee recipe or a tea combination that you love a great deal.
Source Unknown
36. put unused space to good use
Sugar, cream or coffee, whatever you drink it needs a space of its own. The picture below exemplifies how unused space can rapidly gain a really interesting position in your kitchen. Shape your space to fit you needs, coffee is a very important need.
Source Unknown
37. use an old door to create your coffee heaven
One old side table and one old door can shape something really cool, shabby-chic looking, exemplary through a design language that can cost little to nothing.
via kitchenfunwithmy3sons.stfi.re
38. blue copper and white team-up
Copper matched with that blue hue below is simply extraordinary, a combination with which you simply cannot fail. The white brought by the mug is the cherry on the top, exemplary balance in such a simple design shaped by color and texture.
One could argue that typography cannot be overdone and the design makes this statement justice, it`s simple on its own but the abundance of great fonts and messages makes it stand out.
Source Unknown
40. reclaimed wood and wire
Wire hooks are a recurring element that can make a diy coffee bar great justice yet in the composition below the reclaimed wood stands out through simplicity, the white-wood is subdued to its setting yet it complements the scene elegantly.
A small portion of counter-top and all the right utensils can be enough sometimes; simple choose a space to particularize as a coffee bar and make it work as you see fit.
Chalkboard and the right typography can redefine your coffee bar, here emphasized by wooden textures, small pieces of greenery and earthy tones the composition is beautifully balanced.
One small bar cart can receive a marble counter-top to enlarge its surface and accommodate all the utensils needed.
via cool-homedecorations.xyz
44. exquisite French baker coffee bar design
An exquisite coffee bar might not be everyone`s cup of tea but there are options. A French-inspired design wearing white will not clutter your space despite the immense amount of detail.
via Junk Chic Cottage
45. metal and wood diy coffee table
Any side-table can carry salvaged wood tops, here the texture is clear, visible; they`re piece of wood with memory, piece of wood that contrast with black yet bring in a great deal of coziness and warmth.
via katiegen.com
45. coffee station inside kitchen cabinets
It makes sense to hide your coffee station inside the cabinets, it is easier to maintain, it de-clutters your space and it offers a little privacy yet accessibility it lacks.
Simple floating shelves can highlight your coffee bar, use mugs and frames to personalize your space with ease. Here the dark gray segment accentuates the bar a bit.
You can use simple elements to shape the extraordinary and happily IKEA shelters lost of these. Simply shape your coffee corner to fit your needs with items that you actually love and the ensemble will surely end up beautiful, functional, ready to entertain.
Coffee bars are something really splendid in one`s home, they welcome the individual and guests alike with something cozy, warm, something that most of us cherish. What do you think about these spaces and how do you see the ideal DIY coffee bar? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below !
There are significant dangers associated with recharging a CR123A lithium battery, which include gas leaks, fire, and explosion. However, RCR123A batteries are an alternative to the ordinary CR123A, which can be recharged with none of these risks.
CR123A batteries are among the most popular battery types and though they last quite a while, having to replace them can lighten your pockets quite a bit. Recharging your batteries is one way to keep using them without spending more money on replacements.
But the trouble is, CR123A batteries are typically not rechargeable. So, let's dive into the specifications of these batteries and see if we can find an alternative!
Are CR123A Batteries Rechargeable?
'CR123A' typically refers to lithium-based batteries that are made with primary cells, meaning that they are single-use batteries. However, that's not to say that all CR123A batteries are non-rechargeable.
The battery type comes in two distinct varieties: Rechargeable CR123A, aka RCR123A, and Non-Rechargeable CR123A. Let's look at both battery types and learn why one of them can be reused while the other can't.
Rechargeable CR123A Batteries
Rechargeable CR123A are Lithium-ion batteries which can be recharged and reused over and over again. These primary batteries have a nominal voltage in the range of 3.6 to 3.7 volts, with a capacity of 500 to 800mAh. This means that these batteries can power a 100mAh device for up to 8 hours.
Since these can be reused, you'll be using your rechargeable battery for far longer than a typical CR123A battery. It comes half-charged and must be fully charged before you use it for the first time. If left unused, RCR123A batteries will eventually begin to lose charge and deplete within three to four years of disuse.
Additionally, these rechargeable batteries come with safety features to protect them from short circuits, current surges, and other electrical hazards while in a battery compartment. These features affect the batteries' capacity, but it's a relatively small tradeoff for the safety they provide.
And lastly, a good-quality RCR123A battery can last over 1,000 charging cycles, leading to a longer life than its non-rechargeable counterpart. RCR123A battery chargers are relatively inexpensive as well.
Non-Rechargeable CR123A Batteries
Non-rechargeable CR123A batteries are lithium-based batteries which were made with a construction method that makes it impossible for them to be recharged again. With a nominal voltage of 3.0 volts and a capacity of up to 1,700mAh, these batteries are more powerful and hold more charge than the RCR123A batteries.
The lack of reusability is compensated by their large capacity and high run time, which can power a 100mAh device for up to 17 hours. Once you purchase them, you won’t have to test your CR123A lithium batteriesand can begin using them immediately out of the box.
Once depleted, you must discard your set of CR123A batteries properly and replace them with a fresh set. You can rack up high costs in battery replacements if you use your CR123A-powered devices very often.
Before diving in further, we’d suggest you to check out our article titled ‘How To Fix A Wireless Doorbell’ if you like content related to batteries and battery-powered devices.
Why Can RCR123A Be Recharged But CR123A Cannot
It all comes down to the way each of these battery types are made. The key between lithium-based batteries and Li-ion batteries is that the former uses primary cell construction, while the latter uses secondary cell construction.
To put it simply, Lithium-batteries are made with high-charge density and cannot hold any more power once depleted. Thus, a lithium battery will last longer than a lithium-ion battery with full charge.
Can You Recharge Non-Rechargeable CR123A Batteries Anyways?
Some swear by using a slow charger to recharge a non-rechargeable battery, but that doesn’t come without its share of hazards. Both primary and secondary cell battery types can ignite without any external influence, but the tendency is especially higher in the former. An energetic venting reaction can occur when a CR123A battery heats up while charging. This can create plumes of smoke, flammable gas, spray flammable electrolytes around and, in turn, cause a fire.
So, as a general rule of thumb, you should never attempt to recharge lithium batteries, including CR123A batteries.
Can You Recharge CR123A Lithium Batteries Conclusion
CR123A are used to power high-output equipment and so, they store a lot more charge to provide the required energy. While completely safe in normal use, they can become very dangerous if tampered with in a manner not intended by the manufacturer.
If the CR123A you're looking to recharge is labeled non-rechargeable by the manufacturer, you mustn't attempt to plug it into a charge in any circumstances. The hazards are too great to ignore, resulting in needless damages to your property and maybe even your health.
That said, rechargeable CR123A can provide you with a longer lifespan than a typical CR123A. You can safely recharge them thousands of times without any issues, and they are readily available in most stores.
None of us like it when we have bugs hovering around during our evening walks in the garden.
So how to get rid of them in the best way? Well, there are lots of options available, both chemical and natural. Going for chemical insecticide sprays may give you quicker and more effective results.
But we are all aware of how harmful they can be for our health. So, a natural solution to this problem will be much healthier. Growing insect-repelling plants in your home garden or planting them in small pots indoors can be a great way to deal with this problem.
The trouble is that there are quite a lot of such plants available. And not all of them are equally safe and effective. So, we help you in your search with this list of the 27 best plants that repel flies and other unwanted insects.
Too many mosquitos anywhere are a nuisance and often cannot be dealt with using vaporizers. Moreover, studies have revealed that vaporizers are harmful to health and their use should be avoided.
Insead, keeping a lantana plant can be much more effective as its flowers have a powerful effect against mosquitos. It acts as a natural repellant and has no harmful effects on adults.
So, if tackling mosquitos in the backyard has become a headache for you, a lantana plant is a great option to go for. Growing it in tropical climates is quite easy and butterflies are also attracted by its flowers.
But note that this plant can have toxic effects in children and pets, and hence, should be kept away from them. The best way to plant it would be to put it in a hanging basket or container on the patio.
Plants belonging to the Allium family are known for repelling insects of different kinds, including aphids and rust flies. Most of these insects are known to destroy vegetable gardens and can be effectively tackled by such plants.
A member of this family is the Allium Giganteum plant which has beautiful purple flower heads adorning stalks with a height of 6 feet. Plants that benefit from having this flowering plant around include cabbage, potatoes, carrots, kohlrabi, and tomatoes.
So, keeping this plant in your garden will not only make it prettier but also keep away unwanted insects or pests. Furthermore, the strong fragrance released by these flowers is also disliked by mosquitoes. So, they are never found around these plants.
This is a great choice if you are in search of a plant variety to keep away flies, mosquitoes, cucumber beetles, squash bugs, and more. Tansy has attractive yellow flowers and can grow up to a height of six feet though most tansy plants generally reach up to three feet.
You will generally find tansies near squash or cucumber plants since they work as good companion plants and also help to ward away predators. Apart from this, you can also plant a tansy around flowering plants or other vegetables.
However, this can be fatal to animals and hence should be avoided if you have livestock at your home. Even if it is planted away from them, the seeds might spread across the pasture lands or fields and start growing there. Notably, the oil extracted from tansies is also used to create a powerful repellent spray.
This herb is quite popular as a cooking ingredient, but do you know that it can also repel mosquitoes and flies? Its pungent smell drives away cabbage moths and several other bugs in vegetable gardens.
Rosemary is especially effective in areas with dry, hot weather and can be planted in various places in vegetable gardens. However, with the right protection and care, they will also stay evergreen in different growing zones. You can even grow them in containers, which helps in shaping these plants into beautiful ornamental pyramids.
Rosemary oil which is extracted from the plant and processed afterward also helps in adding flavor to the food. Interestingly, a few drops of this oil can be added in the diffuser of a room to keep it free from mosquitoes and flies.
Also widely known as citronella, this ornamental herb can grow upto a height of 4 feet and a width of 3 feet within 4-5 months. Interestingly, it is used to make special candles called citronella candles which help to get rid of mosquitoes.
Citronella is actually the natural oil found in lemongrass, which repels mosquitoes as they dislike its smell. So it serves well when planted close to seating areas or walkways. Also, it can be planted in large planters so that it can be moved around for efficient pest control.
Note that a citronella plant may be difficult to get hold of and is often labeled incorrectly. A true plant will have long narrow leaves and look like a pot of grass.
This plant also has a number of culinary applications due to the fragrance of its narrow leaves. As such, it is used for flavoring many dishes and for salad dressing.
The flowers of a marigold plant have a distinctly unpleasant smell which keeps tiny insects away from the backyard. This smell also repels aphids, mosquitoes and even rabbits coming close to the flowers.
Pyrethrum, a common and powerful ingredient of insect repelling products, is found in Marigold. Moreover, the vibrant orange and yellow shades of the flowers enhance the beauty of any landscape. An amazing fact about Marigolds is that the roots of these plants are popularly used by farmers for repelling nematodes. However, it might take as long as a year to show positive effects.
But the insect repelling properties of the plant don’t end here. They also release a compound called limonene, which slows down or interrupts the forage of whiteflies hovering around tomato plants. So, if you are thinking about growing fresh tomatoes, this plant will be quite helpful for you.
Nasturtiums
Nasturtiums benefit cucumber and tomato plants near them by releasing an airborne chemical that repels most predaceous insects. Such insects include wooly aphids, whiteflies, squash bugs and cucumber beetles. Besides, the flowers of the plant also act as a trap for aphids.
This plant has a variety with yellow blooming flowers that benefits almost all the vegetables you know of. It keeps away all insects that might plague vegetables like radishes, kale, tomatoes, collards, kohlrabi, cucumbers and cabbage.
Hence, it will be best to plant nasturtiums along the edges of your vegetable garden. Also, when planted around patios and along flower beds, this flower will protect the nearby plants from unwanted insects.
You can make a natural homemade insect repellant using basil leaves to ensure pesky insects don’t disturb your fun during the summer. Not only will it help to keep away all stinging bugs, you will also love its pleasant fragrance.
Some simple steps have to be followed to make this spray. All you will need is about 4 to 6 oz of fresh basil leaves and 4 oz of boiling water. Let the leaves stay for a few hours in the water and then remove the leaves.
Finally, add 4 oz of vodka to the basil-water solution and your repellent is ready. Store it in the refrigerator and use it while you are sitting outdoors.
Furthermore, oils in the basil plant can repel thrips, mosquitoes and flies. So, you can protect your vegetable produce by planting it around your garden as well.
This plant is quite popular for being a healthy source of food. However, very few people know that it is also useful as an insect repellent for gardens.
Interestingly, Parsley has a unique way of dealing with insects. It attracts predator bugs which are predators to other insects. At first thought, this might seem like more trouble, but is actually quite effective.
For example, if a snail is crawling its way forward to a plant, there will be another kind of bug to stop it. Besides, parsley is hated by beetles; hence, sprinkling a few leaves on the vegetable bed will repel these harmful insects.
Generally, farmers who grow tomato plants prefer to keep parsley along with the plants. This is done to attract the wasps as they help in killing hornworms which can destroy tomatoes.
This beautiful flowering plant is undoubtedly among the best options to adorn your garden with. Besides the gorgeous purple color that adds elegance to any garden, it has a very sweet fragrance. As such, it is used in adding aroma to homes, closets and clothes.
However, surprisingly enough, this fragrance deters any mosquitoes, gnats, flies and other unwanted insects from coming near it. So, to keep your garden or backyard pest-free, you can plant lavenders in the sunny areas over there.
A lavender plant mostly thrives in regions with hot, sunny and well-drained climates. It is also a very easy plant to move about and has several varieties to suit your growing space and climate needs.
There are smaller ones which can be potted and placed at different spots around the property. Thus, these plants can make for attractive home decor and also help in pest control.
This is another flowering plant that serves a dual purpose by beautifying your garden and protecting it from insects. It is available in several bright hues.
Keeping it in a vegetable garden helps repel some of the insects that might bite vegetables. In fact, farmers regard it as one of the best natural pesticides. Apart from this, petunias also repel leafhoppers, hornworms, asparagus beetles and squash bugs.
Petunias are immensely popular primarily because they are easily available, and that their hues make any space look absolutely adorable.
Furthermore, they require minimal maintenance, so you don’t need to take care of them now and then. Just make sure that they are planted in sunny areas, and you’ll have your flowers standing tall in all the places.
Chrysanthemums help repel several bugs and insects such as roaches, fleas, ticks, spider mites, and aphids. However, they might not be so effective on mosquitoes.
Notably, the insect repellent property of chrysanthemums makes these flowers an essential ingredient in aerosol bombs, room fresheners and many pet shampoos. The pyrethrum present in these flowers can kill both flying and jumping insects. As such, they make for an efficient natural alternative to synthetic chemical products.
For getting effective results, you should place these plants strategically inside or outside the house. This way, the windows can be kept open without having to hear the buzz of insects. Also, the chrysanthemums look quite beautiful against a background and hence make a nice addition to any garden or home.
Not many of you may know that this immensely popular culinary ingredient can also be used to repel insects. Sprinkling a few dried bay leaves around the house will make you realize how powerful it is as a repellent. You won’t find cockroaches, ants or fleas for a couple of days.
These leaves have a pungent smell which helps to ward off the pests from any place. You can keep these leaves around trash cans, under cabinets and appliances, and on the countertops. Although, they might have to be replaced after a few days as the smell fades away.
However, keeping the home clean becomes much easier this way and you also don’t have to worry about the release of any toxic chemicals. And bay leaves are believed to have as potent effects as commercial insecticides, which puts you at an advantage.
The most amazing feature of this plant is that it can thrive naturally in any environment. For example, it adapts easily to shallow, dry or rocky soil, hence thriving in a herb garden won’t be difficult for it. However, it must receive proper sunlight in the place where it’s kept.
A lemon thyme plant is particularly useful for keeping away mosquitoes. Although, you have to crush a few of its leaves and rub it between your palms to release the repellant chemicals. Before you rub the crushed leaves on your body, you should check whether its natural properties will have any effect on your skin.
For this, rub a slight amount of the crushed leaves on your forearm to check for any reactions. If no allergic reaction occurs, you are safe to enjoy this natural mosquito repellent any time you are outdoors.
This perennial can easily be planted into landscaped beds or placed in planters on a patio. Most of you who have herb gardens at home might be aware of its repellent properties. Sage plants must be grown under direct sunlight, but can also thrive in spots with partial shade in the hotter regions.
Insects generally dislike its powerful odor, both when its leaves are intact on the stem or when they are crushed. Burning a few leaves can also help if you’re planning to gather around a fire. You get a sweet incense when the leaves burn, which is unpleasant enough for most insects.
Precisely, most insects usually repel the smell. And you can also be free from worries of mosquito bites while you are seated near the smoke.
These beautiful flowering plants may not be the best repellant, but have a powerful fragrance that hummingbirds and butterflies love. This comes from a chemical compound called coumarin found in these flowers. Coumarin is popularly used in mosquito and bug repellant sprays.
However, the unwanted visitors in your garden such as mosquitoes dislike the smell of this chemical. As such, these small and fuzzy flowers can be a great addition to all flower beds or can be plated at the edges.
These flowers produce beautiful pink, white and blue blooms during fall and summer season. So they can complement any bouquet easily. Thus, planting floss flowers in any fertile soil around your home isn’t a bad idea at all.
In earlier times, this plant was believed to draw in cats to the fields to prevent the menace of rodents. Catnip was kept by farmers around the foundations of their barns as well as homes. It can also directly repel a lot of insects and even mice when planted in areas opening into your house.
A chemical called nepetalactone present in the catnip plant does give out an odor that attracts cats. But the same odor also acts as a repellent for insects such as cockroaches, flies, deer ticks and mosquitoes.
This plant can be grown quite easily and doesn’t need much maintenance other than just daily watering. While both saplings and seeds can be used to plant them, the ideal seasons are during fall or spring. Generally, it grows upto a height of 3-4 feet, with the whole plant covered with pretty purple flowers.
The four o’clock plant gets its unique name from its tendency to bloom during late afternoon. It has a poisonous foliage which kills insects in a short while after they start feeding on it.
Thus, though some beetles love to feed on its flowers, they can hardly complete the meal. Its flowers attract the insects through their smell and hence act as baits.
Hence, four o’clocks are excellent plants to place on the corners of vegetable gardens. This plant can also be planted in the backyard to control infestation by mosquitoes. The flower extracts are effective against several mosquito breeds.
However, these plants also have poisonous effects on humans and animals. Hence you should choose a safe location for planting them.
If you regard a plant’s beneficial properties to be as important as its appearance, geranium is an ideal plant to keep in your home garden. This plant is a popular ingredient in mosquito-repellant sprays. Moreover, it can repel a wide variety of insects.
Growing it in your garden would mean you can enjoy your time there both during mornings and evenings.
Notably, these plants grow well in sunny and dry climates and grow at a fast pace also. Their flowers produce a lemon-like aroma that can repel typical insects such as snails, beetles and slugs.
Due to this, geranium is used as a companion plant for different fruits and vegetables including cabbage and tomatoes.
Mint leaves find use in a variety of food products and recipes for its aromatic properties. But not many of you might know that it has insect repellent properties as well. Planting mint in your home garden works as a repellent for all insects including mosquitoes.
Furthermore, the oil from mint leaves can be extracted and mixed with apple cider vinegar or witch hazel to make a natural mosquito repellent at home.
However, growing the plant from the seeds can be a lengthy and challenging task. Instead, you can go for a potted mint plant. Also, mint plants might spread aggressively when they are planted on the ground and can take over other plants.
So, they are grown in small or medium-sized pots which are kept in separate spots.
Belonging to the largest group of carnivorous plants, pitcher plants render an exotic look to any garden. To maintain these plants you just need to water them from time to time so that they can catch their prey.
Insects are trapped in their U-shaped pitchers, which are actually specialized leaves having a combination of nectar, color, and fragrance. Inside the pitcher is a slippery surface with hairs facing downward. On entering it, the insect falls or slips into a pool of water where it dies of exhaustion while trying to escape.
A variety of bugs and mosquitoes are attracted by the scent of these plants and hence you are sure to have a pest-free home. Insects that fall prey to pitcher plants include ants, flies, snails, beetles, slugs and many more. They can be kept in any spot in the house since all it requires to thrive is sunlight and water.
The leaves of a wormwood plant have a resinous particle that can be used as a natural insecticide. Picking some of these fresh leaves and rubbing them on your arm or on clothes helps to keep flies away. You can also dry the leaves and make a bundle out of them to place it in closets or near doorways.
This plant is also popularly known as absinthe and has been used for medicinal purposes since the ancient times. Wormwood plants were also widely used as a flavoring agent for some beverages.
However, due to its powerful properties and negative side-effects when consumed in large quantities, it has been banned in many countries. Externally applying any part of the plant is safe but before using it in any other way, make sure you consult a doctor.
This woody plant with a strong scent has disinfectant properties and repels many kinds of insects. Its powerful properties make it most useful when left in its natural surroundings. Use the parts separately only if you know about the correct usage of the plant and its extracts.
The rue plant grows to a height of about 2 feet, has bluish leaves and can tolerate poor soils easily. It can be a good addition to perennial gardens as it provides you with a natural fragrant border besides keeping all insects away.
This plant is best grown from its seeds during the spring, and can reseed every year with the correct environment. However, the leaves of the rue plant are the most powerful when it is kept from flowering.
This small plant will only grow to a height of 10 or 12 inches, but has umbrella-like leaves and beautiful white flowers, which look great in shade gardens. Its flowers also produce a fresh and sweet fragrance that is loved by all.
Sweet woodruff is popularly used near bulb plantings as it repels flies naturally. You don’t need to dry or cut the plant to get the effect. It can also be used for adding a fragrant smell to sitting areas.
All you have to do is plant it within patio pots by propagating from the existing garden plants. Just make sure that the soil stays moist. Furthermore, planting sweet woodruffs near decks and porches is sufficient to keep away flies. However, this plant can be invasive and take over the garden if you’re not careful enough.
This is another carnivorous plant that eats many small insects that are small enough to fit inside its trap. As such, the leaves can close tightly to protect the digestive fluids inside from any bacteria. Venus flytraps thrive in acidic soil but need good drainage along with moderate sunlight.
This plant’s digestive process takes three to seven days, after which the trap reabsorbs the digestive fluid before reopening. Interestingly, although these plants are carnivorous, they can stay for nearly two months without eating any insects.
Ideally you should grow venus flytraps outside, so that they get enough insects to eat naturally. However, if the infestation becomes too problematic, you can go for an affordable pest control service since it would deliver results faster.
Pennyroyal plants, which are usually used for decoration purposes, have also been found to repel most biting insects. But its use as a repellent must be carried out with caution.
You can rub the fresh cuttings of the plant to release the aromatic oil into clothes and caps. However, neither the plant nor oil should be consumed without the advice of a physician.
Pennyroyal plants in your garden will help in deterring most bugs from your vegetables. They can be planted around or even under your plants as they are low-growers.
Notably, these plants are a member of the mint family and hence can become invasive in a short while. So remember to re-transplant them during the fall season or simply rip them out.
Considered as having a wide range of health benefits, the eucalyptus is also famous for its silver-dollar foliage. Interestingly, it was registered in the US as a miticide and insecticide in 1948, and is indeed a handy plant to have around for pest control.
Note that this plant has a variety of species, some of which can even reach a height of 130 feet. As such, it would be best to choose a small variety for your garden, which will grow well when planted in pots. Eucalyptuses produce a potent smell on their own which can deter flies to some extent.
Although, the oil obtained from the leaves is much more potent and may be crushed from the leaves and rubbed on, or extracted for further use. A really effective natural insect repellent spray can also be made by mixing this oil with water.
Conclusion
With this, we come to the end of our list and we hope you found it helpful.
Before we sign off, we would like to offer you a tip for choosing one or more suitable plants for home. Make sure you measure the amount of space to be dedicated to the plant. Accordingly, you can choose a herb or flowering plant which can fit comfortably in that space.
So, go on and select a suitable plant to grow in your garden! You will soon be free from the irritating buzz of insects all around.
If the dull and flaky walls of your home are becoming an eyesore, reviving your space is the need of the hour.
Painting is the easiest way to spruce up the interiors of your home. Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are two top brands that come to mind while searching for the best paint. Both these brands have been favorites of professional painters and DIY enthusiasts.
Since both brands offer top-notch quality paints for your home, choosing the perfect one for your walls would be a challenging task. But, to make things easier for you, we gave a shot at some of the paints from these brands to get a clearer picture.
We have handpicked a few of the best paints from these brands to discuss their features, what's good and what's bad to help you make an informed decision.
So, without any further delay, let's dive right into the details.
Sherwin Williams vs. Benjamin Moore
The walls of the home aren't painted every year, and so, the paint you choose to brighten them must be durable enough to withstand wearing, fading, and chipping. While the Sherwin Williams paints are ideal for your furniture, cabinets, and other similar tasks, the Benjamin Moore paints are perfect for coating the exteriors.
The two powerhouse paint brands are the go-to brands for the professionals, mainly because of their top-notch quality and performance. Also interesting is the fact that these two paint brands offer both high-grade and low-grade paints to suit your needs and budgets.
Both brands can revive the interiors of your home through their vibrant colors. They can add style and enhance the aesthetic value of your space while also preventing them against the elements.
A Glance At Sherwin Williams
For over 150 years, Sherwin Williams has been adding life to the living spaces of the Americans. If you want to quick-fix the walls of the office or add a dramatic haul to the bedroom, Sherwin Williams paints will transform the entire tone of your space.
Speaking of its products, there is a whole kit and caboodle of all the painting needs of the painters. From primers, sealers, wood stains to aerosols and floor coatings, you get everything you want. Apart from paints, you get painting equipment and safety gear too.
With their wide variety of stains, you can enhance the fences, revive furniture, repaint your cabinets, and even add vibrant hues to the plain walls. Speaking of the color palette, Sherwin Williams palettes are pretty impressive. From finest whites to warm and cool neutrals, you can lay your hands on any color. They are curated to add style and elegance to your space.
A Glance At Benjamin Moore
Benjamin Moore's infinite color palettes will perfectly suit your taste. No matter whether you are looking for whites, neutrals, or rich marsala red, they perfectly add style and class to your space. Their colors can add exuberance to your dull living room and even liven up your bedroom.
For decades, they have been delivering top-quality stains and finishes throughout the nation. What's more interesting is the coverage it offers to your walls. Speaking of durability, these paints are highly durable and protect the exteriors of your home from the elements.
With their specialty glazes, finishes, and paints, you can overhaul the walls into spectacular pieces of art. Also, their color palettes are designed by the expert for your convenience. From their vast color collections, you can choose any color and brighten up the interiors of your space.
Whether you are a professional painter, a DIYer, or a hobbyist, Benjamin Moore's diverse color collection is perfect for all your painting, repainting, and DIY projects.
Sherwin Williams vs. Benjamin Moore: A Comparison
The two powerhouse paint brands of the USA, Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore, are a painter's favorite, mainly because of their premium-quality stains. And now, after getting an idea of the two brands and their products, we assume you're ready to jump right into the comparison of the two.
Without a doubt, the paints of both these brands offer excellent coverage, shine, and durability. And so, if you are a hobbyist or a DIYer looking for the best stain for the next project, you need to know what sets the two brands apart.
So, we will go through certain important factors you must pay attention to while choosing between the two.
Paint Coverage
Regardless of the size of your project, coverage is the most important feature while choosing any paint for your project. As such, the premium paints from Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are slightly expensive. However, they offer exceptional coverage, hiding marks and old stains without a hitch.
Also, whether you use rollers or brushes, the coverage remains unaffected. And, with just one coat, you're done with the painting task. As such, the professionals have been using this paint for years because of the excellent coverage it offers.
Furthermore, the Aura product of Benjamin Moore is highly popular among the masses because of the smooth finish and even coverage that it offers to your surface. Plus, you'd also be pleased with the Regal Select paint in one primer, which offers even better coverage than the standard Regal paints.
And, if you're going for Sherwin Williams, then you must lay hands on Sherwin Williams Cashmere as its paint and primer in one combo provide a buttery smooth application.
Going with slightly expensive paint might be better if you are a DIYer, a hobbyist, or an enthusiast working on any painting project or repainting your living space. This is because the cheaper ones do not offer even coverage. Also, they tend to leave lines on the surface, which is not the case with these paints.
Color Fan Decks And Color Files
If you've been into painting for quite some time, you must already know about the "fan deck." However, in case you don't, let us tell you.
Put simply, they are a collection of all the shades offered by the brand. They are named so as the book spreads out like the fan. Fun, isn't it?
Both the Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore offer a fan deck that consists of paint chips of the shades offered by the brand. We've got our hands on both the fan decks, and we can say that both of them offer a wide range of hues for you to choose from. However, the Sherwin Williams one stands out in contrast to Benjamin Moore's.
The Sherwin Williams fan deck is the most versatile as it consists of over 2,000 colors which is pretty impressive. Moreover, it features sheen, gloss, and even gray-shade primer chips. This makes it easy for you to understand the texture and shade without the hassles of visiting a store.
Benjamin Moore's color fan deck is curated by the experts. They offer around 5 fan decks ranging from subtle and sophisticated hues, airy pastels, and neutrals to dramatic deeps and bold hues. With such a diverse range, you can choose whichever shade you want.
There is no doubt that the color palettes of both brands are manifold. However, we've seen customers prefer Sherwin Williams over Benjamin Moore because of its myriad shades.
Whether you should choose Sherwin Williams or Benjamin Moore's fan deck depends entirely upon your needs and preferences. However, if you are a professional painter, you must go for the Sherwin Williams fan deck. And Benjamin Moore's fan deck is excellent for all the novices, DIYers, and hobbyists.
Quality
Whether you are looking for a quick fix or want to give a complete makeover to the interiors, a paint of high quality can provide the much-needed finish to your surface. The market is saturated with cheaper paints of inferior quality, which are prone to peeling and chipping. Also, they leave a banding effect on the surfaces.
But none is the case if you go for premium quality paints. So, a top-notch quality paint will be the best option for your next renovation project. As such, the high-grade paints from Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are slightly expensive; they provide a smooth and even finish to your surface.
Although you'd notice the quality of both the paints is similar to each other, most people prefer Benjamin Moore over Sherwin Williams. So, in terms of quality, both these brands are equally good, and you can use either one for your projects.
Be it Sherwin Williams or Benjamin Moore, you may use whichever appeals to you, for they both are premium quality paints and will provide a smooth finish.
Durability
Both Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore's paints are highly durable. They are resistant to wearing, chipping, and flaking. If painted on the exteriors, such as fences, they protect the surface from the elements.
If you are planning to go for Sherwin Williams, you must try out the Duration Home Interior Acrylic Latex paint, for they are highly durable. This would be perfect for adding durability to the walls of your home.
Also, if you are looking to add durability to the trims and cabinets, you must try the Emerald urethane trim enamel. It will provide the much-needed durability to your surfaces, making it resistant to wear and tear. Apart from this, SuperPaint and ProClassic would also be excellent options to add durability to furniture, cabinets, and walls.
But, if you plan to use Benjamin Moore for your next renovation project, Aura is a must-try, for it is the most sophisticated line of paints. It is best for those spaces which will be frequently cleaned for it offers excellent durability.
So, as far as durability is concerned, both Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are similar. However, people tend to prefer Benjamin Moore over Sherwin Williams because of its improved durability.
Performance
You don't paint your home every now and then. So, you might as well choose a high-performing paint. Both brands are on the same terms as far as performance is concerned. While talking about performance, coverage, and touch-up are the two areas you need to consider. The number of coats you need to cover your surface is known as coverage. The better the brand you invest in, the fewer coats you will require.
Moreover, cheap quality paints offer nothing but poor coverage. So, it's better to invest in a top-notch brand to ensure efficient performance.
And, the next thing to consider is touch-ups. If, after a few years, your paint begins to flake or chip away, the brands offer touch-ups. Of course, you'd want a good touch-up that will blend seamlessly with the previous coating and not a bad one that leaves marks. So, you must invest in high-end paints for flawless touch-ups.
In terms of performance, both Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are outstanding. In fact, it is the go-to paint for all professional painters and amateurs. However, while testing, we found out that Benjamin Moore surpassed Sherwin Williams because it is super easy to apply, offers more durability, and is easy to clean.
So, if you are a novice and have not much experience with paints, Benjamin Moore is the best to get your hands on. However, for professionals, Sherwin Williams is an excellent choice.
Accessibility
Getting your hands on Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore isn't difficult. As they are popular paint brands, you can easily buy them from the local stores. However, there's a slight difference in ownership. Sherwin Williams stores are locally owned, while Benjamin Moore has authorized dealer outlets.
The novices just have to google outlets near them and walk into their favorite brands' store to get their hands on the pastel or neutrals to create their masterpiece.
Affordability
If you're wondering which of the two brands comes with an affordable price tag, then let us tell you that there isn't much of a difference.
Benjamin Moore's one paint can of 2 gallons will cost you around between 45 to 50 dollars. But, we've noticed Sherwin Williams is slightly on the expensive side. So, if you are looking for an affordable option, Benjamin Moore is perfect. But if your client demands Sherwin Williams coating, you might as well shell out a few extra bucks.
Also, the prices fluctuate every now and then. So, it is best to keep an eye on them so that you can have a great deal when the prices are low. And, if you want to pinch pennies, you can keep an eye on their space for deals and discounts.
Sherwin Williams Paints vs. Benjamin Moore Paints
Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are the two powerhouse brands providing quality paints for all your needs. In terms of quality and performance, both brands are on cut-throat competition as both ensure even coverage and a smooth finish to whatever project you have at hand
However, you won't buy paints from both brands. So, to make things easier for you, we'll now compare a few popular products from Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore to help you gain more clarity so that you pick the best.
So, without any further ado, let's dive right into the deets.
Benjamin Moore White Dove vs. Sherwin Williams Alabaster
If you're looking for the white paint to brighten up your space, then both these paints from the two brands are excellent. These high-quality paints create a perfect backdrop for all your masterpieces.
When it comes to appearance, they look pretty similar to each other. But, after testing both, we can say that the Benjamin Moore White Dove gets an edge over Sherwin Williams Alabaster due to its enhanced durability.
In comparison to the white dove paint, which is easy to spread and clean once dried, the alabaster paint dries rapidly and provides a glossy surface. Although both the paints are just about the same price, the Benjamin Moore provides an excellent value for your money if you're looking for a 2 gallon can.
The Benjamin Moore white dove is the best for novices, amateurs, and DIYers, while the alabaster paint is excellent for professionals.
Benjamin Moore Ben vs. Sherwin Williams Opulence
Benjamin Moore Ben offers excellent coverage to your walls, flawlessly hiding all the marks and stains. That being said, it comes with an expensive price tag. But if you're simply planning to repaint your bedroom, Sherwin Williams opulence will be perfect.
Both of these paints come with the same coverage, and so just with 2 coatings, you're done. But while testing the two paints, we came across the fact that Sherwin Williams spreads quickly with a roller and provides smooth walls than the Ben by Benjamin Moore. Because of its smoothness, you are able to roll the walls in a breeze.
It is true not a lot of enthusiasts or hobbyists pay attention to this. But, if you are a professional in this field, you know how important this factor is. If you are a DIYer, you'll love the Sherwin Williams Opulence because of its buttery smooth application.
Benjamin Moore Regal Select vs. Sherwin Williams Cashmere
If you have a large-scale project at hand, we assume you're in quest of a variety of paint offering different finishes. As such, the Regal Select and Cashmere by the two powerhouse brands come in a variety of finishes to meet your needs.
Although both the paints are of premium quality, the Regal Select is a cut above Cashmere. And this is why it costs a few bucks more than Cashmere. Also, the Regal Select is easier to spread, clean, and is highly durable than the Cashmere.
So, if quality is your major concern, Benjamin Moore is a better bet any day. However, if it isn't available in the local store, you can order it directly from their website.
Benjamin Moore Advance vs. Sherwin Williams ProClassic
If you are confused between Benjamin Moore Advance and Sherwin Williams ProClassic, then let us ease your confusion. We tested both the products and found Benjamin Moore's Advance paint was of better quality than the Sherwin Williams ProClassic. The novices, DIYers, and hobbyists can easily use this paint, for it is easy to spread.
Also, you do not have to recoat the surface to ensure an even finish, thanks to its thick consistency. Furthermore, using a sprayer will provide a better sheen to your surface.
We also noticed that the Advance paint did not emit as much odor as the ProClassic paint, thanks to its low VOC. So, you can work for long hours without worrying about headaches.
However, the ProClassic's odor isn't very strong. It has some weird plastic kind of smell which disappears in a day. Simply put, the Advance paint is almost odorless while the ProClassic emits an odor.
As for the quality, the Advance paint is of much better quality than the ProClassic. Overall, both the paints offer a smooth finish and excellent coverage. Also, it is relatively easy on your pockets.
If you are sensitive to strong smells, Benjamin Moore's Advance paint will be the best for you. But if you can withstand odors and want to freshen up your room with a subtle glow, Sherwin Williams is the best option.
Why Prefer Sherwin Williams?
Sherwin Williams is without a doubt world's most renowned brand offering stains and coating for various purposes. What catches our attention is that it offers over 2000 colors to choose from to get what you want. Whether you are looking for brighter white or crabby apple, Sherwin Williams has it all. Also, you can get shades customized and paint the interiors with your favorite hues.
You'll love the buttery smooth application and excellent coverage offered by their paints. Whether there are marks or stains on the walls, Sherwin Williams covers all the imperfections flawlessly. Also, they furnish your home with elegance, thanks to their premium quality.
Furthermore, their stain-blocking paints cover the previous stains flawlessly on your walls. And Sherwin Williams paints are super easy to clean and can also withstand fading. Plus, if you’re confused regarding the shades, they've got experts to help you out.
Why Prefer Benjamin Moore?
Whether revamping a client's house or renovating your own space, Benjamin Moore's wide variety of shades will perfectly add life to your space. Their Natura range of paint is odorless because it contains no VOCs. You can ensure long working hours without posing any threat to your health.
They are the painter's favorite because they can be easily spread using rollers. You can clean them easily using water and mild soap. What's interesting is that they offer excellent coverage. Simply apply 2 coats, and your job is done. Moreover, you'll love their vibrant hues, which add class, elegance, and style to the homes.
Furthermore, whether you are looking for a quick fix or dramatic overhaul, you can do anything without costing a fortune. Also, their high-pigmentation technology doesn't let the color fade, ensuring they last really long. So, they are highly durable.
Frequently Asked Questions
Since both the brands are pretty identical in terms of performance, coverage, and finish, we understand you might have some queries regarding the two. So, we'll be answering a handful of the most commonly asked questions. Let's have a look.
Which Is The Better Brand For Painting The Exteriors?
Although both the brands offer premium quality paints, we recommend Sherwin Williams for painting the exterior surfaces. You can go for Sherwin Williams Exterior Acrylic Latex, for they are highly durable. Their thick consistency offers excellent coverage to your surfaces. Use them once, and they will last for years.
Also, another amazing product for your exteriors is the Super paint from Sherwin Williams, which offers excellent protection against the elements and also withstands peeling and fading. Also, it is resistant to mildew and dirt.
Which Company's Paint is The Best?
As it is, it all depends upon the user's needs and preferences. However, in our opinion, Benjamin Moore edges over Sherwin Williams, mainly because of its enhanced durability.
They are easy to apply, resistant to fading, and chipping and have a quick dry time compared to Sherwin Williams. Also, they are the go-to paints for professionals.
Which Brand Is Best For DIY works?
For a DIY person, Benjamin Moore would prove to be an excellent option. Its thick consistency provides excellent coverage. You can use a roller or a brush and easily apply it to your walls. You also don't need to worry about the paint running down due to its thick consistency. So, for a beginner or a DIYer, this is an excellent option.
Summing It Up
When it comes to paints, both Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore are the best in the US.
While Benjamin Moore is more popular among the novices and DIYers, Sherwin Williams is much preferred by professionals.
They are pretty identical to each other in terms of performance, coverage, durability, and accessibility. Both brands indeed manufacture similar quality products, and so it isn't easy to pick a winner. Ultimately, it boils down to your needs and preferences. Honestly, in our opinion, it is a tie.
With that, we come to the end of our guide. Hopefully, you will be able to pick the correct one for your needs. Let us know which brand you'd opt for your painting tasks.
Till then, happy painting!
After hours, or weeks, of focus and sheer willpower, you finally have a completed puzzle. But now what do you do with it?
Undoubtedly, the best part about jigsaw puzzles is the process of placing each piece in its spot and watching the picture slowly come to life. That said, one cannot deny the intense and unparalleled pleasure of finally having completed a jigsaw puzzle.
Once the puzzle is complete, you sit back and look at it with awe. And then, you might wonder what to do with it and how to display your weeks-worth of hard work properly.
Well then, you’ve come to the right place. We will tell you about some of the best and most creative ways in which you can display a completed puzzle at home.
Take a look!
Ways To Display Puzzles
1. Framed Puzzle Using Glue
One of the most common ways that you can display your completed puzzle at home is to frame it. Now, there are two options for doing this - with or without puzzle glue. Let us first discuss how you can frame a puzzle using puzzle glue.
Begin by accurately measuring the size of your completed puzzle using a tape measure. Keep in mind that the dimensions of the finished puzzle may be different than what is mentioned on the box, so it is best to measure it yourself.
Now, purchase a frame that will fit the puzzle size correctly.
Choose a foam board, backer board, or a sturdy piece of cardboard that will act as the base of the frame. Slide a flat wax paper over the top of the puzzle to keep it flat and protected over time. Also, ensure that the edges of the cardboard or foam board are correctly cut, so they do not warp during the framing process.
Next, use a rolling pin over the completed puzzle to create one seamless piece without bumps.
Finally, purchase high-quality puzzle glue from your local craft store and brush it over the entire puzzle. Ensure that you don’t use too much glue, as it can damage the result of the glued puzzle. Although you can use powdered glue, it is best to use liquid glue for this process.
Once the glue sets, gently pick up the puzzle to check if it is ready to be framed. It is best to wait at least two hours till the glue dries; however, sometimes a puzzle glue may take longer to dry, especially if you use excess glue on it. Ensure that you do this in a well-ventilated area.
Again, apply glue to the back of the board and place the glued puzzle on top. Remove any excess glue between the two pieces, and allow it to dry.
2. Puzzle Framing Without Glue
While gluing puzzles to frame them might seem like a good option, it often reduces the value of the puzzle. This is why a lot of hobbyists prefer framing puzzles without glue. Let us tell you how you can do this at home.
Begin by measuring your finished jigsaw puzzle properly. You might come across jigsaw puzzle frames that are designed for 500-piece or 1000-piece puzzles; however, we recommend measuring the puzzle yourself to get accurate dimensions.
Now, keep in mind that most puzzle frames will not hold your completed piece properly without glue. It is best to opt for specialized puzzle frames that are designed to hold all the pieces together without damaging them.
The next part is the most crucial one - placing the jigsaw puzzle on the glass and flipping it over. Do this with extreme caution, as there is no glue to hold together the pieces. Once you place the jigsaw puzzle on the glass, add the backboard or cardboard and flip it over. Then, gently place it onto the frame and secure it with the attached clips, and you’re done!
Pro Tip: Avoid using weighted objects to secure the puzzle (with or without glue) as it may damage the surface of the puzzle and cause it to set incorrectly. You can also opt for dry mounting the puzzle from a professional store if you aren’t comfortable with the processes mentioned above.
3. Glass Top Coffee Table
Most of us have coffee tables in our homes. Well, what if you could display your artwork on a coffee table?
All you need to do is purchase a glass top for the coffee table (if it does not come with one). You can choose to add glue to preserve the puzzle, but this is optional. Furthermore, you can choose to turn the coffee table into a puzzle workstation.
Do this by adding a removable glass top for the coffee table. This way, when you need a break from assembling a puzzle, you can simply place the glass top to ensure that any work done does not get damaged or misplaced.
This is an idea that will not cost you too much and can be a fun project to work on with your friends or family. In fact, you can turn it into a holiday game by inviting friends and family to complete a jigsaw puzzle together and turning it into a creative coffee table.
4. Laminating Place Mats
There is always an occasion around the corner, be it someone’s birthday, an anniversary, a holiday coming up, or some other cause for celebration. Most of us go berserk trying to find the best gifts to give our loved ones, friends, or acquaintances during these occasions.
Over time though, the constant gift-giving can become an expensive affair. If you are on the lookout for cheaper DIY alternatives, consider laminating your puzzles into placemats. The entire process should not cost you too much, and it can become an interesting project to work on.
For starters, you need to purchase good quality laminating paper. Ensure that your puzzle is complete and ready to be laminated. When cutting the laminating paper, ensure that you leave about half an inch around the edges. You will find all the supplies you need at any local craft store or online store.
Now, you have to carefully iron the entire surface of the puzzle to ensure that it sticks. Iron around the folded edges of the puzzle for around 20 seconds to ensure that it is secure. Then, flip it over and continue the same process on the colored side of the puzzle.
Allow the surface to cool for about 10 seconds before removing the parchment paper. If you don’t allow it to cool first, the parchment paper may stick to the board instantly and damage the puzzle surface.
And that’s about it! Your personalized laminated placemats are ready for gifting.
5. Create A Wall Hanging
Wall hangings can make fabulous DIY presents for all kinds of occasions. Wouldn’t you love to hang one of your finished jigsaw puzzles on the wall as a beautiful display? Or, how about gifting a DIY puzzle wall hanging to your loved one on Valentine’s Day?
To begin with, go to a craft store or browse the internet to buy puzzles that strike your fancy. Once you get the puzzle home, begin the process of completing the puzzle design to create a beautiful, perfect puzzle for your loved one. You can even customize the puzzle using a photograph of your loved ones and turn it into a DIY puzzle.
Once you have the finished product, purchase high-quality matting that you can use as a base for the puzzle. Now, you can opt for the gluing process or add a frame if you wish to. These will make the finished product steady and keep it from falling apart or getting damaged.
Once you complete adding matting for the base, use either a spray adhesive, heat-sensitive adhesive, or mod podge to secure it. While gluing the puzzle is a good option, ensure that you do not add too much glue, as it can make the end product look too rigid and inflexible.
Allow the puzzle to dry entirely, then make a loop using a rope or a sturdy piece of thread to hang the artwork by.
6. Make Puzzle Jewelry
Begin by choosing your favorite pieces of a completed jigsaw puzzle that you want to use as DIY jewelry. Once you have selected the pieces, paint the back of the puzzle using a spray adhesive or PVA glue. Cut out a piece of cardboard or felt paper in a shape that fits the back of the puzzle piece.
Hang the original piece carefully so that the glue dries entirely. Now, get a chain or clasps and sew one end of the chain to the piece of felt. Attach the other end to create a necklace with the jigsaw piece as a pendant.
Alternatively, you can make earrings or bracelets using clasps or hoops to attach the jigsaw piece. Ensure that you let it dry completely. You can even add sparkles or varnish to give it a completed look with glitters or a glossy finish.
How To Solve Puzzles Like A Pro
Buying puzzles and trying to solve them is always a fun experience. In fact, you will come across multiple brands that offer unique and interesting jigsaw puzzles that are immensely fun to solve.
However, it can be quite frustrating when puzzle solving takes too long, too much of your focus, or you reach a dead end. If the thought of leaving an unsolved puzzle gives you nightmares, don’t fret.
Let us give you some tips that can help you solve puzzles in the fastest way possible like a pro. Take a look!
Choosing The Right Work Area
For most puzzle enthusiasts, there is no better feeling than ripping open the puzzle box and getting right into it immediately. However, before you put on your puzzle-solving hat, take a moment to assess the work area.
While choosing a coffee table or kitchen table might seem convenient initially, it can become a factor of disturbance when you need to use it for daily activities. As such, we recommend opting for a work area that goes relatively undisturbed. You can opt for a table that you don’t use regularly and lay out the puzzle pieces there.
Of course, ensure that the table is large enough to hold the finished work. Moreover, if you plan on gluing the puzzle or adding a frame to it, lay a large piece of cardboard on the table before you begin assembling it. This will help you flip over the puzzle and glue it once it is done.
Choosing The Right Lighting
Good lighting is critical when assembling a puzzle like a pro. Moreover, choosing the right kind of lighting can make or break the puzzle-solving experience.
It is best to avoid desk lamps with cords as they may get in the way during the process of solving a jigsaw puzzle. Opt for good overhead lighting or floor lamps that provide an adequate amount of light to work in.
Sort And Group
The next step may seem tedious and time-consuming, but it can be immensely beneficial when you’re scrambling around looking for the right pieces to fit.
Sort the puzzle pieces and group them according to the corner pieces, edge pieces, and center pieces. Use the reference image on the puzzle box to determine the right colors and pieces and group them beforehand.
This way, you have all the pieces sorted when you want to begin assembling the puzzle. While some puzzle pros opt to solve the edge pieces first, others may tell you to go with the corners first. This is your personal preference, so don’t try and adhere strictly to any rules and remember to have fun with it!
Solve It Like A Pro
Now that you have all the pieces sorted and grouped, you can begin by assembling the borders, corners, and finally, the center pieces. Again, remember that this isn’t a hard and fast rule. At the end of the day, it is essential to remember not to get frustrated with the process.
Puzzle-solving can be fun and an excellent group activity to enjoy with friends and family. Once you are done solving the puzzle, you can choose to glue it, frame it, or turn it into a gift for a loved one.
Final Words
While framing puzzles can be one of the best ways to display your completed artwork at home, keep in mind that doing so decreases the value of the puzzle. As such, we recommend not using these methods for valuable or antique puzzles.
Furthermore, ensure that you always glue puzzles in a well-ventilated area. That being said, if you have any other ideas on how to display completed jigsaw puzzles, please share them with us in the comments below. If we like your idea, we could re-share it with our other readers.
Let us know how you liked our tips and which idea you liked best. And don’t forget to share your artwork with us.
An all time favorite summer drink is the lemonade.
Lemonade stands are known to be extraordinary educative entrepreneurial lesson for children, a lesson that delights entire neighborhoods, one that greatly encourages communication and interaction between generations, a very important component in the the child`s development.
A fruitful lesson can start early on in the project as the lemon stand diy project brought from the ground up in the heart of the family can forge a beautiful experience, a timeless memory for child. A selection of very joyful lemonade stands to build happily with your loved ones has been featured below, it is full of awesomeness and full of color, cast a glance.
DIY Lemonade Stands
1. Wooden crates and color
Four simple crates in white have been used to shape the lemonade stand swiftly, effortlessly yet a great deal of effort went into branding, colors, little drops of color that added another dimension to the setting above.
The fantabulosity above wears teal to create an elegant contrast with the lemonade and lemons contained, a really elegant display that uses colors to its advantage.
The chalkboard allows you to personalize the lemonade stand in various ways and brings a personal touch that speaks of homemade. The classic look of a wooden lemonade stand can be accessorized with various branding pieces and ribbons if you feel the need, above the greenery gives it the perfect background and the lime and pink colors of the lemonade do stand out.
If they`re wooden pallets or salvaged wood from your local scrapyard it matters not ! All you need to ensure is proper sanding to avoid unwanted accidents at the workplace. This rustic already cozy and warm will be greatly complemented by the smiling child surrounded by lemonade and colorful accessorizes.
A nightstand might be the ideal height for your little one, the drawers can be used to contain supplies and the cash-box. The project is somehow reversible and really swift.
The diy enthusiast could spice things up a notch with proper woodworking and a perfect finish, pink accents complement the wood grain while a colorful ribbon brings in that eventful atmosphere.
A DIY play stand could double as a lemonade stand rapidly. A chalkboard surface ought to help you display the offer and personalize the stand even further.
Paper ribbons and good typography steal the show in this green setting, a wonderful wonderful image for all the right reasons. Follow the example brought forward by Ana White through the complete tutorial in the link below.
One wooden pallet or two wooden boxes can shape a small lemonade stand, are you ready ?
via See Vanessa Craft
10. Yellow dresser gains wheels
A dresser gained wheels for mobility and a bicycle handle for direction, a really beautiful and highly ingenious portable lemonade stand definitely worth pursuing.
Source Unknown
11. Wooden pallet lemonade stand
Wooden pallets can replace four simple crates easily. Choose one of these wooden resources to realize the lemonade stand fast and use the rest of your time to create tasty drinks and cookies !
via The Nerd’s Wife
12. Rapid easy-rolling slushie stand
Cardboard can be used around the ice box, the stand becomes really light and perishable, easy-recyclable. There`s no need to store it around the yard or garage till the next season if you can redesign it in a couple of days.
Between yellow and teal a very subtle contrast occurs and the stand above is definitely using this to its advantage, under the counter the little ones have sufficient storage with easy access thus helping them keep the counter clean, professionally-looking.
via Skip to My Lou
14. Epic rustic lemonade stand
Two slices of wood bring a nice touch to these lemonade jugs, pass by and enjoy a fresh cold drink.
Aged paint has a strong vintage feel that could make the case of a lemon stand. Here yellow and white on a wooden pallet look worn out in a subtle joyful way that makes you channel your attention on the exquisite treats on the counter as soon as possible.
via Lil’ Luna
16. All wood and yellow
Coffee filters have been used to shape those epic puffy flowers here but what looks really interesting is that lime-green lemonade on the counter that refreshes the atmosphere.
via I Know the Plans I have 4 You
17. Kitchen cabinet becomes lemonade stand
A salvaged kitchen cabinet can be transformed in one of the greatest lemonade stands in a few hours, pick the right color, raise the banner and start spreading sugared-joy.
via Restless Risa
18. Colorful sugar stand
Pink lemonade, simple lemonade, cupcakes and assorted candy are in the offer of this young gentleman. His presentation is flawless, the paper sliced lemons contribute to this epic image beautifully.
The lemonade bar offers you sufficient space to serve your drink within the premises. Simple and joyful, wearing yellow and white, it looks refreshing.
20. Lemonade from the little league
The outdoors do help you with greenery, a perfect background. Above simple tables have been wrapped in a cool tablecloth while the lemonade banner has been embellished with color. One extra table and extra ice chest are within the child`s grasp managing to keep the front desk clutter-free, impeccable.
via Design Dazzle
21. Cool girly lemonade stand using pastel colors
The buttery color above matched with pink shapes a really feminine, elegant balance, one splendid stand.
via My Simple Obsession
22. Fresh in nature
A colorful branding might not be your first priority when it comes to lemonade stands yet the graphic pattern above makes the whole ensemble look fresh, interesting, it pops out beautifully.
It has shelves, it has trays, it is ready for action. A sweet tea, a lemonade or a cookie it can serve in a very beautiful setting. Notice how the shade above makes the stand resemble something out of candy crush; a really great design at a small scale.
How do you see these epic diy lemonade stands? We would love to hear from you !
As an artist, it’s important to be well-versed in the different art mediums. And one of these art mediums is acrylic paint!
It is a standard method of coloring used by numerous artists today. With the correct application and usage, you can create brilliant art pieces with acrylic paints. Many even apply acrylic for body art, though body paints aren't supposed to contain ammonia and formaldehyde. So, acrylic paint is not suitable for putting on your face and can cause irritation to your skin.
However, this paint is a marvel for paintings and provides great results. But if you haven’t used acrylic paints before, or aren’t too savvy with them, then you may wonder about their durability. After all, you wouldn’t want your precious artwork to fade out after a while, would you?
In that context, you will be delighted to know that, unlike many other coloring methods, acrylic paints last for quite a long time. Besides, they require comparatively less maintenance as well. So, if you want to know precisely how long your art will hold out with acrylic paints, we suggest you keep reading.
And do check out our other article on acrylic Halloween paintings to know more on how you can prepare Halloween decorations with acrylic paints.
What Are Acrylic Paints?
Before we get to the primary point of our discussion, let us discuss a bit about acrylic paints first. Acrylic paint is made by mixing color pigments with synthetic polymer emulsions. These acrylic emulsions are known for being quick to dry, which is why acrylic paintings get cured very fast.
It is unlike other painting methods, such as watercolor or oil paint, which require some time to cure. However, you should know that acrylic paints do share some similarities with watercolor painting. Like watercolors, they are water-based too, which means that you need to add water to the paint before you using it.
But despite being water-based, acrylic paints become water-resistant when dry. In fact, the acrylic resin becomes quite durable when it dries, which makes it pretty resistant to scratching or rubbing as well. With that being said, they are not entirely invulnerable, as there are certain elements that can damage or destroy acrylic paints.
How Long Does Acrylic Paint Last?
As we have just said, acrylic paint is pretty durable. If stored correctly, acrylic paint usually has a shelf life of over 10 years. However, that is subject to the conditions in which you store it.
This paint typically comes packaged in an airtight tube or a small plastic container. And if kept unopened, it will last for the above duration, provided the storage temperature is correct.
On the other hand, for an opened acrylic paint, you need to watch out for contaminants, such as bacteria and mold. If it is not stored properly, the shelf life of an opened acrylic paint will be significantly reduced.
The above is applicable for artworks made with acrylic paints as well. Acrylic paint is one of the most durable art materials out there, and its color lasts for a long time on paper or canvas. In this regard, after application, the acrylic resins form cross-links when completely dried. This cross-linking is what increases the durability of the painting.
Now, the cross-links in the acrylic films do wear out over extended periods. But if stored at optimal temperatures and kept free from mold or bacteria, these processes occur slowly.
At this point, we should specify that the type of acrylic paint also plays a part in its durability. There are two types of acrylic paints available on the market today, one for students and casual users and the other for professional artists.
Artist-quality acrylics are made from high-quality resins, due to which they are more resilient than student acrylics. So, for long-term usage, it is better to invest in artist-grade acrylics, even though it is more expensive than student acrylics.
Causes Of Acrylic Paint Degradation And Their Prevention
You may be wondering now as to how exactly acrylic paints degrade despite being claimed as a durable painting method. That is what we have addressed in this section, along with some preventative measures to keep them from degradation.
1. Exposure To Extreme Temperatures
The acrylic resin from which these colors are made is somewhat sensitive to extreme temperatures. If exposed to extreme heat or cold, the chemical composition of the acrylic resins may change, which will affect the paint’s longevity.
Furthermore, as acrylic paint dries quickly, it can become crusty, flaky, and ultimately unusable when exposed to hot or cold temperatures. In such extreme temperatures, its quick drying property, which is its biggest advantage, becomes its greatest weakness. So, it becomes an important factor to consider if you want to store acrylic paint for a long time.
Optimally, you should keep it at normal room temperatures so that the paint doesn’t dry off too quickly. This is usually between 50 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit, both for storage and usage. Also, make sure it is not exposed to direct sunlight, rain, or snow. If you live in a place with extreme climates, it would be best to store it in an area where the temperature is moderate.
2. Too Much Moisture
We have already stated before that acrylic paint is water-based. So, unless you are using it, exposure to water or atmospheric moisture may reduce its lifespan. This is especially applicable for opened acrylic paint since unopened acrylic paint containers are fully airtight.
The water or moisture may trigger the resin to form cross-links, which will eventually cause it to dry up, thereby making it unusable. Furthermore, excess moisture facilitates the growth of organic contaminants, such as mold, which drastically reduces the shelf life of acrylic paint.
To avoid such issues, make sure that you store your acrylic paint in a dry environment. And if you have opened the container already, then you need to make it as airtight as possible while storing it away. This will make the paint last for a long time.
3. Presence Of Foreign Contaminants
The presence of foreign contaminants, such as dust and microbes can reduce the longevity of acrylic paints. Not only that, but they may also make your acrylic painting and colors look dirty.
This issue is more pronounced in the case of organic contaminants, such as bacteria and mold. Since they steadily multiply, they might damage the paint even more. Moreover, if there are bacteria and mold in your acrylic paint, it will start smelling sour and repulsive.
Such an issue is observed mainly for opened cans of acrylic paint, as unopened cans are fully sealed and airtight, which keeps these contaminants away. Opened cans can trap moisture, which provides a favorable environment for bacterial and mold growth.
So, make sure you seal the paint container firmly before putting it in storage. Ensure that the storage area is clean and dry as well. And if possible, try to use it in a dry place without moisture. That way, your paint won’t develop mold, which, in turn, will improve its lifespan.
Can You Use Expired Acrylic Paint
Since acrylic paint is made from synthetic substances, it doesn’t come with a definite expiration date. But over time, it will inevitably degrade and expire, just like any other material. At that point, it might not remain suitable enough for usage.
However, it can take acrylic paint decades to expire, especially if you store it properly. If you don’t, it will expire sooner than expected. In any case, you can try to salvage the paint using some of the techniques we have discussed below.
You should be advised, though, as these techniques are not entirely foolproof. As a result, you may not be able to salvage any paint, or the paint may not have the same quality as before.
On that note, never try to reuse acrylic paint that has been contaminated with mold, mildew, or bacteria, as that poses a serious health hazard. In that case, dispose of the paint like any other toxic waste.
1. Using A Paint Strainer
If you haven’t used your acrylic paint for a while, it may develop bumps or other texture irregularities. In that case, you can get rid of them using a paint strainer. It will filter out these impurities and irregularities so that the paint texture becomes even.
2. Using Paint Thinner
In many cases, the paint may become too sticky and viscous. This is most commonly observed in the leftover paint that lies at the bottom of the container. So, you can use a paint thinner to thin it out.
3. Re-Hydrating The Paint
Often, old acrylic paint has a tendency to become rigid and crusty when dry. One solution to reuse this dried paint is to re-hydrate it with water. For this purpose, you can add tap water at normal temperature, but warm water works best. When mixed in sufficient amounts, the paint will be restored to its normal consistency.
However, we would suggest not storing this wet paint again, as it may develop mold and mildew. The technique is best suited for small amounts of paint that will be used up quickly.
How Long Does Acrylic Paint Last Final Words
Artworks made with acrylic paint can be magnificent and vivid. And thanks to its long lifespan, your painting will keep looking like new for quite a long time.
But there are certain precautions you should take when storing this paint so that it can last for years. That’s why we have provided some storage guidelines that you can follow. In addition, we have provided some techniques that you can implement to try and reuse the old paint.
And that’s all we have to say about this topic. Stay tuned for more informative guides like this one in the future.
via 
via 
via 
via 
.
![[HLC] 4 x Hairpin Table Legs – Superior Double Weld Steel...](https://m.media-amazon.com/images/I/318bxPaqf0L.jpg)
![Bosch 4100-09 Review [A Clear Winner?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Bosch-4100-09-Review-11.jpg "Bosch 4100-09 Review [A Clear Winner?]")
![Sherwin Williams Vs. Benjamin Moore [A Clear Winner?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/09/Sherwin-Williams-vs.-Benjamin-Moore-01.jpg "Sherwin Williams Vs. Benjamin Moore [A Clear Winner?]")
.jpg){kind=link}